Home

Avaya BCM50 Configuration Guide

1. Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name s sir ao autobumping ee coe Call Appearance Call Log View information 812 537 Find oldest SWCA Call Log options 84 538 Find newest SWCA Call Log password 85 550 Silent Monitor Call Park 74 6 Ring Type Call Queuing 801 60 Page Camp on 82 61 Page Internal telephone speakers Class of Service 68 62 Page External external speakers Gonterenee Call 3 63 ee ee internal and Contrast adjustment 7 64 Line Pool Contact Center agent login log out 904 65 Messages View Contact Center Supervise 905 66 Voice Call Contact Center Supervisor Help 906 67 Saved Number Redial Dialing Mode 82 68 Class of Service Directed Pickup 76 69 Priority Call Display Voice Mail DN skillset or IVR DN 985 7 Contrast adjustment Do not Disturb 85 70 Transfer Do not Disturb Cancel 85 70 Transfer Cancel Exclusive Hold 79 71 Link Voice Mail Leave Message 980 73 Auto Hold Group Listening 802 73 Auto Hold Cancel Group Listening Cancel 802 74 Call Park Group Pickup 75 75 Group Pickup IP Services list 900 76 Directed Pickup IP Hot desking 999 77 Call Duration Timer Language Primary 501 78 Pause Language Alternate 502 79 Exclusive Hold Language Alternate 2 503 80 Ring Volume Language Alternate 3 504 81 Line buttons Move Last Numbe
2. United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Ringing service Off Manual Off Manual Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction global N A N A N A N A N A 999 overrides 112 Restriction filter 0 1 1800 N A N A N A 0 1 1800 0 0800 1 Service modes 01 1877 1888 1877 1888 911 911 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 5551212 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 010 1 00 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 7 Default 25 Default 11 Default 25 Default 7 Default 8 0 11 00 12 00 17 0 11 00 12 0 11 00 17 01 17 01 10 01 17 1 3 9 3 011 18 02 10 011 18 1 11 411 8 020 9 1 11 411 8 911 3 0200 10 911 3 02000 7 020000 10 0201 10 02010 9 07 10 071 11 0718 10 072 11 077 11 09 11 1 3 Unknown number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto None Set capabilities Pickup group None None None None None None
3. Device Configuration Guide 274 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 78 Transmission parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Transmission Loop length Tx CO gain Rx CO gain PCM coding adjustment short medium short medium Market profile scheme AC impedance capability long long Global A law 600 Q Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB Hong Kong mu law 600 Q No N A O N A N A 6 dB N A Ireland A law 270 Q Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB 750 1150 nF Mexico A law 600 Q Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 3 dB 6 dB New Zealand A law 320 Q 1050 Q II No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A 230 nF North America mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Poland A law 600 Q No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A PRC A law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Taiwan u law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB United Kingdom A law 320 Q 1050 Q II No N A 3 dB N A N A 3 dB N A 230 nF Table 79 Call supervision parameters Call supervision Link flash time Force on hook Wetting time peer Market profile ms OSI time ms time ms ms count ms Australia 100 100 1600 0 150 Bahrain 600 100 1600 N A 256 Brazil 300 100 2000 N A 256 CALA 600 100 1500 N A 256 Canada 600 100 1600 N A 256 Caribbean 600 100 1600 N A 256 Global 600 100 1500 N A 256 Hong Kong 500 100 1000 N A 256 Ireland 150
4. Analog Trunk parameters Table 77 contains information for the onboard GATI interface the G4x16 G8x16 MBM NTSB42AAABES NTS5B42AAACES the new GATM4 8 MBM NTS5B44BAABES NTSB44AAABE5S and the legacy GATM4 8 MBM NTSB44BAAA NTSB44AAAA in a BCMR2 system Differences between the interfaces are noted in this table The 4x16 NTSB42AAAA and CTM4 8 MBM s are not covered in this table Global analog trunks are not supported in the following market profiles Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden and Switzerland The analog trunk parameters are provided in the following tables e Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters on page 272 e Transmission parameters on page 273 e Call supervision parameters on page 274 e On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters on page 275 Table 77 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Pulse Dialing ms Differences between GATI G4x16 G8x16 New GATM4 8 Break Make Interdigit Market profile Localized and Legacy GATM4 8 time time time Australia Yes None 66 34 860 NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 273 Table 77 Localization PSTN standards and pulse dialing parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Pulse Dia
5. Device Configuration Guide 288 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys To add SWCA keys to your telephone SWCA keys can be assigned by your system administrator to a group of telephones Also each user can assign these keys on their own telephones 1 Enter FEATURE 3 2 Select a memory button with an indicator 3 Enter a SWCA code FEATURE 521 to FEATURE 536 Managing calls using SWCA keys To receive a call and assign it to a SWCA key Your system administrator can tell you how your system works The system may be programmed in one of the following ways e An incoming call automatically assigns to a free SWCA key when the call is answered To park the call press the SWCA key a second time Answering a second call The original call is automatically parked on a free SWCA key For this instance to occur your system must be set for Full Autohold FEATURE 73 e You press a free SWCA key to park the call to that key e When you press HOLD the call parks on a free SWCA key You also can perform one of the following steps to park the call e While the call is active enter the SWCA code that corresponds to the key where you want to park the call Refer to To add SWCA keys to your telephone on page 288 e While the call is active enter FEATURE 520 to search for the next available SWCA code assigned to your telephone Ifthe system finds an available code the call is asso
6. Setting Values Description Dialing options Standard dial Determine how the telephone handles dialed information Automatic dial Standard Lift the receiver and dial Pre dial Automatic dial Use for devices such as fax machines where you want the number to dial out without external cues Pre dial Dial the numbers then lift the handset to allow the telephone to dial the number Note Not all devices show all three options Contrast 1 through 9 Adjust the contrast of the display Ring type 1 2 3 or 4 Select a distinctive ring pattern type for the telephone Default is 1 Distinct rings in use lt read only gt Indicates the distinct ring patterns if any are currently in effect on any lines telephones or Hunt groups on the system Refer to the Warning below Warning AN If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a telephone and that distinctive ring pattern has already been assigned to a line all lines with that ring pattern will be reset to None If you assign a distinctive ring pattern to a line and that distinctive ring pattern has already been assigned to a telephone all telephones with that ring pattern are reset to pattern 1 You also can assign a distinctive ring pattern to a Hunt group Aux ringer lt check box gt Determine whether an auxiliary ringer if installed rings for incoming calls at this telephone Call log options No autologging No one answered Unanswered by me Select
7. 21 Getting Help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 00005 22 Chapter 2 Welcome panel caches ssa reseeuscdbedset ede re een ewes nannies 23 Chapter 3 Syslem SOMWA suc orinis chr sieercesckegucesseneereseseciase 25 Setting Date ANd TIME 2 2 ede ceases ee bode deed dead eae 25 Setting clock control to local system 000 c cece eae 28 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling 29 Configuring schedule names and timers 0000 eee ees 30 Delauk Ume SGUINGS snk bide sc hene eee S ieee eode shanewaahs du Es wad 31 Configuring scheduled service iia ccedsedaaedeaeeeseuceeeneeetaesas eEE es 31 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 200s e eee eee eee eee eee 33 BOM feature COdGS occ c eet anew ie Se Geeee edhe as Sdee ae ee eee Rnerteeeed 33 Button programming features ciccusacasebedeeeveensve seu des tansaedands 36 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 2 oc cc es teen deces sue nceccw es euienee ads 41 Main panel tabs common fields 0 000 cee es 42 LNG ACCOSS TED oe cep arsed eda bbe s PEEP DERE TET REESE SEES REESE ERE 43 Lite A SnO aD 2ctdeeende can tanaan doh Sepuaeedaahestesinb been neue 46 Ling Pool Actes taD i pce eb ee ceed ee eden eho Nee eee DERE E OPER ERR 48 Device Configuration Guide 8 Contents Anowar ONS IAW 61565 ct ene eee ke ous Phe he hohe so EGE a 49 Capabilities and Preferences main tab 0 0 c
8. NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 43 Table 8 Common columns for the main tabs Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Model Analog This heading appears for telephones in the digital DN range 7000 from the Start DN default 221 up to DN 433 Choose the 7100 setting that is appropriate for the telephone you want to 7208 configure 7310 7316 This field is read only if the telephone is already attached or 7316E registered to the system 7324 e 7310 7316 also 7406 cordless digital phone 2004 e 7316E also for 7316E digital phone with KIMs 2002 Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only 2001 2007 2033 2050 DMC prtb 2210 2211 2212 1120E 1140E Doophone Name lt up to seven Use this field to provide a more specific description of the alphanumeric characters gt telephone such as the last name of the user the location or the actual extension number if it is different than the DN number Also refer to Programming name display outgoing in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Line Access tab The Line Access tab displays the System DNs table Line access programming is performed using the three tabs in the bottom panel Refer to Figure 7 Device Configuration Guide 44 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Figure 7 System DNs table Active Application DNs 355 yplicatior 355 356 Application 356 357 pplicatior 357 358 Applicatior 358 360 pplica
9. New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Ringing service Manual Off Manual Off Manual Off mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction global N A N A 999 N A N A 112 overrides 112 990 Restriction filter N A 0 0 0800 1 0 N A N A Service modes 01 1 1800 1 1800 1877 1888 1877 1888 911 911 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 1976 1976 1 976 1 976 1900 1900 1 900 1 900 551212 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A 010 1 00 N A N A N A Restriction filter N A N A h N A N A N A Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 25 Default 7 Default 8 Default 7 Default 25 Default 7 0 11 0 11 00 17 0 11 00 12 1 3 9 3 00 12 01 17 01 17 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown number Variable Variable Variable N A Variable Variable length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable 7 Variable Variable length National number Variable Variable Variable 10 Variable Variable length Handsfree Auto Auto None Auto Auto Auto Set capabilities Pickup group None None None None None 0 Allow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward delay Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Note The
10. Device Configuration Guide 120 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Configuring an analog telephone On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to customize the telephone operations The following headings correspond to each panel Refer to the Programming notes in each section for configurations that are unique or specific for ISDN telephones Table 37 Analog telephone customization Sheet 1 of 2 Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures Model Other System DNs Line Access tab on page 125 Name Unique to each device or device loop Appearance Type Ring only Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 128 Caller ID Set Select check box connected to ASM8 modules or target lines Intercom keys Two not configurable Configuring Capabilities and Preferences on page 130 The following settings are the only capability settings that are valid for analog devices ATA answer timer Keep short for modems and fax machines Configuring telephone capabilities on page 131 ATA tones check box ATA use On site Off site works for devices connected to ATA modules only Msg indicate ATA device modem telephone Disconnect supervision Select for auto answer modems and fax machines Do not select for telephones The following settings are common settings that are specific t o analog telep
11. 229 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features You can program telephones and devices to perform specific feature services such as dialing an emergency number as soon as the handset is picked up or acting as the control set for the system schedules Special feature telephones on page 229 and Setting up a central answering position on page 231 Special feature telephones The following are telephones that are specifically programmed to perform a system operation Hotline telephone You can define a telephone that automatically dials an emergency or direct number when the handset is lifted Setting up the hotline Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Preferences bottom tab Setting up the hotline for analog telephones See also e Line Assignment tab on page 46 e Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices on page 122 analog devices Control telephone The control telephone allows you to control other telephones in the system by turning service schedules off and on Defining a control telephone You can define a control set for lines individual telephones and for hunt groups Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines gt Control Set column Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab Also refer to e System schedule settings
12. Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management Device Configuration Guide 102 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups Hunt Groups system setup The main panel shown in Figure 35 lists the Hunt Groups and the parameters that define Hunt Group features Figure 35 Hunt Groups Hunt Groups Hunt Groups HG Name DN Mode Hunt Delay If Busy Queue Timeout Overflow Aux Ringer Distinct Ring 01 HG01 39 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 397 0 HG02 398 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 398 03 HGO3 399 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 399 0 HGO4 00 Broadcast NA Busy tone 60 400 HGO5 01 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 401 HGO6 02 Broadcast NA Busy tone 60 402 HGO 03 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 403 HGO8 40 Broadcast NA Busy tone 60 404 HG09 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 405 HG10 Broadcast N A Busy tone 60 406 None None None None None None None None None Oo c Oo Oo Oo E Oo Oo Oo Oo None Table 33 describes the fields found on the Hunt Groups main panel Refer to Configuring the Hunt Group general settings on page 105 for notes about working with this table Table 33 Hunt Group settings Sheet 1 of 3 Field Values Description HG lt 01 30 gt This number identifies the hunt group to the system This is also the number assigned to the telephone when you add the telephone as a Hunt Group member Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter a logical name that describes the group function
13. Feature Settings panel These settings affect all telephones They determine whether the listed features are allowed or how they function Figure 23 System feature settings Feature Settings Business Name Feature Settings Background music 7 Onhold Tones S Answerkeys Basic Page tone Held line reminder of a Receiver volume Use sys volume Message reply enhancement 7 Delayed ring transfer After 4 rings v Directed pickup Force auto spd dial over ic conf go Park mode Lowest J Set relocation o Maximum CLI perline 30 Alam set 2214 Table 23 describes each field Table 23 Feature settings Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Value Description Business Name lt maximum of 8 Enter the name to display on outgoing calls alphanumeric Refer to Programming Business name display outgoing in the characters gt Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Feature Settings Background music lt check box gt Select the check box to enable the caller to listen to music through your telephone speaker after pressing FEATURE 86 on your telephone A music source must be connected to system Refer to the BCM50 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 for information about installing an external music source Also refer to Selecting the music source on page 294 Default Cleared Page tone lt check box gt Select the check box to sound a tone on the sets before a page
14. HHH TRAHSFR HHH busa PRIORITY LATER HHH calling HHH QU ITEKSFOK OTHERF JOIHESIT Description of error or action Button inquiry The display shows the directory number of the telephone and the assigned name Press NEXT to see the first line assigned to ring at the intercom button Press or press VIEW or VIEW to view a number that is too long to fit on the display Press OK when you have finished Transfer You are talking to the person to whom you want to transfer the call Press RETRY if you decide to transfer the call to another person Press RLS or JOIN to transfer the call Camp on The person to whom you redirected a call has Do Not Disturb active The call has returned to you Press the CALLBCK button or the line button to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset Transfer The person to whom you tried to transfer a call did not answer Press CALLBCK or the flashing line button to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset to reconnect You are receiving an internal call from extension NNN forwarded by extension SSS You have an Answer button for extension SSS and an internal call from NNN is ringing on SSS This prompt remains on your display while you are on a call you have dialed To transfer the call press TRANSFR You are connected to an internal call Press TRANSFER to transfer the call The telephone you have cal
15. Next step Using the features Refer to the BCM50 2 0 Hospitality Features Card NN40020 300 117 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Refer to the following information for attributes that are specific to analog telephones and devices Refer to Configuring an analog telephone on page 120 Task Setting up each analog device attached to your system Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached to analog station modules or to digital station modules through an analog terminal adapter ATA module e Configuring an analog telephone on page 120 Analog telephones and devices have a limited feature set They do not have programmable buttons access to remote voice mail systems or user preferences These telephones also do not support Answer DNs As well specific ATA settings are required These settings depend on how the telephone is connected to the system ASM ASM8 or ATA Device Configuration Guide 118 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Prerequisite programming The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration e Numbering plan e Lines programming e Analog or digital module installation configuration and wiring to the devices ATA module if required NN40020 300 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices 119 Analog device DN record overview
16. Table 5 describes the fields under Scheduled Services Table 5 Service settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Service control password lt alphanumeric gt Restriction and Routing schedules require the user to enter a password on the control telephone before scheduling can be changed If you forget the password enter a new password Device Configuration Guide 32 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling Table 5 Service settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Schedule lt read only gt These are the schedules that are available on the system Routing Svc Off Manual Auto Off prevents the service from being activated Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control telephone This setting overrides any automatically running schedules Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the Common Settings heading These times are then automatically executed when the service is active Default Off Overflow lt check box gt If all the lines used by a route are busy when a call is made you can program Routing service to overflow to the route used for normal mode If the call is routed to use the normal mode the telephone sounds a warning tone and displays the message Expensive route The caller then can release the call to avoid the toll charges or can continue
17. c key On hook idle Enters the Redial List menu Off hook active Activates a feature option gt m key On hook idle Enters the Telephone Book menu Off hook active Activates a feature option v m key On hook idle Turns the handset off with a long four second key press Off hook active Turns the microphone off or on when you are on a call Feature key On hook idle Turns the display on for three seconds with two rapid key presses OR Starts a feature session Off hook active Starts or ends a feature session OR Turns the loud speaker on with a long key press R 4 key On hook Opens your message list with a short key press idle OR Enters the text message MSF MAIL menu with a long three second key press Off hook Places calls on hold active sma On Off hook key Device Configuration Guide 182 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 4 413X 414X handset Sheet 3 of 3 On hook Turns the handset on idle Off hook Ends an active call active NN40020 300 183 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Element Manager supports the programming of button functions for the digital and IP telephone sets Use the Desktop Assistant family of products to customize button programming and to generate labels fo
18. 2 Inthe Line Assignment subpanel in the lower frame click Delete 3 Click Yes Device Configuration Guide 108 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups NN40020 300 109 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt Groups Task e Monitor external Hunt group calls Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 109 Monitoring external hunt group calls Use the Silent Monitor feature to monitor external hunt group calls within a hunt group Any two line display telephone can be assigned as a supervisor telephone to allow this feature There are two places in the Element Manager where the feature configured e Silent Monitor settings are configured on the Global Settings panel Refer to Silent Monitor on page 84 e Supervisor terminals are configured on the System DNs record Refer to Capabilities tab on page 52 On the Telset there are three places to set up this feature e Terminals amp Sets gt select the DN gt Capabilities gt SM supervisor e Passwords gt SM passwd e System prgrming gt Featr settings gt Silent monitor To use a silent monitor Perform the following using a two line display telephone designated as a supervisor telephone 1 Enter FEATURE 550 2 Enter the Silent Monitor password Default SILENT 745368 3 Enter the DN for the Hunt group member you want to monitor If there is an active external Hunt group call at that telephone you are connected t
19. Dae eH ORE eo SS 297 Opening the Music Manager Administration application 297 Loading MUSE onto the BCM ood heeds erri dhe aca niae Ea 297 Dalemo musie fom BOM sore ciextwasede deter raritne IEE ERORE sees 298 Adding music to the Play Lisl srersisicerorrerikiid ira EESE KEAVA 299 Device Configuration Guide 14 Contents Removing music from the Play LIGhcccdcsesboeereneeiaeee rears tame eco Using the BemAmp Player aais esis ee es boas eben Ge a eo es oN Ree ee ees Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source 000055 NN40020 300 15 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Refer to the following topics for general BCM information e About BCM e Symbols and conventions used in this guide on page 18 e Related publications on page 19 e How to get Help on page 21 About this guide The Device Configuration Guide describes how to configure and assign features to telephony devices through Telset and through Element Manager Purpose The concepts operations and tasks described in this guide relate to the BCM software This guide provides task based information about how to assign features and provide basic programming for the Business Communications Manager Use Element Manager Startup Profile and Telset Administration to configure various BCM parameters In brief the information in this guide explains e global telephony settings e steps to
20. Device Configuration Guide BCMSO 2 0 Business Communications Manager Document Status Standard Document Number NN40020 300 Document Version 01 03 Date January 2008 NORTEL Copyright 2005 2008 Nortel Networks All Rights Reserved The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks Trademarks Nortel the Nortel logo and the Globemark are trademarks of Nortel Networks Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by Nortel Networks is under license All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Task List Getting started with BCM 0 0c cece eee eee eee eee 15 Welcome PANG ccccneece snr eeece deed dhe rene sees sanded ee wnewa 23 System Sofware icccaseacesidec dees tecieenessesevacssazeaen 25 System schedule settings and services scheduling 29 System features and feature codes ccc cece ee eee eee 33 DN records par
21. HHH Idle HEST MIEW Description of error or action Double SS symbols indicate a long distance call May be available with Call Display services Speed dial Continue entering the number you want to program You can change the number by pressing BKSP or the volume bar When you are finished press HOLD or OK Conference call You are trying to add a fourth party to your conference call or to join two conferences together Release one call from the conference before adding another or keep the two conferences separate The conference master presses one of the keys representing the three party conference slaves The total number of conferees is displayed transiently for three seconds Call duration timer The display shows the last call you made or the total elapsed time in minutes and seconds on a current call Button inquiry The display shows the number and name of the line Press SHOW to view the redirection status of the line Hunt group The hunt group member is in a conference and the supervisor cannot break in The display briefly shows Conference busy and then reverts to this prompt Hunt group The hunt group member currently is not handling a call Device Configuration Guide 236 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt HHH lt SETHAME gt HEST WIEW HHHHHHHHHHHHH s a IEW OF HHHeSSS CAHCL RETR JOIH HHH DHE CALLBCE HHH no rer ls CALLBCE HAH eSSS HMMA TRAHSFR
22. Table 20 describes the fields on this panel Table 20 Set Restrictions tab fields Setting Values Description Schedule Normal The Normal schedule runs when no other schedules are active Night If schedules are being used select the relevant schedule and enter Evening the required filter Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 Use Filter lt XX gt Enter the restriction filter you want to be active for each schedule that you use NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 67 Table 21 provides a list of default restriction filters Table 21 Schedule filter defaults Schedule Restriction filter Schedule Restriction filter defaults defaults Normal 02 Schedule 4 00 Schedule 1 Night 11 Schedule 5 00 Schedule 2 12 Schedule 6 00 Evening Schedule 3 Lunch 13 Line Set Restrictions tab The Line Set Restrictions settings allow you to assign a restriction filter to a specific line for outgoing calls at a specific telephone This type of filter replaces any line or set restriction filters that can otherwise apply Line Set restrictions restrict the numbers the user can dial on a line but only from that telephone The same line on another telephone can have different restrictions You can apply a different line restriction for normal service and for each of the six schedules Figure 21 Line Set Restrictions panel Details for DN 221 Assigned Lines Line Set
23. Table 91 Music parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Definition Music Source Select Audio Jack if you are using an external music source that is connected to the MSC card on the BCM Select Music Manager if you are using the IP Music feature to connect to the music source available on the BCM If you select Music Manager you must then configure the BemAmp application before you can use it For information about how to configure BemAmp refer to Configuring Music Manager on page 297 Select Streaming Server if you are using the IP Music feature to connect to a music source on the data network If you select Streaming Server you must configure the Network Device before you can use it For information about how to configure the Network Device refer to Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source on page 301 Note A third party application that supports streaming G 711 is required Audio Jack Server Field not required Server RTP port Field not required Stream Type Field not required Frames per packet Field not required Music Manager control Launch Music Manager Launch the Music Manager Administration web page Server Field not required Server RTP port Field not required Stream Type Field not required Frames per packet Field not required Device Configuration Guide 296 Chapter 30 Configuring th
24. external autodial 63 hotline 57 user speed dial 63 Run Stop code 9 35 S Saved Number Redial 67 35 37 schedules control telephone 229 ringing services 97 routing service overflow 32 send message code 1 37 NN40020 300 Index 313 service mode status 870 39 service schedules control telephone 229 services changing restrictions at telephone 872 39 changing ringing at telephone 871 39 changing routing at telephone 873 39 extra dial set 32 programming auxiliary ringer 100 programming ring groups 100 Restriction services 872 on 872 off 36 ringing 97 Ringing services 871 on 871 off 36 Routing services 873 on 873 off 36 Schedule 1 night 31 schedule 2 evening 31 schedule 3 lunch 31 schedule 4 31 schedule 5 31 schedule 6 31 service mode status at telephone 870 39 trunk answer 199 trunk answer ringing services 32 view active services 870 36 Services key 170 services list IP telephones 900 34 set lock dialing restrictions 65 set relocation 77 short tones 54 signal call 807 see also Ringing call 35 link 228 pause 228 run stop 228 signal call ringing at telephone 807 38 silent monitor FEATURE 550 84 monitoring mode 84 programming overview 230 SM password 84 SM sets 84 SM supervision 54 skillset status CC 909 39 SM password silent monitor 84 sets silent monitor 84 SM supervision 54 Soft keys 170 174 gt gt 170 Speaker key 1
25. on page 214 Call display information If the telephone is programmed to allow CLID the telephone displays the name number or line name of a ringing or active call If the call is redirected you can view redirection information To allow call display 1 Press FEATURE 811 Displays the CLID of the active or ringing call 2 Press to move through the information displays Call duration timer Briefly displays the approximate length of your current or most recent call Activate feature FEATURE 77 Time and date display e Static display changes the first line of the display to show the current time and date based on system time Activate feature FEATURE 806 Cancel feature FEATURE 806 e Active call display briefly displays the time and date Activate feature FEATURE 803 Device Configuration Guide 214 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Malicious Caller ID MCID Note This feature is available only on an ETSI ISDN line This feature records caller information at the central office for the last external call on the active ETSIISDN line This feature must be available from your service provider before you can activate it in your system If this service is active on the line you must press FEATURE 897 within 30 seconds after a caller hangs up and before you hang up Enabling the feature on the system Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt Private Network gt ETSI
26. on page 227 Call Park on page 210 Callback on page 211 Configuring an analog telephone on page 120 Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 211 Blocking outgoing name display at the telephone in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Capabilities tab on page 52 Supervisor sets Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 109 Capabilities and Preferences main tab on page 50 Set log space Call log on page 214 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management Device Configuration Guide 74 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings The global telephony settings affect a number of different telephony features e Business Name This is part of the CLID feature It displays the business name on outgoing calls for all system telephones on which CLID is allowed and activated e Feature settings These affect different aspects of how various features act or if they are allowed on the system e Timers provides timeout parameters for different types of telephony features e System wide call appearance SWCA fields determine how the telephones will relate calls to SWCA assignments Feature Settings Refer to the following for a description of the fields in each segment of this panel e Feature Settings panel on page 75 e Timers on page 78 NN40020 300 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings 75
27. Configuration Administration 9 fH System Administrator Access E Resources E Telephony Data Services Applications co a E H E Welcome Account Notifications User ID Telset user ID Last successful login Table 3 Welcome panel fields WARNING Your telset password must be changed WARNING The following account passwords must be changed Numeric ID 738662 Attribute Value Description Current Account Account Notifications lt read only gt Displays BCM administrative messages or notifications regarding the current user User ID lt read only gt User ID you used to log on to the system Telset User ID lt read only gt User ID used to logon to the telset configuration interfaces for telephony and CallPilot applications Last successful login lt read only gt Date and time that this user account was last logged in the system NN40020 300 25 Chapter 3 System Software The system software identity The following path indicates where to access the system identification settings in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt System gt Identification Figure 3 System Identification panel System Identification Description Systemname BCM50R2ip24 Version Country or region Table 1 describes each field on this panel Table 1 System I
28. Fwd Delay 2 3 4 6 10 Define the number of rings before the system forwards an unanswered call This heading only appears after you enter a Call Forward No Answer number and press Enter Default 4 Fwd Busy up to 24 digits Redirect incoming calls when this telephone is busy with another call Fwd All up to 24 digits This setting is the same as using FEATURE 4 at a telephone When this feature is active all calls to this telephone are forwarded to the destination entered in this field If you are forwarding calls to a remote location ensure that you include the required destination access codes A user can press FEATURE 4 to cancel this feature Device Configuration Guide 46 Chapter6 DN records parameters Line Assignment tab The line assignment setting allows you to assign physical trunks and target lines to each telephone Target lines are used as incoming only Other lines can be used to both place and answer calls if they are configured to do so Figure 8 Line Assignment tabbed panel Assigned Lines table Details for DN 354 Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Assigned Lines Line Appearance Type Appearances Caler ID Set Vmsg Set Priv Received Pub Received Appr amp Ring 1 o Fi Add Table 10 describes the fields on this panel Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Values Description Line lt
29. Observe RETRY OF On another call LATER On another call PRIORITY LATER On hold LIMEHAM Outgoing line Paging ALL Paging buss Page choice SETS SPER BOTH Page timeout Parked call CALLBACK Park denied Parking full Parked on nz PAGE EXIT Fickur Fickur denied Description of error or action Silent monitor The DN you entered belongs to a portable telephone or an ISDN terminal Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Silent monitor The supervisor hunt group member and the caller are all connected If you make a mistake entering a DN number press RETRY and re enter the number If the number you entered is correct press OK The telephone you have called is on another call Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Message features Priority call The telephone to which you want to transfer the call is on another call You have placed one or more calls on hold The name of the line held the longest appears on the display Line redirection You are trying to redirect a line and the line you have selected is the outgoing line you have selected as a destination You cannot redirect a line to itself Select another line Page You are making a page The display shows the page zone you have selected Press FEATURE or RLS when finished Page A page is being made in the page zone you have requested Page Select the type of page you want Page The time allocated for pag
30. The indicator on all telephones in the group becomes solid indicating an active call Other features that affect how you use SWCA Timed out SWCA calls If a call remains parked and unanswered on a SWCA key for a pre set period of time the Call Park timeout timer the call unparks from the SWCA key and rings again at the telephone from which it was last parked NN40020 300 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 291 Outbound calls You also can park out dialed calls on a SWCA key If your system is set up to automatically assign calls toa SWCA key the call will assign to a key as soon as it is answered Otherwise during your call you can press a free SWCA key or HOLD to park the call on a SWCA key This makes the call available to other users in the group and it frees up your intercom or line Auto Hold FEATURE 73 Your telephone must be set to have Full Auto hold so that a call automatically gets placed on Hold if you answer a second call If your telephone does not have Auto Hold on use FEATURE 73 to change the setting Transferring calls FEATURE 70 If you transfer the call to a telephone that does not have the same SWCA keys assigned the call will disappear from the SWCA key on your telephone when the call transfers If the call needs to be reassigned to your group the person who answered the call enters a SWCA control code that is assigned to your group to return the call to a SWCA designation at y
31. This name also acts as calling line display for incoming calls DN lt read only gt Hunt Group DNs begin at 461 by default 461 490 The DN value can be changed under Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt DNs The DN number can be assigned to memory buttons on telephones that are not part of the hunt group NN40020 300 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 103 Table 33 Hunt Group settings Sheet 2 of 3 Field Values Description Mode Broadcast Sequential Rotary Select how you want the line to present to the group Broadcast simultaneously rings at each non busy telephone in the hunt group All telephones receiving the call also display the calling line identification from the line if the telephone or line is configured to offer that service Any of the alerted telephones can access the call Only one call is presented to a hunt group at a time Other calls are queued until the first call is answered Then the next call rings on the remaining non busy telephones This feature allows the call load to be continuously spread across the entire member group Default Broadcast Sequential rings the first telephone in the hunt group list If that telephone is busy the system continues down the hunt group priority list until a non busy telephone accepts the call In this case all incoming calls are processed simultaneously and are delivered based on the priority list Wit
32. When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language EuroFrench German English Dutch English UK English first is default English English French English French VICAP Spanish EuroFrench Spanish Turkish Device Configuration Guide 266 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 74 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Ireland Analog VSC None None None None None 141 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None None 141 pulse BRI VSC None None None None None 141 BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode Release reason Release text Simple Detailed Simple Simple None Detailed Release code On Off On On Off Off Tone duration 120 120 120 120 120 120 DTMF parameters ms Pause time ms 3 5 3 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 3 5 Interdigit time 100 100 80 80 80 100 ms Table 75 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Access codes Direct dial digit 9 0 0 0 9 0 Dest code f
33. at telephone 819 39 DND on busy 201 intrusion controls 203 privacy 202 BRI line types 284 broadcast mode 103 Business Communications Manager overview 16 busy hunt group options 103 priority call code 69 37 signal 218 tone hunt groups 103 button defaults 153 7000 telephone 158 7208 telephone 157 7316 telephone 156 7316E telephone 154 7406 telephone 159 T7100 button defaults 158 T7100 telephone 158 button inquiry a 33 button programming answer keys 77 features list 36 internal autodial 62 buttons activate memory programming 3 35 answer keys 200 memory 225 move line 81 34 C call buttons SWCA 81 duration 213 call charge 818 33 39 call display call log note 135 programming 52 call duration 77 38 call forward activate 4 37 activate at telephone 4 33 all calls hunt groups 234 cancel at telephone 4 33 NN40020 300 Index 305 DPNSS Embark switch 133 no answer hunt groups 234 to voice mail 209 to voice mail 984 33 40 call information accessing 811 33 current call 811 38 Call Log options 56 call log autobumping 815 39 autodumping 215 automatic 135 delete items at telephone 815 34 display prompts 247 feature codes 215 manual 813 34 MCID 897 35 options 84 34 overview 214 password 85 34 space reallocating 214 telephone 135 using 135 view 812 38 view information 812 34 call logit manual 813 38 Call Park parking acall
34. dial the retrieval code X25 X is the assigned access code Callback When you direct an answered call to another telephone the system monitors the call to ensure it is answered If no one answers the call within a set length of time the system returns the call to you To set the number of rings before the call is transferred back Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings in the Timers subpanel select the number of rings from the Transfer callback timeout drop down list Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons System wide call appearance SWCA keys allow you to control call park and retrieval features on any type of line across the local system These features expand the BCM call park and call retrieve features by providing visual indications of the status of any call parked on an SWCA button with indicators The calls can also be controlled by directly entering the SWCA feature codes You can use SWCA programming to define logical groups of telephones Each group can be assigned a set of the SWCA codes which allows them to pass calls within the group Each telephone in the group also displays the current status of the call so users can determine which calls are being handled Configuring SWCA system controls The following procedure describes how to perform the system configuration for the SWCA feature To configure the SWCA system controls 1 Check that the Call Park Access code has a
35. person you called has blocked your call The person at extension NNN has not answered the camped call The call has come back to you Press the line button or CALLBCK to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset to reconnect to the call Camp on You have tried to camp an internal call You can camp external calls only Camp on Dial the number of the internal telephone to which you want to camp the call Message You entered an invalid number when trying to cancel a message You cannot use Ring Again on your current call You can use Ring Again while you have a busy signal on an internal call or line pool request or while an internal call is ringing Message You cleared an external message from your message waiting list The message exists in your message center until you erase it there You attempted to allow CLI for an assigned line for more than 30 telephones Device Configuration Guide 238 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Conference busy Cont Resrce Full Denied in admin Dial voice call DHE from HHH DHO transfer DH Idle DET Line a l Do not disturb PRIORITY LATER Do not disturb CAHCL RETRY JOIH Enter code Enter digits QUIT Ok Enter zones ALL Exchanged Exrensive route F QUIT CLEAR Description of error or action Conference You tried to make a conference call but your system is handling the maximum number of conf
36. s NTP key ID NTP key string Current Date and Time Date and time 2006 05 30 15 46 53 x Year l 7 EJ Timezone MERE lv Table 2 describes each field on the Date and Time panel Table 2 Date and Time panel fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Date and Time Source NTP Set to NTP Network Time Protocol if the system uses a Trunk network server to determine the correct time and date Manual Set to Trunk to use time and date settings from a CO through an analog or IDSN line Set to Manual if you want to be able to manually configure the time and date for your system Default Manual NN40020 300 Chapter 3 System Software 27 Table 2 Date and Time panel fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Network Time Protocol Settings Settings are active only if Clock Control Type is set to Network Time Protocol NTP server address lt IP address gt The IP address of the server that controls the network time and date Synch every s NA not applicable 1 XXXX The number of seconds specified to elapse between contacts with the NTP server 1 XXXX Number of seconds between contacts with the NTP server NTP security mode Secured Select whether the NTP security mode is secured or Unsecured unsecured Raise alarm if clock differs lt seconds gt The number of discrepancy seconds specified that must
37. turn the IP Phone over and locate the label containing the product code NT code The product code identifies the model of your IP Phone Table 52 IP Phone 2002 product codes Product code Model NTDU76xxxx Phase 1 NTDU91xxxx Phase 2 Where xxxx represents any valid character Device Configuration Guide 162 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones IP telephone 2001 button defaults Figure 53 2001 default button formatting Feature Display menu commands Directional Services Proar Mail box in programmable Goodbye Release Hold Ringing call programmable The 2001 is a simple version of the IP telephone None of the programmable buttons have indicator displays so all incoming calls must be set to Ring only Figure 53 shows the positions of the three programmable buttons and which button number corresponds to each of the three buttons Although two intercom lines are assigned to the telephone there is no visible indicator of the lines However a light at the top of the telephone blinks The user presses the Hold key to toggle between two active calls or to put one call on hold to make a second call Handsfree and mute are not available since this telephone does not have an external speaker It also does not support a headset The only indicator on the telephone is the message waiting indicator MWD lamp NN40020 300 Chapter
38. 1 22 Appr Ring Line Ring only f 3 223 Appr only Add Add Table 34 describes the fields found on the Details for Hunt Groups tables Table 34 Hunt Group tables Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Hunt Group Members subpanel Seq No lt read only gt This is the position of the telephone on the list This is particularly important for sequential calls which start at the top of the list and move sequentially through the list DN lt DN gt This is the DN of the telephone assigned to this hunt group Appearance Type Ring only Select the setting that suits the telephone and the environment Appr amp Ring Ring only Telephone rings when a call comes in 7000 and Appr only 7100 digital phones and telephones that have no available programmable memory buttons with indicators model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Appr amp Ring Appears on a button with indicator which flashes when a call comes in and it also rings Appr only Appears on a button with indicator which flashes when a call comes in Action Add 1 On the Hunt Groups panel select the group where you want to add members 2 Inthe Members subpanel in the lower frame click Add 3 Enter the DN for the telephone you want to add as a member 4 Select an Appearance Type from the drop down list Delete 1 On the Hunt Groups panel select the hunt group where you want to delete members 2 Inthe Membe
39. 1 At the telephone enter FEATURE 510 Press CHANGE Press to toggle between plus and minus Use if local time is ahead of system time typically you use when the system is west of the local site 4 Enter the number of hours difference NN40020 300 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 151 5 Press OK Offset time zones For areas such as Newfoundland Canada where the time zone is offset from a full hour press the key to add 0 5 to the number of hours then press OK Note The telephone is still configured to change when Daylight Savings Time occurs if the host system is programmed to change Therefore if the telephone is in an area that stays on Standard Time year round for example Saskatchewan Canada you must readjust the time on your IP telephone at each time change You must also readjust the time if the IP telephone is in a time zone that changes and the system is not for example if the telephone is in Alberta Canada and the system is located in Saskatchewan Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone Firmware is the software stored in the telephone When the system is upgraded with a new IP telephone firmware load this firmware load automatically downloads into the IP telephones when the telephones next connect to the system The IP Terminal Details subpanel has a Force firmware download button that enables you to initiate an immediate download to a telephone You force a download in s
40. 100 2000 N A 200 Mexico 600 100 1600 N A 256 New Zealand 90 100 1600 15 200 North America 600 100 1600 N A 256 Poland 500 500 1800 N A 256 PRC 600 100 1600 N A 256 Taiwan 600 100 1600 0 256 United Kingdom 90 100 1600 15 200 NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 275 Table 80 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 1 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone Australia Bellcore Not No No ROI and Supported Not Not supported ROA supported supported Bahrain ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 10 Hz supported supported 380 10 on 380 10 off Brazil Not Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not supported A C 425 25 Hz supported supported NOTE Not 250 ms On Supported on 250 ms Off GATI or 10 Legacy GATM4 8 CALA Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Canada Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Caribbean Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Global Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Hong Kong Bellcore Not No Supported Yes NOT Supporte
41. 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 163 Model 2001 feature buttons e Four display buttons appear under the telephone display screen The first button defaults to act as the Feature button green button The other buttons provide access to menu commands that appear on the display as with the other types of telephones on the system e The IP telephone Features list is accessible through the button that defaults to Services FEATURE 900 This button can be programmed to another feature e One of the buttons defaults to the voice mail login FEATURE 981 This program can be programmed to another feature such as the dial string for a remote voice mail system e The Hold and Goodbye release features are automatically programmed above the Ringing call button which is also programmable The Ringing call button FEATURE 807 provides call send and receive access allows users to toggle between two calls using the Hold key and is required if the Conference feature is allowed on the telephone e The telephone has an additional five hidden button assignments that can be programmed with Answer DNs or SWCA assignments All assignments on the virtual buttons are Ring only SWCA calls are accessed by using the feature code for each assigned button 2001 default button mapping Hidden button assignments Bin PBX DID Btn PBX DID 01 Ringing Call F807 04 Blank 02 IP Services List F 900 05 Blank 03 Vo
42. 250 ms on 1800 333 ms 250 ms off silence 333 ms 1s off France Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 440 11 5 500 ms on 1800 11 5 333 ms 500 ms off silence 25 333 ms silence 1s off Germany Silence 425 11 5 240 mson 425 11 5 150 ms on 240 ms off 475 ms off Global Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Holland 425 11 5 500 ms on 950 1400 18 333 ms 425 21 500 ms on 50 ms off 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1s off Hong Kong Silence 480 620 14 5 500 mson 425 11 5 500 ms on 500 ms off 500 ms off Ireland 400 432 14 5 0 4 s 0 4 s 425 17 5 450 ms on 425 17 5 450 ms on 450 ms off 450 ms off Italy Silence 425 8 200 mson 425 8 500 ms on 200 ms off 500 ms off Mexico Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off New Zealand 400 13 0 1 s 0 1 s 400 11 5 75 ms on 400 11 5 500 ms on silence 100 ms off 500 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 100 ms off 75 ms on 400 ms off North America Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Device Configuration Guide 256 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 69 Special Dial Overflow and Busy Sheet 2 of 2 Special Dial Overflow Busy Level Level Level per per per Tones Tone Tones Tone Tones _ Tone Market profile Hz dBm0O Cadence
43. 2son Silence 440 480 16 2son 4 s off 4 s off NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 257 Table 70 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Sheet 2 of 3 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Caribbean 440 480 16 2son Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off 4s off Denmark 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 4s off France 440 11 5 1 5 son Silence 440 450 14 5 Continuous 3 5 s off Germany 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 4 s off Global 440 480 16 1son Silence 440 480 16 2son 4 s off 4 s off Holland 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 4 s off Hong Kong 440 480 11 5 400 ms on Silence Silence 200 ms off 400 ms on 3 s off Ireland 400 450 14 5 400 ms on Silence 400 450 14 5 Continuous 200 ms off 400 ms on 3 s off Italy 425 8 1son Silence Silence 4s off Mexico 440 480 16 2son Silence 440 480 16 2son 4s off 4s off New Zealand 400 450 14 5 400 ms on Silence 440 480 14 5 Continuous 200 ms off 400 ms on 2 s off North America 440 480 16 2son Silence 440 480 16 2son 4 s off 4 s off Norway 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 4 s off Poland 425 17 5 1s on Silence Silence 4 s off PRC 450 11 5 is on Silence Silence 4 s off Spain 425 11 5 1 5 s on Silence Silence 3 s off Sweden
44. 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt 815 Call logs autobumping Allows the user to select if the system will remove the oldest log item manually when the log space fills 818 Call charge indication Allows the user to view the charges for a call available on DASS2 and ETSI Euro trunks only 819 ONN blocking Allows the user to block the call information from the telephone for an outgoing call 82 Camp on Allows the user to transfer and camp an external call on another telephone in the system 83 Privacy control Allows the user to change the line privacy setting on the current call 84 Line redirection Allows the user to redirect a line on their telephone to an external number 85 Do not disturb Allows the user to block incoming calls from ringing on the telephone 86 Background music Allows the user to play music provided by a background music source through the speaker on the telephone 870 Service mode status Allows the user to view the current service mode being used 871 Ringing service Allows the user to change the ringing service mode If this feature is invoked manually and normal ringing is selected the service will be deactivated and will override any automatically running services You must select Normal until to cancel the services temporarily This will allow the service to activate at night as programmed 872 Restriction service All
45. 4 ring 4 ring cycles 4 ring 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles cycles cycles cycles Queue 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 timeout sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 17 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 08 00 End07 00 End07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 00 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start 17 00 End 00 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 00 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 00 00 End 13 00 End13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 Ringing Off Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Ringing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes service trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode i Restriction 000 N A 190 N A N A N A N A Service modes global 131440 overrides Restriction 0 013 0 0 0 0 0 N A filter 01 1 13 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1 1800 1877 1877 1877 1888 1877 1877 1888 1888 1888 911 911 1888 911 911 911 911 911 911 9411 976 911 911 9411 976 9411 976 9411 976 1976 9411 976 1976 1976 1976 1 976 1976 1 976 1 976 1 976 1900 1 976 1900 1900 1900 1 900 1900 1 900 1 900 1 900 5551212 1 900 5551212 5551212 5551212 5551212 R
46. 425 11 5 1son Silence Silence 5s off Switzerland 425 11 5 ison Silence Silence 4 s off Taiwan 440 480 21 1son Silence 440 480 21 1son 2 s off 2 s off Device Configuration Guide 258 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 70 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Sheet 3 of 3 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence United Kingdom 400 450 14 5 400 ms on Silence 400 450 14 5 Continuous 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off Table 71 Hold Warble Intrusion Sheet 1 of 2 Hold Warble Intrusion Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence_ Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0O Cadence Australia 400 13 Continuous Silence 425 13 Continuous Bahrain 400 16 Continuous Silence 400 16 Continuous Brazil 425 11 5 0 5 s on Silence Silence 9 5 s off CALA 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Canada 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Caribbean 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Denmark Silence Silence 425 11 5 50 ms on 500 ms off France 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Germany 425 11 5 Continuous Silence 425 11 5 Continuous Global 440 14 Ca
47. 74 34 parking from a telephone 74 38 Call Pickup Directed Pickup 198 Group Pickup 199 Call Queuing 801 34 38 call routing overflow routing 32 call timer See call duration 77 38 Call Transfer 206 callback no answer 211 timer network 79 transfer timer 79 Caller ID MCID at telephone 897 39 Caller ID set alpha tagging 47 CallPilot transfer to mail box 986 40 calls assign SWCA key to calls 81 SWCA overview 211 camp timeout delay 79 camp on intrusion controls 53 using at a telephone 82 34 39 cancel message waiting 65 37 send message 1 37 CAP Central Answering Position 7316E KIM 93 configuring as eCAP 95 configuring buttons 95 described 233 line assignment 128 moving aset 95 capabilities auto hold for incoming page 53 programming 50 52 SM supervision 54 CL agent busy ready 908 39 skillset status 909 39 central answering position See CAP 233 charge call information 818 39 CLID caller ID set 47 CLID Calling Line Identification maximum CLI per line 77 communicating in the office sending messages overview 219 conference by releasing privacy 224 initiate 3 34 37 overview 222 tone allow disallow 75 conference See conference calls conference calls and SWCA keys 291 Contact Center agent busy ready 908 33 agent login log out ACD 904 33 Answer DN warning 77 queue request 909 33 contrast adjust 7 34 programming 56 Device Configuration Guide 3
48. Allow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward delay Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Device Configuration Guide 272 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 76 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language English EuroSpanish Swedish German English UKEnglish first is default French English English English French VICAP Spanish Portuguese Norwegian EuroFrench Spanish Turkish Danish Italian Analog VSC None None None None None 141 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None None None None 141 pulse BRI VSC None None None None None 141 BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode Release reason Release text Simple Simple Simple Simple Simple Detailed Release code On On On On On Off Tone duration 120 120 120 120 120 120 DTMF ms parameters Pause time ms 1 5 3 5 15 3 5 15 3 5 Interdigit time 80 100 80 100 80 100 ms
49. CAPs become enhanced CAPs eCAPs when you identify the telephone DN under the CAP KIM assignment You can configure a maximum of 12 CAPs as eCAPs on the system All CAPs can be programmed with quick dial numbers that allow the person at this station to monitor and answer call traffic into the group If you program the CAP to be an eCAP lines hunt group appearances and line appearances can also be moved to the module Also refer to the following topics e Configuring CAP assignments eCAPs on page 94 e Managing lines on a KIM on page 96 e Programming CAP KIM buttons on page 95 Device Configuration Guide 94 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions Figure 31 7316E with KIM 7316E digital phone with one KIM Configuring CAP assignments eCAPs Use the CAP Assignment panel to designate 7316E KIM units as eCAPs The following procedures describe how to use the fields on the CAP Assignment panel Figure 32 CAP Assignment panel CAP Assignment CAP Assignment CAP Set DN 1 DN 221 a 2 DN 225 NN40020 300 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions 95 To create CAP stations 1 Ensure that the telephone you want to use is configured and working on the system Note CAPs are available only on T7316E and M7324 digital sets and IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2004 and IP Phone 2007 sets 2 Ensure that the KIM is installed on the appropriat
50. DN record of a set that does not have this field selected If Keep DN alive is not selected and the IP telephone is disconnected the DN record may become inactive if there are not enough keycodes In this case a Not in Service prompt is produced when special features such as Call Forward are invoked Figure 15 IP Terminal Details panel Details for DN 325 Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Keep DN alive oO Also refer to Moving IP telephones in the Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 Device Configuration Guide 60 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Button Programming table Figure 16 Button Programming table Details for DN 325 Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Buttons Button Number Function Value Digits Option 01 Feature Feature Call Forward F4 NZA N74 A 02 Feature Feature Conference Transter F3 N N44 4 03 Feature Feature Last Number Redial F5 N74 NZA 04 Feature Feature Page General F60 N A N A 05 ntercom NA NZA NAA 06 ntercom N A N A N A J Button Programming tab The Button Programming and CAP KIM Button Programming tab panels allow you to program the buttons on a telephone with internal and external autodialers and with programmed feature keys Y
51. Default None A Warning If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group all calls offered to telephones in the group will use the assigned ring pattern If no pattern is assigned or if the ring pattern is lower in status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone setting the call uses the ring pattern with the highest status setting Refer to the sections that describe configuring Lines Trunk Line Data main panel in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 and DNs Line Access tab on page 43 for information about assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones NN40020 300 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 105 Configuring the Hunt Group general settings When you first set up a Hunt Group you must identify how calls are handled among the group The following paths indicate where to modify hunt group general settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt groups e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt Hunt groups To configure hunt groups 1 On the Hunt Groups table select the hunt group you want to configure 2 Fill out the columns across the table as required Refer to the table in the previous section for details about each field Programming note A linear hunt group DN assigned as the overflow telephone does not support having the hunt group DN assigned as an Answer
52. Hz dBm0 Cadence_ Hz dBm0 Cadence Norway Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Poland Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 17 5 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0 s PRC Silence 450 11 5 400 ms on 450 11 5 350 ms on 400 ms off 350 ms off Spain Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 200 ms on 1800 333 ms 200 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Sweden 425 11 5 320 ms on 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 250 ms on 25 ms off 1800 333 ms 250 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Switzerland Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s Taiwan Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 480 620 21 500 ms on 1800 333 ms 500 ms off silence 333 ms 1 0s United Kingdom 440 350 17 5 0 75 s 0 75 s 400 11 5 Continuous 400 11 5 375 ms on 440 375 ms off Table 70 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Sheet 1 of 3 Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence_ Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia 400 450 14 5 400 ms on Silence 400 450 14 35 Continuous 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off Bahrain 425 15 400 ms on Silence Silence 15 Continuous 200 ms off 400 ms on 2s off Brazil 425 11 5 ison Silence Silence 4s off CALA 440 480 11 5 2son Silence 440 480 16 2son 4 s off 4 s off Canada 440 480 16
53. Line and intercom buttons assigned by default templates can be changed in programming Handsfree and Answer DN buttons are not assigned by default When these features are programmed however they are automatically assigned to specific buttons Device Configuration Guide 154 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones e Telephones can have a maximum of eight intercom buttons When Answer DNs are assigned they appear above the handsfree button if there is one at the bottom right hand corner on the telephone The model 7000 and 7100 digital phones and analog telephones are automatically assigned two intercom lines e Default line button assignment starts on or near the top of the left column and descends Default button programming does not necessarily provide default line assignments e Line assignments can be moved by the user to more convenient buttons 7316E digital phone button defaults The default button assignments for the 7316E depend on the template applied Refer to your Programming Records to identify the current button programming for each telephone or group of telephones e This telephone has individual handsfree mute and headset buttons located under the dialpad Handsfree must be set to Auto for these buttons to work e The current incoming call on this telephone defaults to the voice path last used For example if you answered the previous call using your headset the next call comes in over you
54. N0027284 IP Phone 2007 User Guide N0064498 BCM WLAN 2210 2211 2212 Handset User Guide NO009103 How to get Help This section explains how to get help for Nortel products and services Getting Help from the Nortel Web site The best source of support for Nortel products is the Nortel Support Web site http www nortel com support This site enables customers to e download software and related tools e download technical documents release notes and product bulletins e sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation e search the Support Web site and Nortel Knowledge Base e open and manage technical support cases Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center If you have a Nortel support contract and cannot find the information you require on the Nortel Support Web site you can get help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center In North America call 1 800 4NORTEL 1 800 466 7835 Outside North America go to the Web site below and look up the telephone number that applies in your region Device Configuration Guide 22 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM http www nortel com callus When you speak to the telephone agent you can reference an Express Routing Code ERC to more quickly route your call to the appropriate support specialist To locate the ERC for your product or service go to http www nortel com erc Getting Help through a Nortel distributor
55. Phone 2033 LCD screen display Local Directory Number Date Time Display Call Party information Feature Status information Soft key labels Soft keys self labeled Status Indicators The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 uses three bi color LED lights located around the speaker to indicate the telephone status Table 56 Status indicators LEDs Status Solid green Active call Solid red Message waiting Flashing red Incoming call Blinking red Mute The idle telephone display indicates if there is a message waiting or missed call Each extension microphone has an LED indicator indicating the mute status of the telephone IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E bring voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection Refer to the P Phone 1120E User Guide NN 10300 062 and the P Phone 1140E User Guide NN 10300 064 for additional information Your IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E support the following e four user defined feature keys with labels and indicators on the IP Phone 1120E six user defined feature keys with labels and indicators on the IP Phone 1140E e four soft keys Note Some IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E phones are not configured to support soft key functionality Consult your system administrator e graphical high resolution LCD display backlit with adjustable co
56. Restrictions Line Set Restrictions Set Line Restrictions for Line 074 Restrictions Schedule Use Filter Normal Night Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 Table 22 describes the fields on this panel Table 22 Line Set Restrictions fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Line lt XXX gt A list of lines assigned to this telephone Define a restriction filter for each line under the schedules that you intend to use Restriction filters are defined under Call Security Device Configuration Guide 68 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 22 Line Set Restrictions fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Schedule Normal Always configure a Normal filter as this schedule runs if there are no Night other schedules running Evening If your system is using schedules for example if you require different Lunch restrictions on lines at different times of the day choose an alternate schedule that coordinates with the other programmed schedules on Sched 4 your system Sched 5 Sched 6 Use Filter lt XX gt Enter the restriction filter you want activated for this set on this line for each schedule that you use NN40020 300 69 Chapter 7 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs Task Understanding common tasks e Copying settings to other DNs on page 69 e Renumbering DNs on page 70 Copying setting
57. Room condition password optional To set up hospitality service 1 Determine a time each day when the telephones switch to indicate that the rooms require servicing 2 Inthe Services change time field enter a 24 00 time designator for the service time NN40020 300 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 115 3 In the Requires Desk Password field change the default password to a one to six digit number Keep this password in a secure place Change the password frequently If you want service personnel to enter a password when they dial in to indicate a room has been serviced enter a one to six digit password into the Room condition password field This field can be left blank also To set up call restrictions 1 Determine what type of calls you want to allow from telephones using the fields in the call restrictions box Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Call Security gt Restriction Filters create four new restriction filters that reflect the levels of service you want to allow For instance if a room is vacant you can allow only emergency calls whereas in a suite you can allow a full range of call services Make a note of the restrictions that you create On the Hospitality General panel in the Call Restrictions subpanel enter the appropriate filter numbers beside each field To set up wake up services You can set up the room telephones to ring at preset times to act as an automatic wake
58. Set Lock to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock To view the feature that is currently assigned to a button 1 Press FEATURE 0 button inquiry 2 Press the memory key for which you want to view programming To check for your DN number press an intercom key To configure memory buttons for features 1 Press FEATURE 3 2 Enter the feature code auto dial speed dial feature code and number or SWCA code that you want to program on your telephone Note Using this feature overrides programming entered by the system administrator You cannot change buttons that have handsfree lines intercom lines or Answer DNs assigned to them To erase a memory button 1 Press FEATURE 1 2 Press the memory key you want to erase 3 Press OK Note You cannot erase buttons assigned with lines Answer DNs or intercom keys To store more than one number or code on one button 1 Press FEATURE 9 to insert a break point between numbers or codes You can program up to four numbers or codes separated by break points per memory key 2 To use The first press of the button dials the first number Pressing the button a second time dials the next number External call codes Call code features can be part of dial strings for calls to external numbers These codes allow various actions to occur as part of the dialing sequence You can use special alphabetical d
59. Supported Not Not Kingdom supported 500 ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear GASM8 parameters This section contains information for the GASM8 MBM Global analog stations are not supported in the following market profiles Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland and Taiwan The GASM 8 parameters are provided in the following tables e Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters on page 276 e Loop interface and call supervision parameters on page 277 e Dial pulse and DTMF parameters on page 278 Table 81 Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Transmission Nominal DIP Terminal Network PCM Market switch Input Input coding profile Localized setting impedance Impedance scheme Australia Yes Australia 220 Q 220 Q A law 820 QII 820 QII 120 nF 120 nF Bahrain No North American North 600 Q 600 Q A law Based A Law America Canada Yes North 600 Q 600 Q mu law America Caribbean Yes North 600 Q 600 Q mu law America Global No North American North 600 Q 600 Q A law based A law America Hong Kong No North American North 600 Q 600 Q mu law based mu law America Ireland No UK Based UK 370 Q 620 300 Q A Law QI 310 nF 1000 QII 220 nF NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile
60. Table 59 Status indicators No Service You are outside the coverage area and cannot receive or place calls An audible alarm also sounds Return to the coverage area to reestablish the connection Your battery pack charge is low An audible beep also sounds Replace your battery pack within two minutes You have a new voicemail message t Melody A melody is played when the WLAN handset is turned on for the first time following a completed charge The No Service status indicator appears in the information area of the handset display Information area The Information area shows e the extension number of the handset e a line for general information e features and call information when the handset is in use Feature options area When a feature is activated or when you are on an active call the Feature options area shows you the action you must take to proceed For example Fsud This means you must enter your mailbox password The Feature options area shows the label for the Ftre soft key and for the three display soft keys These button labels appear directly above the Feature and display soft keys and to the right of the Ftre label on the display These button labels vary depending on the feature in use The WLAN Handset does not support scrolling Therefore any features that require the ability to scroll are not supported DMC Portables 413X 414X Europe only The DECT Handset 413X 414X is a DECT based
61. Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hospitality e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt Hospitality These records allow facilities such as hotels motels and hospitals to control telephone access to external lines to provide alarm clock services on internal telephones and to monitor room serviced status Panels Tasks Hospitality General on page 111 Hospitality Rooms on page 113 Setting up your hospitality system on page 114 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services Hospitality General The Hospitality General panel contains the administration programming for the Hospitality Services feature The panel is shown in Figure 37 Device Configuration Guide 112 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services Figure 37 Hospitality panel General tab Hospitality Cie General Rooms Administration Call Restrictions Vacant filter Basic filter Mid filter Full fillter 00 o0 o0 oo Service change time 00 00 00 Desk password 4677 Room condition password Wake Up Call Settings Attempts 3 y Retry interval 4 y Alarm duration sec 15 Expired Wake Up Call Settings Notify DN Use tone go The Administration heading provides fields that allow you to indicate when the room is ready enter the time when occupied rooms change state
62. Tips A schedule must be active for overflow routing to be in effect Overflow routing is not available in normal mode You must create an overflow route to be used with each routing code In this way every route used with a scheduled mode that has overflow service must have an alternate route in normal service Default Cleared Ringing Svc Off Manual Auto Off prevents the service from being activated Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control telephone This setting overrides any automatically running schedules Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the Common Settings heading These times are then executed automatically when the service is active Default Off For details about setting up ring groups refer to Creating ring groups on page 97 Trunk Answer lt check box gt Trunk answer allows you to answer from any telephone an external call that is ringing at another telephone in your office if the Ringing Service is active on that line at the time of the call If the service is not active you cannot answer the call Trunk answer is useful if the other telephones are not assigned the same lines as the telephone you are using to answer the call Note You can change the Trunk Answer setting only if Ringing service is set to Manual or Auto Default Selected Extra Dial Set None DN lt XX gt DN lt control set gt The Extra d
63. Yes Yes buttons Phones supported T7100 L M7100 L P M7100 L P T7208 L M7208 L P M7208 L P Sets requiring paper labels T7316 L M7310 L P M 7310 L P indicated by L T7406 Wireless L M7324 L P M7324 L P T7316E L M7324 CAP L P M7324 CAP L P Sets in which buttons can T24 KIM L labeling in online mode only labeling in online mode only M7100N L P M7310N L P M7324N L P T7100 L T7208 L P T7316 L P T7316E L P T7406 Wireless L P T24 KIM L P labeling in online mode only 2001 P 2002 P 2004 P NN40020 300 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 185 Table 60 Feature matrix Sheet 2 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Language Support Multilingual labels French Spanish English only English only Accessing Desktop Assistant features Application download Download Desktop Assistant client from the User Applications selection on the BCM web page Download LAN CTE and Desktop Assistant Pro client from the User Applications selection on the BCM web page Download LAN CTE and Desktop Assistant Pro AE client from the Administrator Applications selection on the BCM web page Steps and procedures to launch and use the application Install Desktop Assistant client application on User workstation User st
64. action You have used the Call Queuing feature without lifting the handset Auto Handsfree is not assigned to your telephone You must use the handset or press the handsfree button to answer a call Priority call The party you are calling has eight seconds to decide to accept or reject your priority call Line redirection Enter a valid line pool access code Auto dial Press the memory button you want to program Button inquiry Press the button you want to check Press FEATURE or EXIT when finished Move button The button you are trying to move is not a line button If you are trying to switch a line and a feature move the line to the feature button not the feature button to the line Conference call You have activated the Conference feature with one call active and another on hold Press the held line to bring that person into the conference Auto dial Enter the number you want to program on the button then press HOLD Speed dial If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed dial number select the line or line pool If not enter the telephone number exactly as if you were dialing it normally When you are finished press HOLD Enter the number you want to program on the button then press HOLD or OK You can include a line or line pool selection in an auto dial sequence by selecting the line before entering any digits Speed dial If you want to program a line or line pool selection for this speed
65. and services scheduling on page 29 setting common features and restriction and routing schedule features e Creating ring groups on page 97 Device Configuration Guide 230 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features e Restrictions main tab on page 65 telephones e Restrictions Line and Remote in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 e Destination codes in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 e Preferences tab on page 55 Using the control telephone e Show active schedules Enter FEATURE 870 e Ringing service a b c d Enter FEATURE 871 Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to activate On one line display telephones press Press OK to select the schedule Press QUIT to exit On one line display telephones press RLS Cancel feature FEATURE 871 e Restriction service a b c d e Enter FEATURE 872 Enter the Service Control password Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to activate On one line display telephones press Press OK to select the schedule Press QUIT to exit On one line display telephones press RLS Cancel feature FEATURE 872 e Routing service a b c d e Enter FEATURE 873 Enter the Service Control password Use NEXT to scroll to the schedule you want to active On one line display telephones press Press OK to select the schedule Press
66. bkgd color button programming Load Settings to phone No Yes Yes Can retrieve a saved file Can retrieve a saved file and apply to a different set and apply to a different set of same type of same type One at a time bulk One at a time bulk operation not supported operation not supported Customize fonts for labels Yes Partial Text color cannot be Partial Text color cannot be text size text color changed changed background fill color Print Labels Yes Yes N A for IP Phones Yes N A for IP Phones Print Preview Yes Yes N A for IP Phones Yes N A for IP Phones NN40020 300 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 187 Table 60 Feature matrix Sheet 4 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Print Multiple Sets Yes No No Help Features Documentation No Yes Integrated with application Includes bubble help over button on diagram of set type Yes Integrated with application Includes bubble help over button on diagram of set type Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition The Nortel Desktop Assistant Pro AE is a LAN CTE based application that the system administrator can use to manage the configuration of desktop telephones The following functions are available e button labeling including font font size and backgroun
67. can also be redirected through system programming In this case redirection can be removed only through system programming To redirect lines from the system 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines select the line you want to redirect ensure that the line is not in a line pool In the bottom panel click the Preferences tab In the Redirect to list enter the number to which to redirect the calls Enter a remote number Ensure that the routing codes are included a A WO N To turn off redirect delete the remote number from the field Allowing redirect You can enable the redirect feature on a telephone by telephone basis To allow redirect 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to allow the redirect feature Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the Allow redirect check box Setting a redirect tone You can cause a short ring to occur when a line is redirected using FEATURE 84 This is set for each telephone To set a redirect tone 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to create a redirect tone Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the Redirect ring check box Device Configuration
68. cece nents 50 S Tee M TD ciuic toe AAAA eae Se hauled Sean dik BA Pande E TETTE 52 SWCA Call Group tab gcccpentesent sei iSibestenee beens idah ami caged 54 Freterenices EO 645 cp cede ose ee b4 2 HG S44 a SHEE SER SERS S HOE 55 Pie Suis aer a eee ereGeeoateeuaaee ee a 57 IP Terminal Detaile TAD 2 ccees eee e seen de des Cee ee ede eRe Reeve ee 59 Button Programming table 2652 cacccc kee ees ee eked eee ee ee 60 Button Programming laD ccacag anny cack eked eee Reames ah dee San 4 60 Hoer Speed DITA oc sceeceendisecedgrerneeeoeunraceeauteereeeas bages 63 PaO MIS IRMA Sic cote dy cee ck eh Sd oe ea eae ea eR Ae A 65 SeUReswictiong tab cccegevecsewes his Gees awecenne estas odeeeanen a 66 Lineset Restrictions ta i e chai ssie ies an eehba SRL Gy eke ees 67 Chapter 7 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs 69 Copying settings to other DNS 2x00 ccsekeweedeseeeeseeusteec eee obaesseee 69 Renumbermg DNS sss oe ice ta ad ankin ia na eed ie Real nde ok done ee ae 70 Change telephone DNs using the Element Manager 00 70 Chapter 8 Telephony system and device programming 000eeeeeees 71 Chapter 9 Global telephony settingS 00c cece eee eee eee eens 73 Fodure SQUNUG lt ccaigakacd sacea iktor La eRe Rae eee abe neds Wane Ew eee 74 Feature Seuings panel ssesrrsersrs estreta titti ERRER A ES R Ri 795 Answer DN answer key levels 00 00 ccc eee ee eee 78 VMS cc yee Hee
69. creation and Yes label creation and button programming Can switch between different BCMs Device Configuration Guide 186 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Table 60 Feature matrix Sheet 3 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Access to networked telephone sets online programming No Yes limited Access to all sets associated with DNs associated with your workstation via LAN CTE Yes All sets managed by the BCM Features Selection of Telephone set s User selects from menu User selects from menu User selects DN from list Set associated with the DN is presented by the application Can select only one DN ata time Call Initialization Call Answering Modification Voice Mail Call Centre Hospitality IP Features Application Features Others All end user programmable features Pictorial View of Phone Yes Yes Yes Programmable Features None Messaging Messaging Paging Paging Call Logging Call Logging Set Options Set Options Call Initialization Call Answering Modification Voice Mail Call Centre Hospitality IP Features Application Features Others All end user programmable features Save to File Yes label definitions only Yes Save for a DN Set combo Label font bkgd color button programming Yes Save for a DN Set combo Label font
70. customize the telephone operations Table 39 lists the fields and settings for IP telephones Table 39 Line Configuration Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures Model 2004 2002 2001 2007 Line Access tab on page 43 2033 1120E 1140E 2050 2210 2211 2212 Name Unique to each handset Line appearances Ring only if not assigned to a Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 128 button Caller ID set Selected connected to target lines Answer DNs Ring only if not assigned to a button Intercom keys At least one Configuring Capabilities and Preferences on page 130 Handsfree Auto Configuring telephone capabilities on page 131 Dialing Options Auto Configuring Preferences on page 134 All other settings are variable based on your system requirements PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring The following path indicates where to set PVQM thresholds in Element Manager e Element Manager Administration gt Telephony Metrics gt PVQM gt Threshold Settings Panel PVQM monitors and reports on call quality in process not just after the end of the call This enables more timely and accurate resolution of potential call quality problems especially on more lengthy calls A call quality threshold is set so that an exception is reported if the quality drops below a configurable value PVQM is fully supported on Phase 2 IP sets Phase 1 IP set
71. data allow you to keep a record of these codes Also refer to e User speed dials on page 137 NN40020 300 91 Chapter 11 DMC Feature List The Digital Mobility Controller DMC Feature List enables you to arrange the order of the features that appear as soft keys on a Digital Mobility 7420 7430 7440 handset This is a system wide feature that enables users to access frequently used features The following paths indicate where to access the DMC Feature List in Element Manager and in telset administration Element Manager Telephony gt Global Settings gt DMC Feature List Telset Admin CONFIG gt System Prgrming gt Featr settings gt DMC feat List The following features are available in the following default positions Position 1 PARK Call Park F74 Position 2 PAGE Page General F60 Position 3 VM Voice mail login F981 Position 4 CFAC Call Forward F4 Position 5 PKUP Group Pickup F75 Device Configuration Guide 92 Chapter 11 DMC Feature List Arranging the DMC Feature list using Element Manager Figure 30 DMC Feature List panel Digital Mobility Controller Feature List Position Call Park F74 lt Position 2 Page General F60 lt Position 3 Voice mail login F981 v Position 4 Call Forward F4 b Position 5 Group Pickup F75 v Page General F60 Voice mail login F981 Call Forward F4 Group Pickup F75 None To
72. dial number select the line or line pool If not enter the telephone number you want to program exactly as if you were dialing it normally When you are finished press OK The number is stored correctly on the button You are receiving a priority call If you are on another call tell the person to whom you are speaking that you are about to place the call on hold Press the flashing line indicator of the priority call or wait until the call connects automatically in eight seconds The priority call goes through after you hear the next beep Your active call is on Exclusive Hold It reconnects automatically when the priority call ends unless you transfer the priority call in which case you must press the line button of your original call to reconnect Use DND FEATURE 85 or press BLOCK to reject a priority call Priority call The telephone you are calling is receiving a priority call at the same time or cannot receive priority calls Line redirection You have tried to redirect a line but another person has redirected that line Press or OVERRIDE to override the previous redirection and redirect the line Line redirection You can redirect calls only on individual lines You have no free line available to receive a call Release one of your current calls and try again to answer the incoming call Camp on The line that the camped call is on is in use or that line does not appear at your telephone Release the line or r
73. dialog box appears warning you that all existing logs are cleared if you reset logs NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 215 5 Click OK to reallocate the log space and clear all user logs Click Cancel if you do not want to clear user logs In this case the call log space is not reallocated Table 61 explains the type of content for the two fields in the dialog box Table 61 Call log options Attribute Value Description Space per log lt three digits gt Type a three digit number for example 020 to give each set 20 spaces of sets with logs lt read only gt Lists the number of sets that have logs If you click OK on this dialog these logs are deleted Set call log options Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences top panel gt Preferences bottom panel Reset Call Log Password Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences top panel gt Preferences bottom panel Using the Call Log feature This feature allows users to manually log a call FEATURE 813 delete old log items FEATURE 815 view the log FEATURE 812 or about a current call FEATURE 811 view charges for a call FEATURE 818 view details about a specific item make acall using a call log entry Information such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number may not sh
74. digit entered as a value Programming note If the value is set to None the SWCA feature does not work 2 Choose one of the following configurations for the SWCA controls for your system Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings gt SWCA panel Device Configuration Guide 212 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Configuration one If you want all incoming calls to auto associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving telephone a To auto associate SWCA key to call select Automatically life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating select the check box c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold select the check box d To include I C calls when invoked by Hold select the check box Configuration two If you want incoming calls to auto associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving telephone but you want calls on hold to remain on hold at the receiving telephone unless the user presses a SWCA button or enters a SWCA code a To auto associate SWCA key to call select the Automatically life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating select the check box c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold clear the check box d Include I C calls when invoked by Hold is not applicable in this configuration Configuration three If you want external incoming calls to auto associate to SWCA assignments on the receiving telephone but you want all intercom calls to require m
75. features Table 63 Hunt group feature operation Feature Description Call Forward All Calls Call Forward No Answer Call Forward on Busy Do not Disturb on Busy Group Pickup Transfer via Hold Priority Call Ring Again Line Redirection Page Zones Voice Call The system ignores Call Forward All Calls feature and the Hunt group call rings at the telephone The system ignores Call Forward No Answer and the Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time expires The system ignores Call Forward on Busy and the Hunt group call continues to ring until the hunt time expires If this feature is active the set does not receive notification of incoming Hunt group calls If a set is part of a Hunt group and a call pickup group then an incoming Hunt group call can be picked up from any set that is in the call pickup group The system supports transfer for Hunt group sets However you cannot Transfer by using Hold Once you answer a call on a Hunt group set the Hunt group notification disappears from all other sets in the Hunt group You cannot make Priority calls to Hunt group DNs You cannot use Ring Again when calling a Hunt group DN The Allow redirect attribute must be selected for DNs assigned to Hunt groups For more information see Capabilities tab on page 52 You cannot include Hunt group DNs in a Page zone Hunt groups cannot accept voice calls Answer buttons have no appearances
76. field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language Italian English UKEnglish English Norwegian Polish first is default English French VICAP French English EuroFrench Spanish Spanish Swedish English Turkish Danish Czech NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 269 Table 75 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 4 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Analog VSC None None 141 None None 1831 tone ONN blocking Analog VSC None None 141 None None 1831 pulse BRI VSC None None 141 None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SrvcCode SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple Detailed None Simple Simple Release code On On Off Off On On Tone duration 120 120 120 120 120 110 DTMF parameters ms Pause time ms 3 5 1 5 3 5 1 5 3 5 1 5 Interdigit time 100 80 100 80 100 80 ms Table 76 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Ta
77. for which you want to enable auto hold Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the Auto hold check box Hold a call exclusively You can put a call on Exclusive Hold so that the calls can be retrieved only at your telephone To program Exclusive Hold FEATURE 79 or FEATURE HOLD There is no system programming for this feature Parking or transferring calls Calls coming in can be transferred after they are answered or automatically transferred if they are not answered at the target telephone These features include Transfer answered calls on page 206 Transfer unanswered calls on page 206 Line redirection on page 207 Call forward unanswered calls on page 208 Camp on on page 209 Call Park on page 210 Callback on page 211 Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 211 Device Configuration Guide 206 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Transfer answered calls When you answer a call you can transfer the call either to a telephone within the system or to a telephone external to the system such as a receptionist on another system in a private network Note You may not be able to transfer a call on an external line to an external telephone gt depending on the capabilities of the lines Setting up a transfer callback timer If an external call is transferred to a bus
78. hold are assigned lt check box gt automatically to a SWCA key If you select the check box When the user presses Hold the system attempts to repark the call on the current SWCA key assigned to the call or on a free SWCA key programmed on the telephone If no SWCA key is currently associated with the call Automatically life of call is not selected and there is no free SWCA key to assign to the call the call remains on Hold on the line on which it enters Note In this case the call is not available to other telephones in the group until it can be assigned to a SWCA key or unless they have the same line appearance as the held call If you do not select the check box There is no interaction with SWCA keys The call remains on Hold on the line on which it enters and is not available to other telephones in the SWCA group unless the user manually assigns the call to a SWCA key or unless those telephones have the same line appearance as the held call Include I C calls when invoked by Hold Select whether intercom calls put on Hold are assigned lt check box gt automatically to a SWCA key If you select the check box Invoke SWCA parking by Hold must be checked to activate this feature When the user makes an intercom call and puts it on Hold the call works in the same manner as described in Invoke SWCA parking by Hold selected If you do not select the check box Intercom calls are held on the
79. how you want the telephone to handle logging calls No autologging No calls are logged automatically No one answered Unanswered calls are logged Log all calls Unanswered by me Unanswered calls are logged Log all calls All calls are noted in the call log Also refer to Call log on page 214 Log space lt numeric gt Allocate a number of Call log spaces from a system wide pool of spaces to the telephone Also refer to Setting call log space for the system on page 214 Available log space lt read only gt Indicate the total amount of space available for call logging on the system Reset Call Log lt button gt Reset the password for the call log if users forget their Password password Hotline type None This feature allows you to define a telephone number that Internal automatically dials when you lift the handset or press the External Handsfree button on a telephone NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 57 Table 15 Preferences panel fields Sheet 3 of 3 Setting Values Description e Internal DN Define the internal telephone you want to access Direct dial set DN The DN of the telephone that is automatically dialed when the user lifts the handset Direct dial set Automatically dials a telephone on the system defined as a direct dial telephone direct dial access code Note If the direct dial telephone is on a remote node of the network ensure tha
80. intrusion level must be the same or higher than the telephone being interrupted 5 Auto hold Select the check box if you want calls coming into the telephone to be placed on hold automatically when the user answers another call or dials out while an incoming call is active 6 Redirect settings Allow redirect Select the check box if you want the user to be able to redirect active lines to other telephones Redirect ring Select the check box if you want calls coming into a redirected line to give a short alert 7 Receive short tones Do not select this for digital telephones 8 Administrative capabilities Pickup group If you want to allow this telephone to be answered by other telephones in a defined group choose the appropriate group Otherwise leave the field blank Direct dial Select the direct dial telephone assignment that you want this telephone to be able to dial with one digit direct dial access code Silent monitor supervisor Select this check box to enable the telephone to monitor hunt group calls 9 Next step Configuring Preferences on page 134 NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 133 Job aid Line redirection notes This feature enables you to send your external calls to a telephone outside the office You can decide to redirect all or just some of your external lines Warning Be careful about redirection loops For example if you redirect your A line
81. market profiles are provided in the following tables e Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters on page 261 e France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters on page 263 e Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters on page 266 e Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters on page 269 NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 261 Table 73 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 1 of 3 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Access codes Direct dial 9 0 9 0 0 0 0 digit Dest code for 0 9 0 9 9 9 9 default route Digital ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN trunking DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 protocols DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 Protocols protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG variants BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 102 protocol variant PRI trunk ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 NI 2 ETSI 403 protocol ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 DMS100 ETSI QSIG variants MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN DMS250 DMS250 MCDN 4ESS 4ESS MCDN MCDN Global GATv1 GATv2 GATv1 GATv1 GATv1 GATv1 N A analog tr
82. on page 111 Voice mail if applicable Also refer to e Telephony features on page 191 NN40020 300 73 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings There are a number of settings that define telephony operation for the entire system These have been gathered on one panel separated into sections The following paths indicate where to access global telephony settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings e Telset interface CONFIG gt System Prgrming gt Featr settings Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels and Details Panels Feature Settings on page 74 Feature Settings panel on page 75 Timers on page 78 Advanced Feature Settings on page 81 ONN Blocking North American systems on page 83 Silent Monitor on page 84 Reset logs on page 85 Configure Features Programming Business name display outgoing in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Selecting the music source on page 294 Call Park on page 210 Directed Pickup on page 198 Holding calls on page 204 Transfer unanswered calls on page 206 Paging on page 219 Receiver volume on page 193 Answer DNs on page 200 Camp on on page 209 External call codes
83. on page 145 IP telephone feature display To define a key label on page 146 labels on page 145 Other IP global features Hot desking IP telephone configurations on page 147 Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone on page 150 Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone on page 151 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management IP features list You can add and modify the features that display on the IP telephone feature list which is accessed through the Services button or by using FEATURE 900 To view and modify these features in Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt IP Terminal Settings gt Feature List tab Table 40 describes the fields on the two records on this panel Device Configuration Guide 144 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features Figure 43 Feature List tab fields IP Terminal Features Feature List Key Labels Features Seq Feature Name Feature Code i 0 Hot Desking 999 a 1 Do Not Disturb 85 2 Call Forward 4 Page 60 4 Background Music 86 5 Call Park 74 6 Call Pickup 75 7 Voice Call 66 8 Speed Call 0 9 Message Send 1 v Add Add Feature Feature name Feature code Table 40 Feature List tab fields description Attribute Value Description Seq lt read only gt List number only Feature name lt alphanumeric gt Label for th
84. or reseller If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor or authorized reseller you can contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller NN40020 300 23 Chapter 2 Welcome panel The Welcome panel displays information for the current account logged on the system The administrator is prompted to change the password before any programming menus are accessible This panel will be displayed e on the first login to the BCM by nnadmin e when the administrator has selected the forced password change option on an account or e ifthe password has expired Figure 1 Initial welcome panel Task Navigation Panel Welcome Administra Configuration o amp You must change your password Password Change User ID Password YEE IEE Table 2 Initial Welcome panel fields Attribute Value Description User ID lt read only gt User ID you used to log on to the system Password lt alphanumeric gt To change password select the field and enter new password The password must satisfy the password policy requirements for the system See the Administration Guide NN40020 600 for more information on password requirements Once the password has been changed the entire navigation tree is accessible See Figure 2 Device Configuration Guide 24 Chapter 2 Welcome panel Figure 2 Welcome panel Task Navigation Panel
85. refer to your Cal Pilot Quick Reference Card yg Directory E Programmable memory button Default Blank WLAN handset 2210 2211 2212 button defaults The Nortel WLAN Handsets 2210 2211 2212 are fully functional wireless handsets specifically designed for the busy office environment NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 177 WLAN handset buttons and keys Figure 60 shows the WLAN Handsets 2210 2211 2212 buttons and keys Figure 60 WLAN Handsets 2210 221 1 2212 buttons and keys NORTEL NETWORKS NORTEL NETWORKS WLAN Handset 2210 WLAN Handset 2211 WLAN Handset 2212 The following table describes the WLAN handset buttons and keys Table 58 WLAN handset buttons keys and descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Button Description O Power On Start Call key D Turns on the handset This key also affects some of the states of the handset Power Off End Call key Ends an active call and turns off the handset The user must end every call to release system resources and allow the handset to function properly Ftre Feature and Display soft keys D eZ The first of the four soft keys is the Feature soft key which starts or ends a feature The next three soft keys are Display keys which show feature options Menu key Displays the full description of the Display soft keys abbreviations and accesses the handset features
86. restrictions Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab Select the DN that you want to modify Set Lock Determine how much programming the user is able to perform at their telephone None Partial Full Refer to Restrictions main tab on page 65 for a description of what is allowed for each level 4 Allow Last Number Select the check box if you want to allow Last number redial for numbers dialed from the telephone Allow Saved Number Select the check box if you want to allow redialing a saved number Allow Link Select this check box only for analog telephones Set restrictions Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect this telephone Programming reference e Set Restrictions tab on page 66 e Restriction filters To set restrictions 1 Select the field you want to change 2 Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule You will always need a filter specified for the Normal schedule 3 Repeat for each schedule Line Set restrictions Assign restriction filters for the schedules that will affect the lines assigned to this telephone Programming reference e Line Set Restrictions tab on page 67 e Restriction filters To set line set restrictions 1 Select the line you want to modify Select the field you want to modify on that line Enter the restriction filter appropriate for the schedule You always need a filter specifi
87. stand alone7316E digital phone and a 7316E digital phone connected to one or more KIMs Key Indicator Modules ISDN These telephones have their own set of DN records e ISDN refers to any ISDN equipment Other This heading is used for the following types of devices e analog telephones e Intl set European only is used for other types of compatible telephones used in specific non North American markets such as the 7000 digital phone Button Number lt 1 XX gt Use the telephone buttons to choose the features you 1 24 want to program Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button Example New KIM modules have all blank buttons when they are first installed Function Blank Choose the type of feature that you want to program on Feature the telephone buttons Internal autodial Blank means that nothing is programmed on the button Ext I autodial Example New KIM modules have all blank buttons meiner AUNIA when they are first installed Value Feature lt feature code gt Use the arrow to choose the feature you want to program on the button Internal autodial lt Internal DN gt Enter the DN number for the internal telephone you want the telephone to dial by pressing this button Digits Feature lt feature digits gt Includes digits for such features as system speed dial codes External autodial lt dialing codes plus dialout string gt Enter the complete dial sequence for the external call Thi
88. telephone display FEATURE 503 to select Alternate Language 2 for the telephone display FEATURE 504 to select Alternate Language 3 for the telephone display Not available in all country profiles Moving line buttons Change the position of your line or hunt group line buttons To move line buttons Press FEATURE 81 Press the line button that you want to move Press the button to which you want to move the line Press RLS The two buttons are exchanged A WO N a 5 Update the button label strip on your telephone Note Line buttons cannot be exchanged with intercom Answer DN or gt Handsfree buttons You can block the user from using these feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab Receiver volume e Using the system determine if the handset or headset volume returns to a volume level set by the system or to the volume set by the user Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Receiver volume e At the telephone Use the rocker switch under the dialpad to change the sound levels heard through your handset This also changes the volume levels during handsfree calls Programming note Handsfree speaker volume returns to the default value set at the telephone after each call ends Device Configuration Guide 194 Chapter 23 Tel
89. the following methods to place a call on hold e Using Hold e Hold automatically autohold y e Hold a call exclusively on page 205 Using Hold Place a call on hold by pressing HOLD If you have system wide call appearance SWCA keys defined this can also place the call on a SWCA key and allow others to answer the call Refer to the SWCA section for more details To retrieve the call press the held line button or press the Hold button a second time if there is no line button There is no system programming for this feature it is always active if the telephone has a Hold button Hold automatically autohold A line or the telephone can be programmed to automatically place an active call on hold while answering another call or placing a call Model 7100 and 7000 telephones which do not have line keys also use the HOLD key to toggle between active calls FEATURE 73 activates this feature FEATURE 73 cancels the feature NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 205 To program full autohold on a line 1 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines select the line record for which you want to enable Full autohold In the bottom frame under the Preferences tab select the Full autohold check box To program auto hold on a telephone 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone
90. to activate handsfree The speaker LED indicator lights to indicate when handsfree is active Device Configuration Guide 166 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving cs party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to two way conversation The Mute key applies to handsfree handset and headset microphones The Mute LED indicator flashes when the Mute option is in use When a message is left for the user the Message waiting indicator flashes Also NORTEL auc ON this indicator flashes when the set ringer is The two keys on either side of the navigation labels on the LCD IP Phone 2007 display screen The IP Phone 2007 features two programmable areas e Application area e Tools Navigation area Figure 55 2007 display screen button formatting 01 13 3 16 Application Area PRIORITY 1 CS 1000 GRP 56665 SPV Tools Nav Area key are context sensitive soft keys with The Application area provides eline and feature soft key status einformation items such as caller number caller name feature prompt strings user entered digits date and time information and set information efeature soft keys esoft keys The Tools Navigation area provides econtrols for navigating between features and selecting tools earea is visible and functional at all times NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memo
91. to the telephone default setting for each new handsfree call NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 53 Table 14 Capabilities panel fields Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Values Description Pickup group None Assigns this telephone to a pickup group a group where all 1to9 telephones ring until one is answered Page zone Page zone Assigns this telephone to a page zone 1 to 6 A zone is any group of telephones that you want to group together None for paging regardless of their location You can assign one of six zones to each telephone The maximum number of digital telephones in a page zone is 50 The maximum number of digital and IP telephones in a page zone is 60 Direct dial Set 1 to Set 5 Defines whether you can call the direct dial telephone from this None telephone using the direct dial digit Intrusion Protection Level None Low Med High If the break in feature is allowed on any private network MCDN lines PRI SL 1 assigned to the telephone you must define the level of intrusion for each telephone This determines if the user can use the feature and to what degree None feature is turned off user cannot break in on any calls Low user can only break into calls on other telephones with low level protection Med user can break into calls on other telephones with low and medium level protection High user can break into calls on all other telephones with this feature HF
92. trunk answer Click the Restrictions tab Select Full from the Set Lock drop down list Device Configuration Guide 200 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Answer DNs Telephone DNs can be assigned to indicator buttons on other telephones to provide backup answering You can assign a maximum of eight answer DNs to a telephone You cannot assign Answer DNs to analog telephones or to Model 7000 or 7100 telephones Determining which calls alert You can also determine which calls alert at Answer DNs Under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings beside Answer keys choose the level of support Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 78 Warning This setting affects all Answer DNs on the system Some features A such as Hunt group overflow require the setting to be either Enhanced or Extended However if you assign Answer DNs to Contact Center telephones the setting must be Basic Therefore you must coordinate how your system uses Answer DNs Assigning Answer DNs to telephones Answer DNs are assigned on a per telephone basis by the system administrator To assign an Answer DN 1 Ensure that the telephone you want to assign with Answer DNs has available memory buttons with indicators 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets under the Line Access tab choose the DN record for the telephone where you want to add Answer DNs In the bo
93. using alpha tagging you can choose the larger list to accommodate your incoming call requirements Also refer to Using alpha tagging for name display incoming Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 CLID match length lt 3 8 gt Indicate the number of digits starting from the right of the dial None string that the system needs to match between an incoming call and a system speed dial listing to prompt the alpha tagging display When a match is made the system provides a name or number display for any calls coming in over analog lines that allow number CLID Also refer to Using alpha tagging for name display incoming Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Default 8 System Speed Dial s Note These values are read only For information on how to configure speed dials see User Speed Dial tab on page 63 Speed Dial Number lt 001 070 or 001 255 gt Displays dial codes for the System Speed Dial list External Number lt dial string max 24 digits gt Displays the number the system dials when the code is entered Remember to include required destination codes NN40020 300 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers 89 Table 30 System Speed Dial Sheet 2 of 2 Facility Use prime line Select the route you want the dialed number to remove from your Use line system Pool code Note Any lines or pool codes that you specify must
94. want the other set to hear DTMF tones during dial ensure that the Long Tones feature is active FEATURE 808 Note This feature is not available for 20XX IP telephones since they cannot receive long or short tones e If you want to add someone to the conference through the trunk use the button marked Link FEATURE 71 Dialing shortcuts Use the following features to save time when dialing e Last Number Redial e Saved Number Redial on page 225 e Autodial on page 225 e Speed dialing on page 225 e Programming memory buttons on page 226 Last Number Redial If the number you want to dial is the last number dialed from your telephone use this feature to redial the external number NN40020 300 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 225 Allowing the feature You enable last number redial for each telephone through the restriction programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Allow Last Number check box Using the feature Press FEATURE 5 Note This feature records a maximum of 24 digits Saved Number Redial Use this feature to save a number from an existing call or from an autodial button so that you can call the number later Each telephone can save only one number at a time Allowing the feature Enable last saved redial for each telephone through the restriction programming Configuration gt Telephony g
95. you have dialed Message No number programmed for the message center Contact your voice messaging service provider Voice call The telephone receiving the call cannot accept voice calls for one of the following reasons e The telephone is active or ringing with another call e Call Forward is on e Do Not Disturb is on e Voice Call Deny is on e It is nota BCM telephone e Your call continues as a normal ringing call You tried to use a feature that is currently not available from your system Transfer The telephone where you directed a call is not in service or is or unavailable The call returns to your telephone Silent monitor The DN you entered is not a Hunt Group member Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Call forward Two or more telephones are linked in a forwarding chain and one is out of service or used for programming Transfer The telephone to which you are trying to transfer a call is out of service Camp on The telephone to which you have camped a call is out of service or is used for programming The call has returned to you Press CALLBCK or the line button to reconnect to the call On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset to reconnect with the call Silent monitor The DN you entered did not respond to the system Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 243 Display prompt Hot Surrorted Observe
96. 0 1400 Poland 25 65 18 32 180 80 75 520 680 United Kingdom 25 65 18 32 200 50 15 150 1500 Device Configuration Guide 278 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 83 Dial pulse and DTMF parameters Dial pulse DTMF Dial pulse Min max Min max Min interdigit DTMF coding Min DTMF coding break make pause scheme detect level Market profile scheme duration ms duration ms duration ms digits dB Australia N 40 90 20 60 300 16 36 Bahrain N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Canada N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Caribbean N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Global N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Hong Kong N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Ireland N 15 200 15 200 200 16 36 Mexico N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 New Zealand N 15 200 15 200 200 16 36 North America N 25 120 10 90 250 12 36 Poland N 44 88 25 48 400 12 36 United Kingdom N 15 200 15 200 200 16 36 GASI parameters This section contains information for the onboard GASI interface GASI interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Denmark France Germany Holland Ireland Italy Mexico New Zealand Norway Poland PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan UK Note that the GASI currently has not been localized for markets except North America The GASI will function in some profiles outside of North America however the interface will respond with No
97. 020 300 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings 81 Advanced Feature Settings The following path indicates where to access advance feature settings in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings The Advanced Feature Settings panel enables administrators to modify the following features e System Wide Call Appearances Control e ONN Blocking North American systems on page 83 e Silent Monitor on page 84 e Reset logs on page 85 System Wide Call Appearances Control There are a number of ways that calls can be parked on System Wide Call Appearance SWCA assignments Use this panel to set the system feature function Figure 25 System Wide Call Appearances controls Advanced Feature Settings System Wide Call Appearances Control Auto associate SWCA key to call Tee TEE v Invoke SWCA parking by Hold 7 Include I C calls when auto associating go Include I C calls when invoked by Hold oO Table 26 describes the fields on this panel Table 26 SWCA controls Sheet 1 of 2 Atiribute Value Description Auto associate SWCA key to call Select how a call is parked on a SWCA key Manually while parked Default Manually while parked Manually life of call Automatically life of call Manually while parked The user either presses a free SWCA key on the telephone or dials
98. 06 Index control set see also control telephone 51 control telephone overview 229 conventions guide 18 button options 18 buttons 18 command line 18 Copy Key 176 copying telephone settings 69 copyright 2 CoS Class of Service password 68 34 current call information 811 38 time 803 38 custom feature labels 145 cycle park codes park mode 77 D default 7208 157 7316 buttons 156 7406 buttons 159 button assignment 153 buttons 154 2004 160 IP Phone 2002 161 hunt group DN 102 default buttons DMC portables 179 delay Camp timeout 79 host delay timer 80 link timer 80 Park timeout 79 ring transfer 76 deny voice call 88 39 Desktop Assistant 136 dial insert Link 71 34 insert pause 78 35 dial tone wait 228 wait 804 36 See also dialing plan dialing restrictions Dialing Translation Dialing Translation Table dialing automatic dial 192 insert pause 78 38 Link signal 228 mode 82 34 options 56 pause signal 228 pre dial 192 run stop 228 standard dial 192 dialing restrictions line set restriction 67 telephone 65 dialtone wait for 804 38 digital mobility feature list 91 Digital Mobility Controller See DMC 91 direct dial telephone overview 232 sending messages 76 direct dial digit allow disallow 53 Directed Pickup answering from any telephone F76 38 feature settings 77 pick up code F76 34 198 discarded calls call log 135 disconnect supervision
99. 08 Voice mail login 09 Express Messaging 10 Service menu 11 Blank 12 Blank There are three models of the IP Phone 2004 referred to as Phase 0 Phase 1 and Phase 2 The higher level models have some features that are not available on the lower level models To determine the model of your IP Phone turn the IP Phone over and locate the label containing the product code NT code The product code identifies the model of your IP Phone Table 50 IP Phone 2004 model codes Product code Model NTEX0O0xx or NT7B10AACH Phase 0 NTDU82xx Phase 1 NTDU92xxxx Phase 2 Where xx or xxxx represents any valid character NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 161 IP telephone 2002 button defaults The 2002 has four memory buttons beside a display that provides soft labels for the buttons This telephone also has five other programmable buttons with no display Figure 52 2002 default button assignment IP Phone 2002 models Table 51 2002 button defaults 2002 default button mapping Bin PBX DID 01 Call Forward Line XXX 02 Conference Transfer 03 Intercom 04 Intercom 05 Blank 06 Voice mail login 07 Express Messaging 08 Service menu 09 Blank There are two models of the IP Phone 2002 referred to as Phase and Phase 2 The Phase 2 models have some features that are not available on the Phase 1 models To determine the model of your IP Phone
100. 28 Chapter 3 System Software 4 Inthe bottom frame ensure that the Time zone is correct for the location of the local system 5 If Trunk was selected in the Date and Time Source drop down list enter the year in the Year field Note Only time and date info are updated when NTP and Trunk settings are selected Year information is not updated You also have full control over time and date settings using telset admin even if NTP or Trunk are selected Any setting applied through telset admin are over written by the external source if NTP or Trunk are selected Time zones need to be set for software updates to be applied Setting clock control to local system If you want the clock to be controlled locally 1 Ensure that Date and Time Source is set to Manual 2 Inthe bottom frame In the Time zone field select the Time zone the system uses In the Date and time field enter the month day and year hours and minutes and time of day The Daylight Savings Time check box is selected or cleared automatically depending on the time zone selected NN40020 300 29 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling Use scheduled services to control how calls are answered in off hours Ringing Groups how calls are routed at various times of the day and how restrictions are applied on lines and telephones at specific times of the day The following paths indicate where to access scheduled services in Eleme
101. 3 114 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services Figure 38 Hospitality Rooms tab panel Hospitality General Rooms DN Name Model Room Number Requires Desk Password 221 M7324 wy a 222 222 T7208 M7208 T 223 223 T7208 M7208 T 224 224 T7208 M7208 T 225 225 T7316E M 226 226 T7208 M7208 T 227 227 T7208 M7208 M 228 228 T7208 M7208 M 29 229 T7208 M7208 M 230 230 77208 M7208 M z Table 36 describes the fields in the list on this panel Table 36 Room settings Field Values Description DN lt read only gt DN of a telephone assigned to a room Name lt alphanumeric gt Name assigned to a DN Model lt drop down list gt Model name from the DN record Room Number lt any digit from 1 to 32767 gt Enter the room that contains the telephone with this DN Requires Desk lt check box gt If selected the telephone requires a password to Password access administrative level hospitality features FEATURE 877 FEATURE 878 or FEATURE 879 If cleared the telephone does not require any passwords to access the features Desk passwords are created using the main Hospitality command Setting up your hospitality system Use the Hospitality panels to set up room telephones and determine how they function Once the system is set up you can change settings through the telephone using the Desk password Service personnel change the service state of the room using the
102. 30 30 30 30 N A 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms 600 N A 600 N A 600 N A Target line if busy Prime PBX gt Busy _ Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime BRI ISDN Answer Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Auto Mode Companding law A law A law A law A law mu law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings 1 2 1 2 1 2 in a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes supported Mode Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring cycles 4ringcycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start17 00 Start17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 271 Table 76 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile
103. 35 PRI line note 131 viewing active service prompts 246 voice message set 47 template button assignments 154 time current 803 35 display current time 803 38 static 806 35 time savers NN40020 300 Index 315 autodial 225 Speed Dial 225 timeout camp timeout timers 79 page timeout timer 79 park timeout timer 79 transfer callback timer 79 timers camp timeout 79 Host delay 80 hunt delay 103 hunt group queue time out 103 link 80 network callback 79 page timeout 79 park timeout 79 transfer callback timeout 79 tone long at telephone 808 38 message indicator 58 tracking MCID 214 tracking incoming calls calllog 214 trademarks 2 transfer activate 70 36 Callback 211 callback timeout 79 calls 206 cancel 70 36 initiate 3 37 initiating at telephone 70 37 priority call 69 37 ring delay 76 SWCA calls 291 SWCA overview 211 to voice mailbox 986 36 via hold hunt groups 234 voice mail to mail box 986 40 transfer See also Call Transfer troubleshooting eCAP restore issue 128 trunk answer activating 800 36 199 at telephone 800 38 Directed Pickup 198 ring groups 98 ringing services 32 U unanswered by me autologging 56 unanswered calls prime telephone 232 user access set lock 65 User preferences configuring CAP KIM buttons 95 user preferences button features list 36 programming 55 user programming contrast 191 language 192 moving lines 193 receiver volu
104. 481 Digital Mobility DECT Deployment and Demonstration Tool Digital Mobility System Installation and Configuration Guide N0000623 T7406 Cordless Handset Installation Guide P0606142 IP Telephony BCM IP Softphone 2050 Installation Guide NO022555 WLAN IP Telephony Installation and Configuration Guide N0060634 User Guides Telephones and Peripherals BCM Telephone Features User Guide NO0060608 BST Doorphone User Guide P0605668 Central Answering Position CAP User Guide P0603480 Hospitality Features Card N0027326 System wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card N0027186 T7000 Telephone User Card P0912061 T7100 Telephone User Card P0609621 T7208 Telephone User Card P0609622 T7316 Telephone User Card P0935248 T7316E Telephone User Card P0609623 IP Phone 1120E User Guide NN 10300 062 IP Phone 1140E User Guide NN 10300 064 IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide N0060623 IP Key Expansion Module KEM User Guide NN40020 300 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 21 Digital Mobility DECT 413X 414X Handset User Guide N0028550 DECT 4145Ex 4146Ex Handset User Guide XXXXX Digital Mobility Phone 7420 User Guide N0000635 Digital Mobility Phone 7430 7440 User Guide N0028550 T7406 Cordless Telephone User Card P0942259 IP Telephony IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 User Guide N0060623 IP Phone 2001 User Guide N0027313 IP Phone 2002 User Guide N0027300 IP Phone 2004 User Guide
105. 65 special features hospitality 231 hunt groups 233 silent monitor 230 special telephones control telephone 229 direct dial telephone 232 hotline 229 prime line 232 speed dial activate 0 35 activate feature 0 37 add change 4 35 force auto spd dial over ic conf 76 user programming 63 standard dial 56 192 static time 806 35 status service mode on telephone 870 39 Status area 178 supervision GASM disconnect supervision 59 SWCA auto hold control 54 autohold 204 button codes 520 to 535 38 conference calls 291 memory buttons 226 memory codes 520 to 535 35 overview 211 transferring calls 291 SWCA System Wide Call Appearance associate SWCA System Wide Call Appearance key tocall 81 include I C calls when auto associating 81 include I C calls when invoked by Hold 82 invoke SWCA parking by hold 82 Symbols 18 system speed dialing 226 system defaults by region 260 System DNs copying settings 69 Device Configuration Guide 314 Index system programming user speed dials 63 T T7208 button defaults 157 T7316E button defaults 154 T7406 button defaults 159 target line external call DND 201 target lines appearances 46 Telephon ATA Dve setting 58 telephone log calls automatically 135 test display 805 35 telephone programming alarm telephone 77 allow last number redial 65 allow link feature 66 allow redirect 54 allow saved number redial 65 allow
106. 7100 digital phone is a basic function digital telephone with a single line display For all templates assigned to 7100 digital phones the one programmable button defaults to Last Number Redial This telephone cannot use features that require a speaker such as Page Note The default Page feature activates the External Page option FEATURE 62 7000 digital phone button defaults Note The 7000 phone is available only in limited markets Figure 49 7000 digital phone button mapping a This digital basic function telephone has four programmable memory keys that default to the features shown in Table 47 This telephone has no display and does not support features that require a speaker or a display GT Table 47 7000 digital phone button defaults G2 7000 button defaults Ox PBX DID Btn Last Number Redial 1 Cor Call Forward 2 Transfer 3 Conference Transfer 4 NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 159 7406 digital phone button defaults Note The 7406 phone is available only in limited markets Figure 50 7406 digital phone button defaults IP telephone button defaults The 7406 cordless handset is based on the 7316 digital phone button numbering However the 7406 handset has only six memory buttons These buttons map to specific 7316 button numbers 01 02 03 07 08 09 Ensure that when you fill out the DN record which shows 24 buttons for th
107. AE provides the capability to label buttons on a set You can label buttons in offline mode or during button programming To label a button 1 Click the appropriate label A cursor appears in the label area 2 Change the text font size font type or background color You can view the current font size font type and background color in the toolbar at the top of the window Note This application does not retain labels font size font type or gt background color between sessions To save or restore this information use the Save Current Settings and Load Settings on the File menu Button Labeling does not apply to the IP Phone 2007 IP Phone 2004 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2001 1140e 1120e and 2033 sets because they do not have printable labels NN40020 300 191 Chapter 23 Telephony features Feature programming has two aspects Some features are set for all telephones and devices and some features are set on an individual basis in the DN record The following divides system features in terms of how they are used Each feature section contains both system programming and how the feature is used at the telephone e Features to set up telephone set features on page 191 e Feature configuration Answering calls on page 197 Feature configuration Making calls on page 217 Global VoIP features on page 143 e Using telephones for special features on page 229 Refer to the Telephone F
108. Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions on page 284 describes the types of analog and digital trunks Some of these trunk types are available only when you select specific market profiles Table 90 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 1 of 2 Trunk types Description Digital trunk types T1 E1 Digital line that carries data on 24 channels at 1 544 Mbps North American 30 channels at 2048 Mbps Europe Loop E amp M DID and ground start lines are also versions of T1 lines You can program autoanswer T1 loop start T1 E amp M trunks T1 DID T1 ground start trunks PRI and IP trunks to map to target lines to provide for attendant bypass calling directly to a department or individual and line concentration one trunk can map onto several target lines DID This is a type of T1 trunk line used by an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM Loop This is a type of T1 line Use this type of line on systems where the service provider supports disconnect supervision for the digital loop start trunks These trunks provide remote access to the Business Communications Manager from the public network This trunk must have disconnect supervision so you can set the trunk to autoanswer which provides the remote access portal Ground T1 groundstart trunk These lines offer the same features as loop start trunks but use these lines when the local service provider does not su
109. Assistant Pro Desktop Assistant Pro AE Overview Target user End user End user Network administrators Purpose Print labels for the buttons of the T series phones This is a stand alone client application installed on the user s PC Print labels for T or M series phones and program button functions for digital and IP phones The scope of this application is sets associated with the DN of the user This application requires LAN CTE to connect to the BCM to program telephone set buttons It can also run in offline mode without being connected to a BCM for stand alone support of label creation and printing Print labels for T and M series phones and program button functions for digital and IP phones The scope of this application is all sets that require labeling or button programming attached to a specified BCM This application requires LAN CTE to connect to the BCM to program telephone set buttons It can also run in offline mode without being connected to a BCM for stand alone support of label creation and printing be programmed using the application indicated by P M7100N L P M7310N L P M7324N L P T7100 L T7208 L P T7316 L P T7316E L P T7406 Wireless L P T24 KIM L P labeling in online mode only 2001 P 2002 P 2004 P Creating paper labels for Yes Yes Yes telephone set buttons Programming telephone set No
110. DN to any hunt group member If this occurs the Answer DN does not ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow condition occurs If the hunt group DN overflow telephone whether assigned as an Answer DN to a non group member ensure that the Answer key for your system is set to Extended e Aux Ringer If an external ringer is installed indicate if the hunt group calls use it select check box e Distinct Ring Define if incoming hunt calls have a different ring than other calls received by the member Programming note If you assign a distinctive ring pattern for a Hunt Group all calls offered to telephones in the group use the assigned ring pattern If no pattern is assigned or if the ring pattern is lower in status than the ring pattern of the line or the telephone setting the call uses the ring pattern with the highest status setting Refer to the sections that describe configuring Lines and DNs for information about assigning distinctive ring patterns to lines and telephones Hunt Group members and lines The lower frame of the Hunt Group panel shows a list of DNs that are assigned as members of the group and the lines assigned to the hunt group Device Configuration Guide 106 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups Figure 36 Hunt Group Members and Line Assignment tables Details for Hunt Group 01 Distinct rings inuse Hunt Group Members Line Assignment Members Seq No DN Appearance Type Lines
111. DNs to the telephone Programming note e If the telephone does not have any buttons with indicators available to provide an Answer DN appearance ensure that Appearance Type is set to Ring only e Answer DNs which are assigned to buttons can also be used to autodial that telephone Job aid Answer DN notes You can assign a maximum of eight Answer DNs to a telephone You can also determine the types of calls alert at the telephone where the answer DNs are assigned Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 78 Note You cannot assign Answer DNs to 7000 or 7100 telephones because they do not have memory buttons Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Warning Contact Center restrictions If you assign Answer DNs ensure that the Answer l f keys field Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings is set to Basic Mobility sets On 7406 cordless digital telephones you can twin desk sets with the portable sets by assigning one or more handset DNs to a desk set Answer DN Hunt group note A sequential Hunt group which has an overflow telephone defined does not support the overflow telephone being assigned as an Answer DN for any hunt group member If an overflow situation occurs the Answer DN does not ring a hunt group telephone Autodial function Answer DNs can also act as an internal autodial link to the assigned telephone The Answer DN must be idle for this feature t
112. DSM16 station BRI Market profile DSM32 interface BRI cNIC DTM R2MFC Australia vA v v v v Bahrain Vv lt s Y vA Y Brazil s vA Y vA NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 253 Table 67 Digital interface availability by market profile Sheet 2 of 2 Market profile DSM16 DSM32 Digital station interface BRI BRI cNIC DTM R2MFC CALA y v Canada Caribbean Denmark France Germany Global Holland Se SIN ee SSN Hong Kong lreland S Italy S Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland SEN NEN PRC Spain S Sweden S Switzerland Taiwan SENSES SN SISSI SEISIS NNN SISSIT S United Kingdom ANS NIN NEN NINO NY ST NN SN SS S SNP NENT SENN NN NENT SE SEN NESS SENN S KN NNN SY SENN NE NEN SENT SNE SNES NEN NS Tones and cadences The following tables provide region specific settings for tones and cadences Note The sum of two tones is indicated by A B The sequence of two tones is indicated by A B Device Configuration Guide 254 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes e Localized Dial and Quiet Dial on page 254 e Special Dial Overflow and Busy on page 255 e Ring Back Aux Ring Async Ring Back on page 256 e Hold Warble Intrusion
113. Delayed ring transfer setting Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings Fwd No Answer Calls are forwarded to the entered dial string after a set number of rings Fwd Delay Enter the number of rings before the system forwards the call Fwd Busy Calls are forwarded to the entered dial string immediately if the target telephone is busy Fwd All All calls are forwarded to the indicated number immediately NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 209 Call Forward and voice mail Note If the call forward destination is external ensure the DN has gt Allow Redirect enabled If you want a voice mail system to pick up unanswered calls e if you program Fwd No Answer and Fwd Busy use the internal number of your voice mail as the destination e if your voice messaging system or service automatically retrieves calls make the ring delay greater than the delay used by your voice mail system e ifthe voice mail system is on a remote system ensure that the correct destination codes are added to the voice mail forwarding dial string e if calls are being forwarded to telephones or voice mail outside the system ensure that Allow redirect is set for the telephones To use Call Forward at the telephone 1 Get the DN internal or the destination code and telephone number external private network for the destination telephone 2 Enter FEATURE 4 3 Enter the d
114. Device Configuration Guide 178 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 58 WLAN handset buttons keys and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Button Description O Function key Accesses handset functions when in active idle state The Function key also provides access to the User Option menu in the standby state Q Line key Accesses the Feature menu Up Down and Select buttons Enables you to navigate and activate the various menu options Adjusts the speaker and ringer volume Push to Talk button Push to Talk is available on the WLAN Handset 2211 only Activates the Push to Talk feature on the WLAN Handset 2211 WLAN handset display There are three areas to the WLAN handset display e Status area on page 178 e Information area on page 179 e Feature options area on page 179 Figure 61 shows an example of the WLAN handset display Figure 61 WLAN handset display CF4 3 EE EEE F Status area Ftur Aaaa Status area Bbbb Information area Cccc Feature options area The status area displays the handset status It can include e status indicators see Table 59 e left and right arrows e a series of dots representing the line keys which change to a number when active NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 179 Table 59 describes the status indicators on your WLAN Handset
115. GASM 59 Display 18 display contrast 191 voice mail DN 985 40 displaying prompts calllog 247 common 235 viewing active service 246 distinct ring hunt groups 104 in use telephone programming 56 distribution modes Hunt groups 103 DMC Digital Mobility Controller feature list 91 DMC portables NN40020 300 Index 307 default buttons 179 DN button programming 153 display voice mail DN 985 40 hunt groups 102 DND Do Not Disturb activate 85 34 cancel 85 Do not disturb See DND 34 initiating 85 39 on Busy 201 overview 202 DND on busy hunt groups 234 initiating 85 39 programming 53 DNs button programming 60 dialing restrictions 65 ISDN feature support 52 user preferences model 62 Do Not Disturb See DND download firmware 151 DPNSS 1 Digital Private Network Signaling System lines Embark switch 133 duplicate system DNs 69 E eCAP restore issue 128 Embark switch Call Forward 133 DPNSS lines 133 validation errors 134 ETSI MCID feature 214 evening schedule 31 Exclusive Hold 79 38 205 Expand to PC key 175 express messaging into voice mail 980 34 39 external hotline 56 paging equipment 219 to target line 201 external autodial 63 user speed dial 63 extra dial telephone 32 lines CAP module 128 F facility hotline programming 56 user speed dial 63 fax ATA answer timer 58 feature button programming 62 feature list DMC 91 features act
116. Guide 156 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 7316 digital phone button defaults Button mapping for the 7316 digital phone is unique Although the button programming follows the 7310 digital phone button mapping the 7316 does not have a second level on its upper button group Because of this the numbering for the 7316 is not consecutive As well the top three buttons on each column of the bottom button group refer to the 7310 upper button programming This means that line assignment starts on the fourth button down on the left column rather than on the top button as with all other 7X XX digital phones Refer to the diagrams below Internal autodial numbers are assigned to buttons 11 13 15 17 19 and 21 on the main button group Programmed external line buttons descend down the lower left buttons starting with button 01 When more than five external lines are programmed assignment continues on the lower right buttons starting at button 06 Note The 7316E telephone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 telephone Es Therefore if you replace a 7316 telephone with a 7316E telephone the button programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E Figure 46 shows the default button number assignments on the 7316 telephone Figure 46 7316 digital phone upper button defaults 7316 upper buttons PBX and DID default button settings Btn Btn Autodial to 227 23 31 Autodial to 231 Auto
117. Guide 208 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls To redirect lines at the telephone 1 Press FEATURE 84 2 Enter the external telephone number where you want the call to transfer Cancel feature FEATURE 84 Note Model 7000 and 7100 digital telephones and 2001 IP telephones do not support this feature Call forward unanswered calls You can set up a telephone to send calls to another telephone automatically or to a voice mailbox if the telephone is not answered or if it rings busy This feature can be programmed from the system for each telephone as well as at the telephone Note Call forward to GATI and GATM trunks from an external node is not supported in Poland Ireland Australia UK or New Zealand market profiles Programming call forward on the system Using system programming you can forward calls internally or externally if the telephone is unanswered if the telephone is busy or you can forward all calls to an external number To program call forward on the system 1 Determine the dial string for the telephone to which the calls are to be forwarded Include routing codes if the telephone is external to the system 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access tab select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to configure call forward 3 Enter the dial string where to forward the call Note Ensure that this entry is less than the
118. I perform as expected This feature allows you to leave a message on the display of another telephone in your system or to analog telephones connected to an Analog Station Module ASM ASM8 The Messages feature indicates if you have any messages waiting The Messages feature uses a message waiting list to keep a record of your internal messages and your external voice mail messages To keep a record of external voice mail messages you must have access to an external Voice Messaging service with visual message waiting indication and a BCM digital telephone User messaging codes e Send message FEATURE 1 Cancel using FEATURE 1 e View and reply to message FEATURE 65 e Cancel Message Waiting FEATURE 65 e Erasing a message while viewing a message Press Hold Paging If you are unable to reach a person by telephone or you want to deliver the same message to more than one person use the page feature This feature allows you to make page announcements in various ways depending on the audience you are trying to reach Feature constraints e Telephones that do not have external speakers can initiate pages but cannot receive pages 7000 and 7100 digital telephones and the 2001 IP telephone e Using Page with external equipment When you make a page that uses external paging equipment external page or combined page the DTMF Long Tones feature automatically activates for the external paging system only thus all
119. If the new telephone is a different model it downloads the part of the programming that is the same for both models Default Cleared Alarm set DN lt number gt Assign a device on which alarm messages appear when a problem is detected in the system Device Configuration Guide 78 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings Answer DN answer key levels You can determine what type of calls alert at an assigned Answer DN key This is a system setting so all Answer DNs behave the same There are three answer key levels Basic Enhanced and Extended If your system supports overflow routing of calls for example Hunt groups the setting is Enhanced or Extended Alternatively if Contact Center telephones are assigned Answer DNs this setting must be Basic Do not change this setting unless you understand the impact on the other telephone groups in your system In Table 24 the X indicates the type of calls that are handled at Answer DNs for each answer key level Table 24 DN answer key levels Answer DN call response for Basic Enhanced Extended Prime set call capture X Overflow call routing calls X Call forwarded calls Ringing service calls Callbacks Blind transferred calls X xX XxX XxX XxX Xx Other answer key calls Priority calls Voice calls All other calls X X X Also refer to e Answer DNs tab on page 49 e Telephony features on page 191 Timers Various system featu
120. Information Ring Volume 80 812 Call Log View information Ringing Signal Call 807 813 Call Log Manual Room condition Room set 876 815 a i IEMS Room condition HS admin set 878 818 Call Charge Indication Room occupancy 879 819 Name and number blocking Run Stop 9 819 Name and number blocking Cancel Saved Number Redial 67 870 View active services Silent Monitor 550 871 Turn Ringing service on Speed Dial Add change 4 871 Turn Ringing service off Speed Dial Activate 0 872 Turn Restriction service on Static Time 806 872 Turn Restriction service off Static Time Cancel 806 873 Turn Routing service on System Wide Call Appearance SWCA 521 to 873 Turn Routing service off 1536 875 Alarm time Find available SWCA 520 875 Alarm time Cancel Find oldest SWCA 537 876 Room condition Room set Find newest SWCA 538 877 Alarm time HS admin Test telephone display 805 878 Room condition HS admin Time 803 879 Room occupancy Device Configuration Guide 36 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 4 of 4 Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name Time zone adjust IP telephones 510 897 Malicious call identification MCID Transfer 70 9 Run Stop Transfer Cancel 70 900 IP Services list Transfer to mailbo
121. Line DN key to return to the caller on hold JJG Device Configuration Guide 170 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 55 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting Press the Messages key to access the callers list Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen A small arrow appears on the right side of the display when there is additional text or prompts to be displayed Press the Services key to access the main Menu You can also use this key to access the following features if they are available on your telephone e Call Transfer e Call Park e Call Forward e 3 way and 6 way Conference Call Soft keys self labeled are located below the LCD screen display The LCD screen display above the key changes based on a the active feature Press the gt gt soft key to toggle between the first and second row of soft keys LCD screen display The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has two display areas e The upper display area contains single line information for items such as the caller number caller name feature prompt strings digits entered by the user date and time information and set information e The lower display area provides soft key label information NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 171 Figure 57 IP Audio Conference
122. Lines choose the line for which you want to assign privacy 2 Inthe bottom panel click the Preferences tab 3 Beside Trunk mode choose Unspr unsupervised from the drop down list NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 203 Programming a line to automatically enable privacy You can program some lines to make a call private automatically To automatically enable privacy on a line 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical Lines select the line for which you want to automatically enable privacy In the bottom panel click the Preferences tab Select the Auto privacy check box 4 Ifthe line is part of a line pool ensure that all other lines in the pool also have this feature enabled Using the Privacy feature Press FEATURE 83 to change the privacy setting on the line e Ifa line normally has privacy this permits another telephone which shares the line to join your call by selecting the line while you are using it e Ifa line normally has privacy disabled this prevents another telephone which shares the line from joining your call by selecting the line while you are using it e The privacy setting is re established when you end your call or when you enter the Privacy feature code again Note Privacy control cannot be used for internal or conference calls When another telephone joins a call on a non private line the participants on the call hear a tone
123. Link time ms N A 600 N A 600 N A N A Target line if busy PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Prime PBX gt Busy Busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime BRI ISDN Answer Manual Manual Auto Manual Auto Manual Mode Companding law_ A law A law A law mu law A law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 E1 System settings Number of rings in 2 1 2 1 2 2 a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes supported Mode Sequential Broadcast Sequential Broadcast Sequential Sequential Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 60 60 60 60 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 08 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start17 00 Start17 00 Start17 00 Start 00 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 00 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 00 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 00 00 Device Configuration Guide 268 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 75 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile
124. Norway Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Poland Yes 425 17 5 Continuous 425 19 5 Continuous PRC Yes 450 11 5 Continuous 450 17 5 Continuous Spain Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Sweden Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Switzerland Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Taiwan Yes 400 12 Continuous 400 20 Continuous United Kingdom Yes 440 350 17 5 Continuous 440 350 14 5 Continuous NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 255 Table 69 Special Dial Overflow and Busy Sheet 1 of 2 Special Dial Overflow Busy Level Level Level per per per Tones Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0O Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia 400 13 100 ms on 800 13 100 ms on 425 13 375 ms on 900 ms off 100 ms off 375 ms off Bahrain 330 400 16 100 ms on 800 16 400 ms on 425 15 375 ms on 900 ms off 350 ms off 375 ms off 225 ms on 525 ms off Brazil 425 11 5 500 ms on 950 1400 18 333 ms 425 11 5 250 ms on 500 ms off 1800 333 ms 250 ms off silence 333 ms 1s off CALA Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Canada Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Caribbean Silence 480 620 21 250 ms on 480 620 21 500 ms on 250 ms off 500 ms off Denmark Silence 950 1400 25 333 ms 425 11 5
125. Not Disturb Forward your calls to a designated prime telephone when there is no other telephone assigned with the line An internal caller receives a display indicating that the telephone has Do Not Disturb active They can either call back or use the Priority call feature to override the feature DND on Busy When you are busy on a call and a second call comes in your telephone alerts you to the second call with a light ring If you find this second call ring disruptive assign Do Not Disturb DND on Busy to prevent a second call If this feature is active the line indicator for an external incoming call flashes but your telephone does not ring e Internal and private network callers hear a busy tone instead of ringing when you are on the telephone e External callers are transferred to the Prime set used in your system or to your voice mail Forward on Busy takes priority over DND on Busy If an external call uses a target line the call is processed according to the programming of the target line If the target line is busy the caller hears a busy tone or the call is routed to the Prime set for the target line or to the voice mail system even if DND on Busy is programmed Programming a telephone for DND on Busy This feature is programmed on a per telephone basis Device Configuration Guide 202 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls To program a telephone for DND on Busy Ensure that target lines are pro
126. QUIT to exit On one line display telephones press RLS Cancel feature FEATURE 873 Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring The silent monitoring feature enables specified two line display telephones to be used to monitor Hunt group and Contact Center operators You can specify whether the system sounds a tone before breaking into a call or whether the break in is silent Display prompts on the supervisor telephone allows the supervisor to unmute or move from user to user NN40020 300 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 231 Setting up Silent Monitoring The following path indicates where to set up silent monitoring parameters in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings Security Note Change the password regularly Assigning a supervisor telephone A maximum of 30 two line display telephones can be configured as supervisor telephones for monitoring This feature can be assigned in Element Manager under Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Capabilities Refer to Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 109 Hospitality services telephones This feature enables small to medium service facilities to provide customer telephone service as well as administration services through a telephone interface Programming Besides the general line and telephone programming
127. These symbols are used to highlight critical information for the BCM system Caution Alerts you to conditions where you can damage the equipment Danger Alerts you to conditions where you can get an electrical shock Warning Alerts you to conditions where you can cause the system to fail or work l f improperly Note Alerts you to important information Tip Alerts you to additional information that can help you perform a task Security Note Indicates a point of system security where a default should be changed or where the administrator needs to make a decision about the level of security required for the system Warning Alerts you to ground yourself with an antistatic grounding strap EA before performing the maintenance procedure Warning Alerts you to remove the BCM main unit and expansion unit power cords from the ac outlet before performing any maintenance procedure Ke NN40020 300 Chapter 1 Getting started withBCM 19 The following conventions and symbols are used to represent the Business Series Terminal display and dialpad Convention Example Used for Word in a special font Shown in Pswd Command line prompts on display telephones the top line of the display Underlined word in capital letters PLA Display option Available on two line display shown in the bottom line of a telephones Press the button directly below the two lin
128. To deine akay ebel uaren ES 146 To set up a password and allow Hot desking sssssessssssssssrrnsnsnrrnannerannesrrnnnennnannerennan 148 To reset the Hot desking password field for a specific IP telephone ecece 149 To use the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration 149 To Cmmoa HOCES kN Reema eee reeere metre entree treater ninee greta reer rr eer renee rere reety 150 To configure a new time zone on a remote IP telephone cceceesseceeeeeeeeeeereees 150 To force a firmware download to a Nortel IP telephone eeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeees 151 Default memory button programming for telephones 153 To enable Bluetooth on an IP Phone 1140E 0 cccceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeseaeeees 173 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 183 TODS a D a 190 Telephony features s ccsccncas cea ae eines dese eenenraeenneeias 191 WGN ling UTE NG sis ks eccee ste cases sc centeasrecccneres bedsores seedenuvevicmeesnes icira on barenvdeenerastl 193 Feature configuration Answering calls 00ee eee e eens 197 To configure handsfree and handsfree anSwerback ecseceeeeeeseeeeeeeesteeeeeeenneeeeeeees 198 Toadd a telephone to a pickup OTOUD sescrscczictrescccccuesvccensnesstcceomenscoimelanstoneeteentaeamenste 199 TR Ae t nk ans Werona A elec aiea aaia 199 TO DOCK USOT BIS oain aein aE EASE ND NEESER EREE 199 To assign an Answer DN sess
129. WCA Call Group tab Details for DN 225 Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial SWCA Call Group Caii g cais Py caia Fy Calis Fy Cai 0 Cale Fy Call10 0 Calis 0 Cal3 Fy Cal 0 Cali Fy Calis 0 Call4 cals Cali 0 Calie 0 Preferences tab The Preferences headings allow you to program the same settings that users can perform at their telephones and the settings for configuring a telephone as a hotline The telset admin options are available only to digital phones and IP telephones Figure 13 Preferences tab panel Details for DN 225 ar mee Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial Language English v Call log options No one answered v Dialing options Standard dial Logspace o ETO Contrast i P Available log space otline Ringtype l1 v Hotline ype None Reset Call Log Password Distinct rings in use Aux ringer o Table 15 describes the headings on the Preferences panel Table 15 Preferences panel fields Sheet 1 of 3 Setting Values Description Language Languages Choose the language for the telephone display prompts displayed are based on telephone capabilities and system software Device Configuration Guide 56 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 15 Preferences panel fields Sheet 2 of 3
130. a call comes in on that line given that Appr amp Ring is configured on the line To resolve this situation access the DN records for the telephone and the CAP KIM button programming Enter the required programming e By using FEATURE 81 at the telephone lines can be moved to other buttons on the telephone except intercom Answer DN or handsfree positions or the lines can be moved to buttons on the modules on an eCAP On telephones the feature or line assigned to the button where the line is moved moves to the original line button position On eCAP modules moved lines overwrite feature programming Line Assignment and Line Pools Programming references Job aid Answer DN notes on page 129 To add line assignments Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Select the Line Access tab Select the Line Assignment tab in the bottom panel Click Add to add line assignments for the telephone a fF WN Determine how the line behaves at the telephone Note Not all of these fields apply to all types of lines e Appearance Type Appearances target lines e Caller ID Set target lines e Vimsg Set NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 129 e Priv Received e Pub Received Click the Line Pool Access tab Use the Add button to add line pools for the telephone Click the Answer DNs tab O ON O Use the Add button to add a maximum of eight Answer
131. aaaapannntanlecena dain piauaane trand insin 115 To delete a room assignment from a telephone ccccessccceeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeteseneeneetes 116 Configuring analog telephones and devices 000s0e0005 117 To assign a PAUSE for extemal dialing s sisisssrisisiisnnisisiinisrnisnicnsan annarai aaia 122 Device Configuration Guide 4 Task List Configuring telephones Digital telephones 20000005 123 Toassign a ine lo a Tee cascnna seer ease 125 Toad ihe as I N ai cd iced cicee iti ta laws sheaaceasabidanusalidaa an sataeeeledat ee tee 128 To configure capabilities and preferenCes sccceeceessecceeteeeeeeeeeeeessaneeeeeesseneeeneees 130 To conligure telephone capabilities ces dasickccvessncanscessnanas desta tneatcegaacaeaen aaneeleniamaceentiamees 131 To configure preferences for a telephNOMe ccccesscccceeeeseeeeeeeeeseneeeeseeeeeeentesseneeeeeees 134 To program telephone DURONS wes seciicccasiacestesssandabecedeaselecedaixenteesioacabessioomealesesmaateeeincuels 136 To program Usor speed Cale isasnneni a a 137 To program outgoing call WS ICING ssissirsiisiirisisnsirisisissnninni 138 To onea GOS a aa 138 To sailine sel ros Mocion aisneis eee 138 Configuring telephones IP telephones 000eeeeeeeeee 139 Global VolP features 235 5 ctecsucteecetecsgeedctecsceasseecdud 143 To use the Services button to access fea tureS ccccceeeteeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeteneeeteaeeens 145
132. abel 900 Act Code 904 CC In Out 905 CC Super 4 906 CC SupHelp 5 907 CC ActCode 7 6 908 CC Bsy Rdy 7 909 CC SS Stat 8 980 ExpressMsg 9 981 Voice mail 982 VMail oper v Table 41 describes the headings on the table Table 41 IP Terminal Features Key Labels Attribute Value Description No lt read only gt System number identifies a label Feature Code lt feature code gt Assignable feature code Key Label lt text label gt Each code has a default label To change a label click the field then enter a maximum of eight characters including spaces To define a key label 1 Select the number of the feature you want to label 2 Enter the feature code to program for that key 3 Enter the text to appear on the label Some features such as Page and System Wide Call Appearances SWCA have several variations of feature invocation that you can customize for users NN40020 300 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 147 Paging can be F60 F61x F62 and F63x SWCA has 16 codes 521 to 536 Table 42 shows examples of labels to which page codes and SWCA codes can be changed Table 42 Relabeling examples Feature code New label Feature code New label 60 Gen Page 521 SW Call 1 610 Pg Every 522 SW Call 2 61 Zone lt digit from 1 9 gt 523 SW Call 3 62 Speak Pg 524 SW Call 4 630 Speak All 525 SW Call 5 Note Line names are defined when yo
133. active call before entering Call Log The external line is in use Device Configuration Guide 248 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Table 65 Call log prompts Sheet 2 of 2 Display prompt Jan4 300a SH HEXT ERASE MORE Linea l 227 HEST ERASE MORE LineB l Logit HEST ERASE MORE Line l HEST ERASE MORE Messages amp Calls MSG CALLS Hew calls begin Ho info to log Ho lod assigned Ho resume item Description of error or action The repeat call counter shown with time and date indicates the number of calls you have received from the same caller This call was answered at another telephone 227 This call was logged manually This call was not answered There are one or more items in your message waiting list and there are one or more new items in your Call Log Press FEATURE 806 to change the first line of the display to the current time and date You have viewed your last old log item now you can view your new log items No information is available for the call No log space has been assigned to the telephone The resume item has been removed because of Autobumping repeat call update or log reallocation while you are looking at the Call Log NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 249 Report and record alarm codes An alarm telephone display shows a BCM system alarm code when an alarm condition occurs The installer assigns alarms to digital telephones with two l
134. age 252 Analog interfaces Analog interfaces are not supported in the following market profiles Denmark France Germany Holland Italy Norway Spain Sweden and Switzerland The symbols in Table 66 are defined as follows v indicates full support The interface is available and is localized in the market profile indicates that functionality and support is limited The interface is available in the market profile but is not localized Device Configuration Guide 252 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 66 Analog interface availability by market profile GATM4 G4x16 ASM CTM4 GATM4 GATM8 G8x16 Market profile ASMB8 ASM8 GASM8 GASI CTM8 GATM8 new 4X16 new GATI ADID Australia v v v v v Bahrain y v v Brazil v y v v CALA cad Canada v v v y v v v y v viv Caribbean v v y v y v v v v Global a a am Hong Kong pa v y v v Ireland y v v Mexico v y v v New Zealand North America y v y v y v y v y v y Poland v v v v v PRC v y v Taiwan v v v y v United Kingdom y v v v v Digital interfaces Table 67 lists the digital interfaces supported in each market profile Note that the Digital Station Interface and the BRI cNIC are onboard interfaces Table 67 Digital interface availability by market profile Sheet 1 of 2 Digital
135. ailbox to play your messages and to access mailbox options 982 Voice mail operator Allows the user to set the parameters for the voice mail operator settings 984 Call forward to voice mail Forwards all calls to your voice mail 985 Display voice mail DN Displays the voice mail skillset or IVR DN 986 Transfer to mailbox Transfers an external call directly to a mailbox on the CallPilot system 987 Voice mail interrupt Intercepts a caller who is listening to your mailbox greeting or leaving a message 988 Voice mail direct Dial an internal user via the name in the voice mail directory 989 Record call Record the call to your voice mail box Must be enabled by the system administrator 900 IP services list IP telephones only Allows the user to access a feature menu This is the same menu that is accessed by pressing the Services key 999 IP Hot desking IP telephones only Allows the user to access the Hot desking feature This feature allows calls to be diverted from one IP telephone to another NN40020 300 41 Chapter 6 DN records parameters The DN record defines the specific function of each telephone within the system The following paths indicate where to access DN record parameters in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs e Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets Other areas of programming that affect ho
136. ameters iisrissrisirssssesritiansiitiniaiassdss 41 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNS 69 Wy telephone TAIN 3c aunt as eesadnnca hesadataes aia nn iaa 69 Toshange tlephons DNS eceania naa wa MeRtOA REARS 70 Telephony system and device programming 000eeeeeees 71 Global telephony settings 00 ee cece eee eee eee eens 73 Configuring system speed dial numbers 20000eeeeeeee 87 DMG Feature List 3 5 ciccsckcccnccevicsndctesderctadereaeunciace 91 To arrange the DMC Feature list using Element Manager cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 92 Setting up central answering positions 00s eee eens 93 Teh CAP SAN AS cade acd smashed tare iad deca ccedce shade cave aedea eats ccenderesdiade tactimecmnecee 95 Toprogiam module EI sso ates ace Ses cA ncn dews vac cinatts eccen wdensatw EN A ENTANS 95 Creating ring GOPS s ccc out ber ceneees dees segeses Ses skeceeue Se 97 Configuring Hunt Groups 0 0 eee eee eee 101 Monitoring Hunt GroupS 000 e eee eee 109 Wee ee ASEM MONIO minaaa ee ee 109 Configuring Hospitality services 2 00 e eee eee 111 PO Sel Up hospitaliiy Set Wile ai vcersisreincstesi cinevisi iad etaiecend ee cies ad eee aNeaeE 114 To SeluUp ee Migs Ui o eepereernere renee errr tr tren rrr ete reer errr err er eer rere 115 FO Set Up wako UP So WSS as cessserteteceniidnecianieninil E 115 To assign a room to a telephone acc siccassccasticdvacea vepasa
137. and a message appears on the display Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the telephone set lock to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Intrusion controls If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian call attendant on a centralized voice mail system the attendant can use the break in feature to interrupt a call regardless of any other settings on your line The exception is if you have a higher intrusion priority than the attendant If this is the situation the attendant is forced to camp the call at your telephone or redirect the call elsewhere in the system Device Configuration Guide 204 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Setting intrusion controls This feature is set on a per telephone basis To set intrusion controls Determine the intrusion level of the attendant telephone 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to change the intrusion level Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select a level from the Intrusion protection level drop down list Holding calls After you answer a call you can transfer the call look up some information or answer another call Use the Hold feature to place a call on hold Refer to
138. another telephone or a voice mail service Fwd All Enter the number of the device where all calls to this telephone are forwarded Next step Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 128 Job aid Notes about assigning lines to telephones Read these notes for more information about assigning lines to telephones Nortel recommends a maximum of four line buttons per telephone You can program more than four line buttons on a telephone by programming less than four on other sets For example you might program 20 line buttons on a receptionist telephone equipped as a CAP station and only two lines on all other telephones You can program a maximum of 93 telephones with a line appearance for a specific line including VoIP and target lines Above this maximum you can configure more than one appearance per telephone of a target line Do not assign auto answer loop start trunks auto answer T1 E amp M trunks and T1 DID trunks to telephones These trunks are used to monitor incoming call usage or to place outgoing calls auto answer loop start and T1 E amp M trunks A line that is configured as private cannot be assigned to another telephone Device Configuration Guide 126 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones e Each line assigned to a telephone must appear to a button with an indicator The maximum number of available buttons is 8 for the 7208 digital telephones 10 for the model 7310 10 for 7316 digital tel
139. answerback lt check box gt Defines whether you can answer automatically a voice call without lifting the receiver or pressing the Handsfree button Note The feature is not available on model i2001 7000 and 7100 telephones Speaker volume Note that the speaker volume on the telephone returns to the default volume setting determined by the telephone for each new handsfree call DND on Busy lt check box gt Defines whether an incoming call rings if you are already on another call Paging lt check box gt Defines whether you can make paging announcements from this telephone Auto hold for incoming page lt check box gt Not selected If the telephone is active when a page comes in the page does not come through the telephone set Selected If the telephone is active when a page comes in the call is placed automatically on hold and the page continues Note 7XXX digital phones e Condition When this setting is enabled an active call is on mute when the page comes in e Results after page The call is taken off hold but is no longer muted Priority call lt check box gt Defines whether this telephone can interrupt calls or override Do Not Disturb at another telephone Device Configuration Guide 54 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 14 Capabilities panel fields Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Values Description Auto hold lt check box gt Thi
140. anual parking a To auto associate SWCA key to call select the Automatically life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating clear the check box c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold select the check box d To include I C calls when invoked by Hold clear the check box Configuration four If you want all calls to require the user to press a SWCA button or enter a SWCA code a To auto associate SWCA key to call select either Manually while parked or Manually life of call b To include I C calls when auto associating is not applicable in this configuration c To invoke SWCA parking by Hold clear the check box d To include I C calls when invoked by Hold is not applicable in this configuration 3 Configure the SWCA keys to indicator memory buttons on the telephones Refer to Programming memory buttons on page 226 for details about programming memory buttons at the telephone 4 Label the buttons NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 213 5 Let the users know how the SWCA buttons work and which SWCA codes are available to them Note A user can park a call on any SWCA code however only SWCA codes assigned to a telephone can be used to retrieve SWCA calls Using the SWCA Refer to the System wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card Call information You can view or track call information using these features e Malicious Caller ID MCID e Call log
141. arrange the DMC Feature list using Element Manager 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt DMC Feature List The Digital Mobility Controller Feature List panel appears 2 Inthe Position 1 field select the feature from the list Note The feature currently in that position swaps positions with the selected feature 3 Select the order of the features in Positions 2 through 5 Note If you do not want to program all five features None is also an option NN40020 300 93 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions A CAP Central Answering Position station acts as a central answering and monitoring point for a group or a business The following paths indicate where to set up a CAP in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt CAP Assignment e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt CAP KIM assgn Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Configuring CAP assignments eCAPs on page 94 Programming CAP KIM buttons on page 95 See also Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about user management Managing lines on a KIM on page 96 DN records parameters on page 41 Moving line buttons on page 193 Hunt Group members and lines on page 105
142. arts Desktop Assistant application User selects telephone set model from List of Phones Install Desktop Assistant Pro client application on User workstation Install LAN CTE client on User workstation if button programming required User starts Desktop Assistant PRO application Log on to the BCM is implicit through LAN CTE client If the PC is unable to connect to the BCM through LAN CTE then the application opens in offline mode not connected Install Desktop Assistant Pro AE client application on User workstation Install LAN CTE client on User workstation User starts Desktop Assistant Pro AE Client application User logs on to a BCM using BCM administrator account User selects phone device DN from a menu If you cannot connect the PC to the BCM through LAN CTE then the application opens in offline mode not connected Access to locally connected telephone sets on user s desk No Not needed This application is not programming buttons it is only providing a printout of labels that can be applied to the sets Yes Access to all sets associated with DNs associated with your workstation through LAN CTE No This is an administrator tool not an end user tool connected to BCM button programming for own sets only Operates in offline mode Yes Yes label creation only Yes label creation only not connected to BCM Operates in online mode No Yes label
143. as been offered to a member telephone but is not answered when the queue times out the call is rerouted to the overflow DN Default 60 Device Configuration Guide 104 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups Table 33 Hunt Group settings Sheet 3 of 3 Field Values Description Overflow lt any system DN gt including This setting determines where unanswered calls are routed after a Hunt Group DN the Queue timeout occurs If a call overflows back to the same Hunt Group the call goes to the bottom of the queue and is treated as a new call Answer DNs A linear hunt group that has defined an overflow telephone does not support having the overflow telephone assigned as an Answer DN to any hunt group member If this occurs the Answer DN does ring at the hunt group telephone when an overflow condition occurs Answer DNs are set up under the Line Access heading for each DN Refer to Answer DNs on page 200 Answer key must be set to Extended for overflow to work correctly Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 78 Default Hunt Group DN Aux Ringer lt check box gt If selected defines whether an auxiliary ringer if installed rings for incoming calls to a hunt group If cleared the control of the auxiliary ringer falls back to the control defined on a per telephone or per line basis Default cleared Distinct Ring None Select a ring pattern for the hunt group Pattern 2 3 or 4
144. asic Receiver volume Use sys volume Specify if the volume level of a receiver or headset returns to the Use set volume system default level when a call ends or is put on hold or if it remains at the volume level set at the individual telephone Default Use sys volume Directed pickup lt check box gt If selected allows anyone to answer any calls by specifying the internal number DN where the call is ringing Directed pickup is useful when not all the telephones have the same lines but you want to allow co workers to answer a call on any external line Note Do not confuse Directed pickup with the Group pickup feature Group pickup allows you to answer a call at any telephone within a specific group without specifying the internal number DN of the ringing telephone Default Selected Set relocation lt check box gt If selected Set relocation after you perform the telephone installation and programming for more flexibility in testing equipment You can move any digital telephone to a new location without losing the directory number autodial settings personal speed dial codes and any programming for that telephone If not selected Set relocation while moving a telephone the internal number and programming data remain with the physical port on BCM When you connect the telephone somewhere else it does not receive the original programming A telephone that is plugged into the original jack downloads the programming
145. at are available for programming as part of the ring group This does not include VoIP trunks and PRI lines For both these types of lines you would use target lines When you select a line on the top panel the Lines Settings details panel appears in the bottom Use this table to specify schedule settings for each line Device Configuration Guide 100 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups Figure 34 Ring Group lines Ring Groups Group Membership Line Settings Details for Line 181 Lines Line Line Settings Schedule Ring Group Aux Ringer Night 001 Fj Evening 001 g Lunct 001 go Sched 4 001 g Sched 5 001 go Sched 6 001 o Table 32 describes the headings on both these panels Table 32 Ringing group schedule line values Attribute Value Description Lines Settings tab Line XXX This list includes all analog and digital lines plus the target lines PRI and VolP lines Program only those that are active on the system Line Settings panel Schedule lt read only gt You only need to configure the schedules that you use for your system Ring Group Ring Group lt XXX gt Type in a ring group number 001 100 Only one ring group can be assigned to a line for each schedule To combine groups of ringing sets you must create a new Ring Group that contains all the sets you want to ring and assign it to the line Aux Ringer lt check b
146. ate between the first two and last two soft keys multifield LCD display screen up to two extension microphones to provide microphone coverage in large rooms volume control buttons for adjusting ringer and speaker volume two specialized fixed keys Services Messages three call processing fixed keys Line Hold Release automatic network configuration NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 169 Figure 56 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting Microphone hidden Status indicator LEDs Speaker LCD display screen pP s Navigation keys Services key Messages key NORTEL Hold key Microphone Microphone Soft keys self labeled Volume control keys Line key Mute key Release key Dialpad Table 55 IP audio conference phone 2033 default button formatting Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the ringer and speaker Press the Mute button on the main unit or any extension speaker to mute the ringer and speaker Press the Mute key on the extension microphone to toggles the mute state of the entire telephone not just that microphone 00 Press the Line DN key to access the single line and activate on hook dialing No status icon or LED is provided Press the Release key to terminate an active call Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Press the
147. attributes 277 Table 81 Localization DIP switch settings specifications and transmission parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Transmission Nominal DIP Terminal Network PCM Market switch Input Input coding profile Localized setting impedance Impedance scheme Mexico No North American North 600 Q 600 Q A law based A law America New Zealand No UK based telephony UK 370 Q 620 300 Q A law with Australian tones Q1310 nF 1000 QII 220 nF North America Yes North 600 Q 600 Q mu law America Poland Yes Poland 600 Q 600 Q A law United Yes UK 370 Q 300 Q A law Kingdom 620 QII 1000 QII 310 nF 220 nF Table 82 Loop interface and call supervision parameters Loop interface Call supervision Loop Current Loop Min Min Min max Min Ringing Ringing Detect current seize answer recall clear frequency amplitude Threshold limit duration duration duration duration Market profile Hz Vrms mA mA ms ms ms ms Australia 25 65 18 32 200 50 30 150 1500 Bahrain 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 Canada 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 Caribbean 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 Global 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 Hong Kong 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 Ireland 25 65 18 32 200 50 15 150 1500 Mexico 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 1100 1400 New Zealand 25 65 18 32 200 50 15 150 1500 North America 20 65 18 32 150 25 250 110
148. ature In Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings select the check box to enable the feature for the entire system Pickup Group This feature allows the user to answer calls on another telephone in the same pickup group To add a telephone to a pickup group 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to enable or disable Pickup Group Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom frame click the Capabilities tab In the Pickup group field enter a group number Using the feature Enter FEATURE 75 The external call that has been ringing the longest is answered first Trunk Answer This feature is only active when a ringing service schedule is running It allows a user to answer a ringing call in any area in the system from any telephone in the system The line being answered does not have to appear or ring at the telephone being used to answer the call Press FEATURE 800 To allow trunk answer 1 Assign the telephone to a ringing group 2 Create a ringing group schedule if necessary When the schedule is active this feature is active To block user access You can block the user from using the feature keys by setting the telephone set lock to Full 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to restrict
149. be assigned to U ting tabl the telephone where the code is entered lS If you choose prime line a prime line must be assigned to the telephone where the code is entered Refer to Line Access tab on page 43 Display Digits Name Digits the speed dial number displays Name the first 16 characters of the name defined for the speed dial displays Name lt alphanumeric gt Enter a descriptive name for the owner or business code dials Note For alpha tagging this is the name that the system displays if there is a number match with an incoming call Bypass restrictions lt check box gt Disabled the dialed number uses the line and set restrictions Enabled the dialed number bypasses any line and set restrictions Notes about the System Speed Dial list The following provides general notes about using the System Speed Dial panel Choose the size of the speed dial list e The default list consists of 70 speed dial codes from 01 to 70 e If you set Number of speed dials to 255 the codes are 001 to 255 If you want to use alpha tagging see Using alpha tagging for name display incoming in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 you can increase the number of codes to allow for more matching possibilities for incoming calls Note If the number of speed dial numbers is increased from 70 to 255 the system speed dial codes are three digits For example speed dial numbers 01 40 become 001 040 The user sp
150. begins Also refer to Paging on page 219 Note This tone is not heard over external page ports Default Selected Conference Tone lt check box gt Select the check box to enable a conference tone that is heard by participants at the beginning of the conference Only available in certain profiles UK Germany and Italy Device Configuration Guide 76 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings Table 23 Feature settings Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Value Description Message reply enhancement lt check box gt Select the check box to enable users to automatically deactivate the message waiting indicator on analog telephones connected to an analog station media bay module ASM if the reply call from the analog telephone to the direct dial telephone is answered Any telephone can answer the call This feature also functions if the user invokes the Call pickup feature to answer the reply call from the analog telephone However it does not work with the Retrieve parked call feature Default Cleared Note ASM analog station modules are not supported in all countries Tips Only direct dial telephones can send messages using F1 to analog telephones connected to an ASM GASM The direct dial set must be the designated direct dial telephone for the analog telephone receiving a message Force auto spd dial over ic conf lt check box gt Determine if autodial and speed dial codes
151. butes 281 Table 85 ATA2 DR6 Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Call Supervision and Dial Pulse parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Call Supervision Dial Pulse Market Loop Support Transmission Interface Duration ms Duration ms Dial Ringing Min Pulse Min Min Terminal Input Frequency Max Min Coding Max Max Market profile Localized Impedance Hz Recall Clear Scheme Break Make Taiwan No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based mu Law United Kingdom Yes 300 Q 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 1000 QII 220 nF Device Configuration Guide 282 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 86 ATA2 DR7 Market Support Transmission and Loop Interface parameters Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Loop Current Loop Terminal PCM Ringing Ringing Detect Current Market Input Coding Frequency Amplitude Threshold Limit profile Localized Impedance Scheme __ Hz Vrms mA mA Brazil Yes 900 Q A Law 25 75 18 85 CALA Yes 900 W A Law 25 75 18 85 Denmark Yes 300 Q A Law 25 75 12 85 1000 QII 220 nF France Yes 210 Q A Law 25 75 6 65 1020 QII 140 nF Germany Yes 220 Q A Law 25 75 6 55 820 QII 110 nF Holland Yes 300 Q A Law 25 75 12 55 1000 QII 220 nF Italy Yes 180Q A Law 25 75 6 23 620 QI 62 nF Norway Yes 120 Q A Law 25 75 12 85 840 QII 110 nF Polan
152. button positions depends on the model of telephone that you are programming e New button programming overwrites memory button programming performed at the telephone Conversely changes to memory button programming performed at the telephone overwrites memory keys programmed under Button programming or CAP KIM button programming The panels reflect changes made at the telephone e The 7316 telephone has disjointed button numbering it is because patterned after the legacy 7310 but has fewer buttons than the 7310 However Button programming shows the 7310 button array Refer to the default button programming section to ensure that you program the correct button numbers Button labeling T series telephones have a paper strip of labels that can be customized and printed using the Desktop Assistant Desktop Assistant Pro or the Desktop Assistant Administrator Pro AE application see Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio on page 183 The AE version is located under the administrator applications heading on the Element Manager web page NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 137 The Desktop Assistant and Desktop Assistant Pro are located under the User Applications heading on the Element Manager web page Desktop Assistant Pro requires a LAN CTE keycode before it can be used See the Keycode Installation Guide NN40010 301 for more information on keycodes IP telephones also have so
153. buttons Sheet 3 of 3 Button Description p Copy Press the Copy Key to copy entries to your Personal Directory from other lists such as the Caller List Redial List and Corporate Directory b Services Press the Services key to access the scrollable Feature Display menu FEATURE 900 including the hot desking feature programmable memory button b Services b Services Press the Services key twice to access the Local Tools menu and use the navigation keys to access the following items 1 Preferences 2 Local Diagnostics 3 Network Configuration 4 Lock Menu Note This menu offers access to the same options that are accessible through the start up menu Your system administrator can establish a password for the Tools menu If you attempt to access the Tools menu and a dialog box appears prompting you for a password contact your system administrator i Quit Press the Quit Stop key to close an active menu or dialog box Pressing the Quit Stop key does not affect the status of active calls i Shift Outbox Press the Express messaging key FEATURE 980 programmable memory button to send voice mail messages For more information about voice mail messaging refer to your CallPilot Quick Reference Card i Msg Inbox Press the Mailbox in key programmable memory button to open your CallPilot mailbox For more information about mailbox options
154. caller you want to disconnect then press RLS b Press the line or intercom button of the remaining caller to resume your conversation e Independently hold two calls Press the line or intercom button of the first caller then press HOLD The second caller is put on hold automatically Re establish the call Press the line or intercom button to retrieve one call from hold press FEATURE 3 then retrieve the second call from hold e Release privacy to create a conference call Device Configuration Guide 224 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls With a line programmed with privacy you can turn privacy off to allow another person with the same line to join in your conversation to form a conference All the rules for a conference apply however there is one line in use instead of the normal two This means that you cannot split a conference using Privacy a Press FEATURE 83 b Tell the other person to press the line button and join your conversation Note Only two BCM telephones and the external caller can take part in this kind of conference Send Hookswitch or DTMF during a conference call Either system telephone engaged in a three way conference call over a Network CLID or DS trunk can issue a hookswitch or DTMF dialing request without leaving the conference Allowing the feature Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Force auto spd dial over ic conf e If you
155. can also reassign Hunt group designators to the KIM module by using the same feature You can also force lines onto the KIM by assigning more lines than the telephone buttons can support Extra lines automatically flow over to the module however they flow sequentially starting on the top left at button 01 Also they overwrite any existing programming on the KIM except existing line or hunt group KIM assignments Any of the buttons without assigned lines can be programmed to dial internal or external numbers automatically or to access a feature Refer to Programming CAP KIM buttons on page 95 NN40020 300 97 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups Assigning telephones to ringing groups provides a way to ensure that all calls can be answered regardless of the time of day or day of the week The most common use of this feature is when a security desk telephone rings for incoming lines after 5 00 p m a practice often called night service The following paths indicate where to configure ring groups in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Ring Groups Telset interface CONFIG gt Services gt Ringing service gt Ringing Groups Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Configure Tasks or Features Ring Groups Members on page 98 Configuring scheduled service on pa
156. can be transmitted during an active call This feature works during either a one to one call or during a conference call Note This feature cannot be used for an ad hoc multiparty conference If selected When the user presses a programmed autodial or speed dial key the system dials out the number while maintaining the current call If cleared When the user presses a memory key for a speed dial the current call is automatically placed on Hold and the second call is dialed Default Cleared On hold Silence Select what a caller hears on an external line when the line is put on Tones hold Music Silence provides no audio feedback Tones provides a periodic tone Music provides any signal from a source such as a radio connected to BCM or streaming audio See Selecting the music source on page 294 Default Tones Held line reminder Immediate Reminds you that an external call at your telephone is still on Hold After 30 seconds After 60 seconds After 90 seconds After 120 seconds After 150 seconds After 180 seconds Off You periodically hear two tones from your telephone until you take the call off Hold Default Off Note These tones can be heard by the caller Delayed ring transfer Off After 1 ring After 2 rings After 3 rings After 4 rings After 6 rings After 10 rings Defines whether unanswered external calls are forwarded automatically to a prime telephone after this timer expires You mu
157. cck ccna acinar sect panee sree nschibded sateen toed nedanduns dade auelamateanlnadar adel 200 To program a telephone for DND on BUSY siscmssccsccsasscceasmastceraotestecnsweszeconeneeteceeemers 202 To program privacy ona ine sroin nn NAE ENA ESA 202 To automatically enable privacy on a lin csssrwssirsisiiissssisisssisirinsscsrerioninsasinnia 203 Gok yey May igh te ag see 12 ce lt aero emer reer eerie rece reer Pere ienna EE SNARERE 204 TGS program iul authold on MG ys centre sscocsomrscccecuressccenenus secceemensccrmetarecoceenrenvacenmnnye 205 To program auto hold on a telephone coin ccceccces sec cecteesacee nner secd cuessaccdenaeaseoeeuabnsaccenemess 205 To program Exclusive Hold sessionis ein i ain 205 To use the transler Teati O cs 2s sates nace arth sdecea etn eachiedutina cca aeetbadun twos nsieea tate acid ulentacea tents 206 Totransier unanswered CAG occcsccaistcressarscatenuresidcenomeneckenwrerssctqumistaceawesvaceaumertactemreny 206 To redirect lines from the Sy NNT sites css steak sacdennsanstestetansh eda theaaced ceturentereameieaeenaute 207 TG AWW PRACT sosirii aeaiia a AENDRE ANE VERETA O R E 207 Toco Ee redec ONE sena OA EE EE E E 207 NN40020 300 Task List 5 To redirect lines at the telephone cased caiccase cs ssaccasceb nase ldceiadeeactecaoieaadesioaneniese amnesia 208 Te program call forward on the System ses seassecssinsssssisersestessstonasevesvasessaessemaieerieonusiverin 208 Te use Call Forward at the tele
158. ciated with the code Press HOLD or the assigned SWCA key to park the call If no code is available the call remains active on your line only Put the call on hold until a SWCA key becomes available Ifthe call was already associated with a SWCA code for the duration of the call the call is reparked on that code No programmed SWCA keys It is not necessary to have SWCA keys programmed on your telephone to unpark a SWCA call You can also retrieve a call parked on a SWCA key by entering the SWCA code FEATURE 521 to FEATURE 536 that was used to park the call However this requires the person who parked the call to use other features to indicate where the call is parked such as Page FEATURE 60 Voice call FEATURE 66 or Messaging FEATURE 1 NN40020 300 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 289 Incoming call assigns to a SWCA key In this example the call comes in on line 1 and automatically transfers to SWCA1 the first free SWCA key The solid indicator beside SWCA1 and beside the line key indicates that the call is active on this telephone and it has not yet been parked On all other telephones in the group the indicator would be solid only beside SWCA1 The line keys for the other telephones would be free to receive additional calls If you press SWCA1 again to park the call the line indicator disappears and the indicator beside SWCA1 starts blinking on all telephones in
159. compliant Audio Gateway Headset Profile Bluetooth Power Class 2 For information on configuring Bluetooth refer to the P Phone 1140E User Guide NN 10300 064 3 Bluetooth To enable Bluetooth on an IP Phone 1140E Double press the Services key Use the navigation keys to scroll to Network Configuration Press the Send Enter key to select the Network Configuration menu Scroll to the Enable Bluetooth field using the navigation keys Press the Send Enter key to modify the Enable Bluetooth field Scroll through the options to Auto N Oo oO FPF WD Press Send Enter to confirm selection Device Configuration Guide 174 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Figure 59 IP Phone 1140E User defined feature keys Feature Status Lamp Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator Handset High resolution Speaker graphical display screen Soft keys Copy key Services key Quit Stop key Message Inbox key Shift Outbox key Directory key k Volume control Goodbye key Expand to PC key Mute key Headset key Handsfree keyi Hold key Navigation keys Dialpad Note If supported by your server the Feature Status Lamp provides a user defined alert Contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is available for you Table 57 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons Sheet 1 of 3 Button Description Soft keys are located below th
160. configure DNs e product features and how to assign them Audience The Device Configuration Guide is directed to installers who install configure and maintain BCM systems To use this guide you must e be an authorized BCM installer or administrator within your organization e know basic Nortel BCM terminology e be knowledgeable about telephony and IP networking technology Device Configuration Guide 16 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Acronyms The following is a list of acronyms used in this guide Table 1 Acronyms Acronym Description ASM Analog station module ATA analog terminal adapter BRI Basic Rate Interface BCM Business Communications Manager CAP Central Answering Position CC Contact Center CLID Calling Line Identification CoS Class of Service DPNSS Digital Private Network Signaling System ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network KIM Key Indicator Module MCDN Meridian Customer Defined Networking MCID malicious call identification MWI message wait indicator OLI outgoing line identification ONN outgoing name and number PVQM proactive voice quality monitoring SM silent monitor SWCA system wide call appearance Organization This guide is organized for easy access to information that explains the concepts operations and procedures associated with the BCM system About BCM The BCM system provides private network a
161. ction to the British Telecom network DPNSS You can use a digital private network signaling system to tie together phone systems from various manufacturers over E1 lines offering significant enhancements to BCM networking capabilities DPNSS makes it easy to support centralized network functionality within private networks for operators and attendants dealing with large numbers of calls The routing capabilities provide more larger network capabilities without the expense of installing a new system reconfiguring all the nodes or incurring extensive downtime Most functionality over DPNSS lines is transparent after you program the DPNSS into the system DPNSS uses a local node acting as a terminating node to communicate with other PBXs over the network using E1 lines For example you can link corporate offices separated geographically over DPNSS lines to other BCM systems bypassing the restrictions of the PSTNs to which they are connected BCM systems can function like a private network using DPNSS R2MFC Provides MFC R2 Multi Frequency Compelled R2 signaling over an E1 trunk Analog trunk types Loop start Standard PSTN telephone line ADID An analog trunk that allows an outside caller to dial directly into a line on the BCM system This type of trunk provides one way incoming only call service Device Configuration Guide 286 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes NN40020 300 C
162. d External lt external phone Enter the number the telephone automatically dials when the Number number gt user speed dial code is entered Remember to include the access codes for the route you choose Device Configuration Guide 64 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 18 User Speed Dial panel fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Facility Use prime line Select the route you want the dialed number to take out of your Use routing table system Note Any line numbers or line pool codes that you specify must be assigned to the telephone where the code is entered If you choose prime line a prime line must be assigned to the telephone where the code is entered Refer to Line Assignment tab on page 46 Actions Add 1 o NOONAN On the Capabilities and Preferences tab choose the DN record where you want to add User Speed dials Under the User Speed Dial Numbers table click Add Enter the appropriate speed dial number Click OK On the User Speed Dial click the External Number field beside the number you entered Enter an external number to dial Click the Facility field beside the number you entered Enter how the number must be routed out of the system Delete 1 On the Capabilities and Preferences tab choose the DN record where you want to delete User Speed dial entries On the User Speed Dial Numbers table click the user speed dial code or codes t
163. d Not Not supported 480 10 Hz supported supported supported and 620 10 on Legacy Hz 500 100 GATM4 8 ms On 500 80 ms Off Ireland ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 Hz supported supported 25 450 ms On 450 ms Off 23 Mexico ETSI Not No Supported No Supported Not Not supported 425 Hz 250 supported supported ms On 250 ms Off New Zealand ETSI Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported 500 ms UK supported supported Guarded Clear North America Bellcore Not Yes No No Supported Not Not supported supported supported Poland ETSI Not No Supported in Supported Supported Not Not supported unsupervised in supported supported mode supervised 425 Hz 500 mode ms On 500 ms Off PRC Bellcore Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not A C 450 25 Hz supported supported Sit aa 350 ms On 350 u ff 10 GATI or MSO sees Legacy GATM4 8 Device Configuration Guide 276 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 80 On hook caller ID disconnect supervision and message waiting parameters Sheet 2 of 2 On hook caller ID Disconnect supervision Message waiting DTMF Market Start Digit Line Voltage Stutter profile FSK Stop Digit OSI Busy tone reversal FSK reversal dial tone Taiwan ETSI Supported No Supported No Supported Not Not D C 480 620 Hz supported supported 500 ms On 500 ms Off United ETSI Not Yes No No
164. d Yes 220 Q A Law 50 80 18 40 820 QI 120 nF Spain Yes 220 Q A Law 25 75 6 55 820 QI 120 nF Sweden Yes 200 Q A Law 25 75 12 30 1000 QII 200 nF Switzerland Yes 220 Q A Law 25 75 6 55 820 QII 120 nF NN 40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 283 Table 87 ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision Dial Pulse and DTMF parameters Call Supervision Dial Pulse Duration ms Duration ms DTMF Min DTMF DTMF Detect Pulse Min Min Min Coding Level Market Min Min Min Max Min Coding Max Max Interdigit Scheme A profile Seize Answer Recall Clear Scheme Break Make Pause digits dBm0 Brazil 200 50 250 1100 750 N 40 90 15 55 250 16 25 CALA 200 50 250 1100 750 N 40 90 15 55 250 16 25 Denmark 200 50 80 140 750 N 15 200 15 200 200 16 25 France 140 50 220 320 225 N 60 75 25 40 800 16 25 Germany 150 50 80 120 225 N 50 70 30 50 650 16 25 Holland 200 50 90 130 750 N 30 70 25 80 400 16 25 Italy 150 50 80 140 225 N 50 70 30 50 700 16 25 Norway 200 50 80 150 750 N 30 70 25 80 400 16 40 Poland 200 50 25 150 750 N 40 90 20 60 300 16 25 Spain 150 50 80 140 225 N 60 75 25 40 450 16 25 Sweden 200 50 30 150 125 N 1 30 70 25 80 450 16 28 Switzerland 150 50 80 140 225 N 50 70 30 50 350 16 25 ISDN line services The table ISDN line services on page 283 shows the ISDN private network services that are s
165. d color control e label printing e button programming of end user accessible features requires CTE access to devices e saving a telephone configuration e telephone feature help system e ability to switch between systems without exiting the program Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition main window The main window shows the following e menu bar e toolbar e telephone being programmed labeled e status bar See Figure 63 Device Configuration Guide 188 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Figure 63 Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition E Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition File Labels Phone Help MS Seri Ar aA e a Device i2002 DN 461 Name 461 Menu bar commands The menu bar in the Desktop Assistant Pro AE offers the following options for configuring your telephone set and printing your labels e File menu e Labels menu on page 189 e Phone menu on page 189 File menu The file menu offers the following commands e System Change systems To open the System Selection dialog box click File gt System From this dialog box you can select a different BCM system e Phone Device Select a device to view or program To open the Phone Device Selection dialog box click File gt Phone Device From this dialog box you can select one of the accessible BCM phone devices available NN40020 300 Cha
166. d to locations that require loud ringing bells or horns for example factories or construction sites Enabling or disabling the feature for e lines Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Preferences bottom panel NN40020 300 Chapter 23 Telephony features 195 telephones Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences top panel gt Preferences bottom panel Capabilities tab on page 52 ring groups Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Ring groups gt Line settings gt Aux Ringer Ring Groups Line Settings on page 99 hunt groups Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt Groups gt Aux Ringer Hunt Groups system setup on page 102 Device Configuration Guide 196 Chapter 23 Telephony features NN40020 300 197 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Incoming calls can be answered or handled in a number of ways Refer to the following methods e Answering calls directed to your telephone e Answering calls not directed to your telephone on page 198 e Configuring privacy on page 201 e Holding calls on page 204 e Parking or transferring calls on page 205 e Call information on page 213 Answering calls directed to your telephone If a call comes into a designated line button you press that button to answ
167. d to pick up a call on a private line The line is in use Make the call using normal methods or wait until a line is free Line redirection Press or ADD to begin redirection Press or REMOVE to cancel a previous redirection Message You have one or more messages and one or more new Call Logs Press FEATURE 806 to change the first line of the display to the current time and date The feature you tried to use requires you to be on an active call at your telephone This prompt also appears when information about a call is cleared by a system reset Message You tried to send a message to an invalid internal number or to a telephone that is out of service Message SHOW appears when you have remaining messages Press SHOW to review messages you have sent Press ADD to send a new message Message Enter the internal number of the telephone to which you want to send a message Voice call Your handsfree microphone is on the mute setting Press the button labeled Handsfree Mute or pick up your handset to respond to the voice call Move button Press the button of the line you want to move Press FEATURE or QUIT when you have finished moving lines Move button Press the button of the line to which you want to move the current line Neither of the buttons is erased The lines or the line and feature switch places Silent monitor You entered the silent monitor feature code without lifting the handset and the telephone does not
168. de a central answering position for internal users Set up a direct dial code Central Answering Position overview Prime line The prime line is the DN that the line rings when the system cannot ring the intended DN Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences Also refer to Transfer unanswered calls on page 206 and Call forward unanswered calls on page 208 Direct dial telephone The direct dial telephone is the telephone that system users can dial with one digit the direct dial access code A receptionist telephone is one example of this This telephone is usually the control telephone for system scheduling You can create up to five direct dial telephones However they all respond to the same direct dial access code NN40020 300 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features 233 Programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Capabilities Extra direct dial set Configuration gt Telephony gt Scheduled Services Creating an enhanced CAP station Central answering position CAP station A CAP can consist of a 7316E digital phone plus one to four eKIMs key indicator modules or one to nine OKIMs When the CAP is assigned under CAP KIM assignment in the system the CAP becomes an enhanced CAP eCAP and the modules become know
169. dea ta ase e PER CHORE Ee eae eae eRe 224 LastNumber Rodal acccacc cena sd cae eae meee as om eon kid ad 224 Saved Number Redial acc yarcceehe see bi nee sae ge abeek Sees ogee R EWES 225 PUNO AY or ARSE SAGAR TRESS TREE ROSS SRORTRHES OS We eee 225 SPEEA suas dusewkecuanedndess oueer esau rer weaued Wen ne Rees 225 Programming memory buttons 2 occ0cc0e eis ete ceeds boee tae tee aed edas 226 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special featureS 00 00 cee eee ee 229 Special feature telephones 00 ccc ete 229 Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring 000c eee eee 230 Hospitality services telephones 2 0002 0048 ee ee eee eee 231 NN40020 300 Contents 13 Setting up a central answering position 000 ccc eee eee 231 FINS IDO ea 44 6a Oe SE Coie e POD ee ea awake ek ee ees 232 Direct dial telephone 2c caw aaa ceee pe ewes Moe Kiera wei eens oud 232 Creating an enhanced CAP station 0 000 cece eee 233 PUMO so ical aee ee hase bet HERE PAHS OSH SES RLEERETSERGR SESS 233 FING TOUS 25ccheeeseGeedbhedS eer euhebeasasip haw gest sueeesngs 234 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messageS cee eee eee ee eee 235 Common display POMBE sses cedcrter0cerpesteveenecsbhateererdaoeues 235 viewing aciyo SoiviGOS eer eros tortki t r ee peti aot edehew Sess eee sand 246 GAMOG MON Ea raae aa a aAa 247 Report and record alarm codes 000 eee eee 249 Chapter 28 Market
170. denced Silence Silence by CoreTel Holland 425 11 5 0 5 s on Silence Silence 9 5 s off Hong Kong Silence Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Ireland 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Italy Silence Silence 425 12 Continuous Mexico 440 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel New Zealand 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous North America 400 14 Cadenced Silence Silence by CoreTel Norway 425 11 5 200 ms on Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous 600 ms off 200 ms on 10 s off NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 259 Table 71 Hold Warble Intrusion Sheet 2 of 2 Hold Warble Intrusion Level Level Level per per Tones per Tone Tones Tone Tones Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Poland 425 17 5 Continuous Silence 1400 25 Continuous PRC Silence Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Spain Silence Silence 1400 25 Continuous Sweden Silence Silence 1400 25 Continuous Switzerland Silence Silence 1400 25 Continuous Taiwan 440 14 Continuous Silence Silence United Kingdom 400 11 5 Continuous Silence 1400 11 5 Continuous Table 72 Reorder Sheet 1 of 2 Reorder Level Tones per Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia 425 13 off 375 ms on 23 off 375 ms off Bahrain 400 16 75 ms o
171. dentification fields Attribute Value Description Description lt read only gt This is the system hardware release currently running on this device System name lt alphanumeric gt It is easier to manage a group of systems if each system is provided with a unique name or identification number Version lt read only gt The version of software running on the BCM Main Unit Country or region lt read only gt This setting defines internal system settings for default values available languages and hardware and functional availability for a specific country or region Setting Date and Time How you set the Date and Time feature for your system depends on whether your system receives this information from a network server The following path indicates where to access the date and time settings in Element Manager e Element Manager Configuration gt System gt Date and Time Device Configuration Guide 26 Chapter 3 System Software Click the following link to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel Task Setting clock control to local system on page 28 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Date and Time management Figure 4 Date and time panel Date and Time Date and Time Source Tink v Network Time Protocol Settings NTP server address Synch every s NTP security mode Raise alarm if clock differs by at least
172. dial to 228 25 33 Autodial to 232 Autodial to 229 27 24 Autodial to 239 Autodial to 230 29 26 Autodial to 240 NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 157 Figure 47 7316 digital phone button assignment 1 f C3 j Gia 01 E o2 B os JB o4 B Cos IB yy 17 19 21 06 07 08 e Table 45 7316 digital phone lower button defaults 7316 lower button defaults Btn PBX DID Btn PBX DID 11 Autodial 221 17 Autodial to 224 13 Autodial 222 19 Autodial to 225 15 Autodial 223 21 Autodial to 226 01 DND Target line 06 Conference 02 Transfer 07 Last No Redial 03 Call Forward 08 Intercom 04 Pick Up 09 Intercom 05 Page General 10 Handsfree 7208 digital phone button defaults The default button assignments for the 7208 digital phones differ for the PBX and DID telephony templates Refer to Figure 48 Figure 48 7208 digital phone button mapping TITTY TTY Table 46 7208 digital phone button defaults 7208 default button mapping PBX Btn DID Pick Up 01 Target line Transfer 02 Transfer Last No Redial 03 Last No Redial Page General 04 Page General Conference 05 Conference Intercom 06 Intercom Intercom 07 Intercom Handsfree 08 Handsfree Device Configuration Guide 158 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 7100 digital phone button defaults The
173. disallow direct dial 53 answer DNs 49 Associate SWCA key to call 81 ATA answer timer 58 ATA Dvc 58 ATA tones 58 ATA use 58 ATA answer timer 58 ATA use 58 Auto called ID 52 auto hold 54 auxiliary ringer 56 button features list 36 button programming 60 153 call forward on busy 45 call forward delay timer 45 call forward no answer 45 call log options 56 camp timeout timer 79 Capabilities 50 52 contrast 56 control sets 51 dialing options 56 distinct ring in use 56 DND on busy 53 external autodial button 63 feature 62 first display 52 GASM disconnect supervision 59 handsfree 52 handsfree answerback 53 hotline 56 Include I C calls when auto associating 81 Include I C calls when invoked by Hold 82 intercom keys 51 internal autodial 62 intrusion controls 53 Invoke SWCA parking by Hold 82 keep DN alive 59 language 55 link timer 80 message indicator 58 page timeout timer 79 page zone 53 paging 53 park timeout 79 pickup group 53 prime line 51 priority call allow disallow 53 Private OLI number 45 Public OLI number 44 receive short tones 54 redirect ring 54 relocating 77 restriction scheduling 66 restrictions 65 ring type 56 set lock 65 telephone restrictions 66 transfer callback timeout timer 79 user preferences 55 user programming access 65 user speed dialing 63 telephone restrictions scheduling 66 telephones 249 call log display prompts 247 caller ID for target and analog CLID lines 47 common display prompts 2
174. dset A line indicator appears beside the intercom button NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 131 e When you assign an intercom button during programming the assignment automatically appears on the telephone Assignment starts at the lower right button or one button above if the handsfree feature is available Any feature or line programming that existed previously on that button is overwritten except for Answer DNs that are pushed up one button e A telephone requires two intercom buttons to establish a conference call with two other BCM telephones e You require only one intercom button if the button is used to place and receive internal calls and to access line pools e You require two intercom buttons for a telephone with several lines assigned to Ring only e Model 7000 and 7100 telephones and analog telephones are automatically assigned two intercom buttons This allows users to toggle between two active calls using the Hold button S Caution PRI and VoIP Lines Users cannot access PRI and VoIP lines directly through line appearances PRI and VoIP lines must be part of a line pool If you change a digital trunk module DTM to PRI the system automatically removes all existing line appearances for that module Configuring telephone capabilities Programming reference e Capabilities tab on page 52 e Job aid Line redirection notes on page 133 To configure telepho
175. e of a feature that requires other settings NN40020 300 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 37 e Some features also require that the service be available on the line from your telephone service provider The types of lines provided are also determined by the region chosen for your system MCID malicious call identification is an example of this type of feature Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 1 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt None Indicates a button that is configured for button programming but nothing has been entered 0 Speed dial Activates the speed dial feature The telephone prompts the user for a speed dial code 1 Send message Allows the user to send a message to another DN on the system 1 Cancel send message Allows the user to cancel a message that was sent to another set within the network Ring again Turns on the Ring again feature Conference Transfer Initiates a conference between user and two parties Call forward Allows the user to enter a number to forward all calls Note Allow redirect must be selected to forward calls outside of the system 5 Last number redial Causes set to redial the last number that was dialed 5 Language choice Allows the user to select the language in which prompts are displayed 60 Page general Initiates a page 61 Page Internal Allows the
176. e 7316 digital phone that you program only these buttons The handset can access any system features except for features that require a speaker such as handsfree Table 48 7406 digital phone button defaults 7406 lower button defaults Btn PBX DID Btn PBX DID 01 DND Targetline 07 Last No Redial 02 Transfer 08 Intercom 03 Call Forward 09 Intercom The IP telephone 20XX models have fewer programmable buttons than the 7316 or 7316E however they have access to a feature menu through the Services key FEATURE 900 that expands quick access to call features Additionally IP telephones support the Hot Desking feature which allows the user to transfer telephone settings from one IP telephone to another allowing mobility without relocating the physical telephone IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults The 2004 and the 2050 telephones have six memory buttons beside a display that provides soft labels for the buttons These telephones also have six other buttons that can be programmed as memory buttons without display Device Configuration Guide 160 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Figure 51 2004 2050 default button programming IP Phone 2004 models Table 49 2004 button defaults 2004 default button assignment Bin PBX DID 01 Call Forward Line XXX 02 Conference Transfer 03 Last Redial 04 Page General 05 Intercom 06 Intercom 07 Blank
177. e Routing code or line pool code are programmed for the DPNSS to Embark link e Allow redirect check box must be selected This field is also located under the Capabilities tab Device Configuration Guide 134 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones During telephone programming for Fwd No Answer and Fwd Busy when you enter the Forward to digits the system performs a validation check with the designated switch If the validation does not succeed the system displays one of the messages shown in Table 38 Table 38 Embark validation error messages Message Description The number is invalid or the destination has been rejected There are no free virtual channels available for validation Destination may be out of service no response received The destination telephone has DND programmed or it is ina programming session Either there are not enough channels set up or no more channels are available The system cannot connect to the remote system Configuring Preferences The following paths indicate where to configure preferences in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences Top panel gt Preferences Bottom panel e Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets Programming reference e Preferences tab on page 55 e Job aid Call log notes on page 135 Use th
178. e display area The LCD label Fig above each key changes based on the active feature l i The keys on either side of the display area are user defined feature keys with labels on the LCD display A steady LCD light beside a line DN key indicates that the line is active A flashing LCD light indicates the line is on hold or the 2433 feature is being programmed A steady LCD light beside a feature key indicates that the feature Grecl db is active A flashing LCD light indicates that the feature is being programmed Use the Volume control buttons to adjust the volume of the Laj Volume ringer handset headset speaker and the Handsfree feature Press the top button to increase the volume and press the bottom button to decrease volume LJ Volume NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 175 Table 57 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E buttons Sheet 2 of 3 Button Description Mute Press the Mute key to listen to the receiving party without transmitting Press the Mute key again to return to two way conversation The Mute key applies to handsfree handset and headset microphones The Mute LED indicator located on the Mute key flashes to indicate that the microphone is muted Handsfree Press the Handsfree key to activate handsfree The Handsfree LED indicator located on the Handsfree key lights to indicate whe
179. e display telephone option on the display to proceed Dialpad buttons Buttons you press on the dialpad to select a particular option The following text conventions are used in this guide to indicate the information described Convention Description bold Courier Indicates command names and options and text that you must enter text Example Use the info command Example Enter show ip alerts routes italic text Indicates book titles plain Courier Indicates command syntax and system output for example prompts text and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters FEATURE Indicates that you press the button with the coordinating icon on HOLD whichever set you are using RELEASE Related publications This section provides a list of additional documents referred to in this guide There are two types of publications Technical Documents on page 19 and User Guides on page 20 Technical Documents System Installation Installation and Maintenance Guide N0060612 Keycode Installation Guide N0060625 System Programming Administration Guide N0060598 Device Configuration Guide 20 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Networking Configuration Guide NO060606 Telset Administration Guide NO060610 Telephones and Peripherals Telephony Device Installation Guide NO060609 BST Doorphone Installation and Configuration Guide P1013654 T24 KIM Installation Card P0603
180. e feature code Feature code lt alphanumeric gt Code for the feature Actions Add 1 Click Add 2 Inthe Add Feature dialog box enter a feature name 3 Enter the feature code 4 Click OK to save the new setting Delete ii 2 3 Select one or more feature lines Click Delete Click Yes on the confirmation dialog box Note This only deletes the feature from the list Up 1 Select a feature line 2 Click the Up button until the line moves up to the desired location Down 1 Select a feature line 2 Click the Down button until the line moves down to the desired location NN40020 300 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 145 Assigning the list to a button The services list defaults to the Services button __ However you can assign the display list to one of the other feature buttons The user can also assign the display list as a memory button at a telephone using FEATURE 3 If you move the feature to another memory button the Services button no longer accesses the menu To use the Services button to access features 1 Press the Services button _ _ or the button to which the list is assigned 2 Use the up and down directional buttons on the telephone or the Page and Page display keys to move through the list to find the feature you want 3 Press the Select display key to activate the feature Use the feature as you would on any other telephone For example if you select
181. e music source Table 91 Music parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Definition Streaming Server Note A third party application that supports streaming G 711 is required Server Enter the IP Address of the network device that contains the music source Server RTP port Enter the source port number to use when connecting to the network device that contains the music source Stream Type Select the codec of the audio file provided by the network device Frames per packet Enter the frames per packet to be received from the network device RTP port on BCM Enter destination port number used on the BCM for sending out music to users Note If you choose Audio Jack as the Music Source there is no further configuration required for the Music Source NN40020 300 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 297 Configuring Music Manager BcmAmp is an audio player that resides on the BCM If you choose to use Music Manager you must configure the play list which is the music available to the BcmAmp audio player Configuring the play list involves Opening the Music Manager Administration application Loading music onto the BCM Deleting music from BCM on page 298 Adding music to the Play List on page 299 Removing music from the Play List on page 299 Using the BemAmp Player on page 300 Opening the Music Manager Administration appl
182. e number of frames per packet sent from the IP Music source Default 3 RTP port on BCM Enter the number of the destination port used for the music source This is the port BCM uses to send music to the users Default 2218 NN40020 300 303 Index Symbols gt gt soft key 170 Numerics 2001 feature labels 145 2002 default button programming 161 feature labels 145 2004 default button programming 160 feature labels 145 2050 default button programming 160 7100 Ring Again 237 Transferring a call 240 7316E CAP station 93 configuring aneCAP 95 A activation code features 33 active services view 870 36 agent busy ready 908 33 39 agent login log out 904 33 alarm codes reporting 249 messages 77 telephone reporting alarms 249 telephone identify 77 Alarm time at telephone 875 33 cancel 875 33 Hospitality Services admin set 877 33 allow redirect Embark switch Call Forward 133 allow last number redial 65 allow link 66 allow redirect allow disallow 54 allow saved number redial 65 alpha tagging caller ID set 47 maximum CLI per line 77 alternate language first 502 34 second 503 34 third 504 34 analog lines voice message indicator 47 analog telephones message reply enhancement 76 receiving short tones 54 answer DNs answer key settings 77 appearances 49 autodial feature 129 Contact Center warning 77 Directed Pickup 198 overview 200 pr
183. e telephone Refer to the installation user card that came with the module if necessary On the CAP Assignment table click the line for the CAP you want to configure as an eCAP Select the Set DN field and type the DN for the telephone CAP notes e IfCAPs are not designated as eCAPs the system can support as many CAPs as the system resources can support The modules on these caps are referred to as ordinary KIMs OKIMs and the buttons on the module support only memory button programming e A Station Auxiliary Power Supply SAPS is not required for 7316E digital phones attached to four or fewer KIMs If the KIMs are designated as eKIMs you can only attach a maximum of four modules to a 7316E If the KIMs are designated as OKIMs you can attach up to nine modules to the 7316E You must add a SAPS if more than four KIMs are added to the 7316E Note also that the line loop to the CAP cannot be greater than 304 8 m 1000 feet e IfaKIM module is relocated with the telephone the settings are retained on the module e Replacing CAPs If you replace a legacy eCAP 7324 CAP with a 7316E eKIM the line assignments are copied to the new telephone but not to the eKIM The telephone programming reverts to the default settings for other buttons Also if you move an eKIM from one 7316E to another programming does not follow If you move an OKIM from one 7316E to another the KIM retains memory button programming e Legacy equipment notes A SAPS
184. eaker handset and headset volume Large color touch panel display screen Four call processing fixed keys e Hold e Goodbye e Handsfree e Mute Web based applications support Remote firmware download USB mouse and keyboard support The IP Phone 2007 provides a color touch panel display see Figure 55 that supports color XML and HTML content through an external application server NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 165 Figure 54 IP Phone 2007 Goodbye key Hold key Handset Speaker Dialpad Handsfree LED Handsfree key Headset key Volume control bar Message waiting indicator Incoming call indicator Context sensitive soft keys Mute key Use the Volume control bar to adjust the volume of the ringer handset headset speaker and the Handsfree feature Press the right side of the rocker bar to increase volume press the left side to decrease volume Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active call Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Tap the flashing line DN soft key to return to the caller on hold Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The key rocks for up down left and right movements Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to switch a call from the handset or handsfree to the headset Press the Speaker key
185. earereted sae vedges 99 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 20 ee ee cece eee eee eee 101 Hunt Groups System SETUD sic ice iceeec eects tedei ed EEr E R REEE IERE kA 102 Configuring the Hunt Group general settings 0 00 eee ae 105 Hunt Group members and lines c2cicaceseekadeees eae SEREN eee a eee es 2S 105 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt GroupS 00 e cece eee 109 Monitoring external hunt group calls 0 anaana 109 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 00 eee eee eee 111 Hospitality G rngral 2 c4s20 805 cau edicdeeecgeseeekeiedetienetoeee 111 PU pitas MONS ce oh hoa ee ee eR ee eee RS eke ae 113 Setting up your hospitality systemi ccaccdcckanespe nus se eR EEE be Ree RO 114 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices 000ee00005 117 Configuring an analog telephone 0000 cece ee 120 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 2 00005 123 Usmo TDN Pane oc ck ase ekeieneoe iterar tans se baa ee Sane deere vadeders 124 System DNs Line Access tab wccc cae se kursi bien ironta bied ee oe eae 125 Job aid Notes about assigning lines to telephones 005 125 Ling Assignment and Line Poole ia sec csbesbecehe sce eeu eeeevenreuas 128 Job aid Answer DN NOOS cacae tase eee ke oRbes hee SReE ema h SAREE SKS 129 Configuring Capabilities and Preferences 00 000 eee eee eee 130 Device Configu
186. eatures User Guide NN40020 100 for a quick reference about using the system features Also refer to e System features and feature codes on page 33 quick reference list of codes e Relocating telephones in the Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 Features to set up telephone set features These features are available only on digital and IP telephones You can block the user from using these feature keys by setting the set lock for the telephone to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Contrast adjustment The following path indicates where to access the contrast adjustment e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt top panel Capabilities and Preferences gt bottom panel Preferences e Telset Admin CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets gt User prefernces gt Display cntrst Device Configuration Guide 192 Chapter 23 Telephony features At the telephone 1 Press FEATURE 7 2 Press a number from 1 to 9 depending on your telephone 3 Press HOLD to set your choice Select how you dial your calls Digital telephones provide three methods for dialing calls Standard dial allows you to make a call by selecting a line and dialing the number If you have a prime line it is selected automatically when you lift the handset or press the Handsfree button Automatic dial allo
187. econds if you multiply the number of rings by six Note This setting can affect transferred calls from voice mail and must be configured accordingly Off Also refer to Line Access tab on page 43 Call forward Default After 4 rings Network Callback 15 Determine the timeout value when a transfer attempt stops and then 30 attempt a retry of the transfer 45 Not available in all region profiles 60 90 120 Device Configuration Guide 80 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings Table 25 Timer values Continued Host delay ms 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 or 2000 Assign the delay between the moment an outgoing line is selected to make an external call for example by lifting the receiver and the moment that BCM50 2 0 sends dialed digits or codes on the line This ensures that a dial tone is present before the dialing sequence is sent Minimizing this delay provides faster access to the requested features Default 1000 milliseconds Link time ms 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 or 1000 milliseconds Specify the duration of a signal required to access a feature through a remote system Link time depends on the requirements of the host switching system For example to program external dialing through a Centrex system a Link time of 400 ms is required Note Link is another name for recall or flash Default 600 milliseconds NN40
188. ect to the call e On 7000 and 7100 digital phones use feature code FEATURE 70 to cancel the call Feature button If you are checking a speed dial button enter the two digit speed dial code that you want to check Auto dial Enter the number you want to program selecting the line first if necessary exactly as if you were placing a call Speed dial Enter the telephone number you want to program exactly as if you were dialing it normally When you are finished press HOLD or OK Page Enter the required page zone number 0 6 or press ALL Move button The two buttons you selected have exchanged position You have dialed a number but the least expensive route programmed for the system is busy Unless you release the call the number goes through on a more expensive route Feature button Enter the feature code or press RLS or QUIT to end programming or CLEAR to clear the numbers entered The system accepts the entry when you enter a valid feature code NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 239 Display prompt Feature code QUIT Feature moved Feature name gt SHOW OK Feature timeout Forward HHH CAHCL Forward denied Hidden number Hold or release Inactive feature Incoming only In conference IMFO In observe Monitor Intercom 2 _ QUIT Intercom In usean Invalid code Description of error or action Feature button Press FEATURE and enter the featu
189. ected to and answered at the prime telephone then the call is logged at both the redirecting telephone and the prime telephone If the call is answered by the intended telephone then the call is logged only at that telephone e If the telephone experiences a warm reset all log entries are flushed e Ifa line has been redirected calls are not logged Device Configuration Guide 136 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Telephone memory button programming Use this panel to assign features to available buttons on the telephone Programming reference e Button Programming tab on page 60 e Job aid Notes about button programming on page 136 To program telephone buttons Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the DN of the telephone to program Click the Button Programming tab in the bottom panel A OO N a The model shown in the model field determines the number of available buttons Programming note Assigned lines answer DNs hunt group designators and intercom keys cannot be overridden using this template 5 Select the field beside the button you want to configure or change 6 Select the feature internal or external autodial you want to assign 7 Select from a list of available values to choose from Next step User speed dials on page 137 Job aid Notes about button programming e The number of available
190. ed Call Forward enter the number you to which you want to forward the call Or if you select speed dial FEATURE 0 enter the speed dial code for the number you want the telephone to dial IP telephone feature display labels When your IP telephone acquires a DN record the default settings are applied to the telephone including assigning features to the memory keys on the telephone These features all have predefined labels and the telephone automatically displays the appropriate labels beside the programmed buttons This screen enables you to change the soft display label for features assigned to the memory keys beside the displays for IP telephones Use this screen to define custom labels for 24 features The system comes with sixteen default labels which are feature and language specific depending on the system assigned country or region profile Typically the default labels are messaging and call attendant features You can change any other feature label by adding to this list or by deleting any of the default settings and inserting new codes and labels The labels can be changed in Element Manager at the following location Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt IP Terminal Settings gt Key Labels Device Configuration Guide 146 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features Figure 44 IP telephone Key Labels IP Terminal Features Feature List Key Labels IP Terminal Key Labels No Feature Code Key L
191. ed for the Normal schedule 4 Repeat for each line NN40020 300 139 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones IP telephones have a very similar DN configuration to digital telephones Refer to Configuring telephones Digital telephones on page 123 for detailed procedures There are several models of i series telephones and each telephone has a different number of programmable buttons Refer to the Nortel i series telephone user cards for details Task Setting up IP telephones Determine the programming for individual IP telephones Refer to Configuring an IP telephone on page 141 Register each IP telephone to the system Refer to Registering Nortel 20XX and 11XX IP telephones in the Telephony Device Installation Guide NN40020 309 Prerequisite programming The following programming must be completed prior to performing this configuration e Numbering plan e Lines programming e Telephony system feature programming e IP telephony network setup and prerequisites checklist Note IP sets that do not have integrated switches must be connected to the LAN through an Ethernet switch Device Configuration Guide 140 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones IP telephone DN record overview NN40020 300 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones 141 Configuring an IP telephone On each panel on the DNs list add or modify settings to
192. edirect line initiating redirection 84 39 redirect ring allow disallow 54 redirection loops avoiding 133 regions ISDN line services support 283 modules 251 system defaults 260 regulatory information 2 related publications 19 Release key 169 relocating CAP module 95 KIM 95 relocating telephones 77 reminder held line 76 reply message 65 37 reporting alarm codes 249 restriction schedules telephones 66 restriction service changing at telephone 872 39 Restriction services turning off 872 36 turning on 872 36 restrictions overriding at telephone 68 37 telephone record 65 retrieval code park mode 77 ring again activate 2 35 37 cancel 2 35 hunt groups 234 overview 218 ring groups extra dial set 32 services 98 trunk answer 98 ring only telephone line assignment 46 ring transfer delayed 76 Ring Type changing 6 35 user preferences 56 ring volume 194 Ring Volume 80 35 ringing call 807 35 Directed Pickup 198 signal call at telephone 807 38 trunk answer 199 ringing services auxiliary ringer 100 changing at telephone 871 39 programming 97 ring group 100 ring groups 98 trunk answer 32 turning off 871 36 turning on 871 36 Room condition HS admin set 878 35 room set 876 35 Room occupancy HS admin set 879 35 rotary mode 103 routing services 32 Routing services turning off 873 36 turning on 873 36 routing services turning on 873 39 routing table
193. ee eae 151 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 153 Rules of default button assignment 2 000 eee eee 153 7316E digital phone button detaullS aacccccsacesdoaedea sade rekns cene seas 154 7316 digital phone button Gelaulie cascccesccdcsedere lt seared eetesaas ones 156 7208 digital phone button defaults co eee es See hae ee n kE Ea om ww die es 157 7100 digital phone button defaults 2 0 eee 158 7000 digital phone button defaults 2 eee 158 7406 digital phone button defaults 2 cee eee 159 IP telephone button defaults 00 0 eee 159 IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults 159 IP telephone 2002 button defaulls acc icc ccceesw dened eneawwad eames saa 161 IP telephone 2001 button defaults 0 eee eee 162 IP telephone 2007 button defaults 00 0 cee eee 163 IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults 000000 167 IP Phone 1120E a nd IP Phone 1140E pccsccesavenaeeeenenente nese eees 171 WLAN handset 2210 2211 2212 button defaults 00000055 176 WLAN handset display cccsce cess een ee eee Seed vesto tatii ska reinen 178 NN40020 300 Contents 11 PS UG coe cracker deer phon seetebee er es EATIS 178 mMomalon ida perreti idi a Rede ews Tees eR Ree eal aw eRe sh bee eee eS 179 Feature OFUONS ONCE ios oso Seas ewe en ies Sew coe wae cues oxow 179 DMC P
194. eed dial numbers remain two digits Programming System speed dials System speed dials are programmed under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt System Speed Dial where you specify the internal or external dialed number a name and whether you want the system to ignore dialing restrictions System Speed Dials e Provide a list of codes and numbers to your users Device Configuration Guide 90 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers Working with speed dial list entries To add change or delete System Speed Dial records click the field you want to alter and type in the change required Caution Resource issue Entering a large number of system speed dials at one time can impact system performance Therefore it is best to perform this activity during low user periods whenever possible Next steps Speed dial codes can be programmed onto memory keys by the installer during button programming Refer to Button Programming tab on page 60 Also each user can assign speed dial codes directly to memory buttons on the telephone Refer to the Programming memory buttons on page 226 for instructions on using memory keys For information on using speed dials and for programming speed dial codes at the telephone refer to Speed dialing on page 225 Ensure that you publish a list of system speed dial codes for the users The Programming Records session save selected
195. eee eee hehe Hehe ehe hone ee edeeaeadsn gee EREE 78 Advanced Feature Swings i 2055 cies ceeds y Sack a Shas TER EE EAA 81 System Wide Call Appearances Control 0 0c cece eee eee 81 ONN Blocking North American systems 0000 0c eee eee eee 83 MEM MONO S224 wed eip nas chee biwule bead eed bom baad 84 eee OCS ok caus aneeeeiedid peewee etReeone ketenes esrepenieaaae 85 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers 000ee eee ee eee 87 System Speed Dial Pane sic cawode need eine Saeed enema dente en eenkn aA 87 Choose the size of the speed dial list 0 00 cece eee 89 Working with speed dial list entries 0 0 c cee eee 90 NN40020 300 Contents 9 Chapter 11 DMG Feature LIS snc cicecctescessecencdneeiebees stages siedecende 91 Arranging the DMC Feature list using Element Manager 92 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positionS 000 00e eee eeee 93 Configuring CAP assignments eCAPS 00 e eae 94 Nuh ota coh ane te ict a ane enh aos ee wea ti aden ab owen decade 95 Programming CAPIKIM BURONS 22324560 ceec laced tenia boeteder thneceeees 95 Managing ines ona KIM ccsceccay eave ederd eee eee bees ae ees eee ea nG ets 96 Chapter 13 Creating ring Grops s456 c ccccotenceceadcsgtecesececusenccenk cs 97 Ring Groups Members ssriccsrinsrricdskerakrerat i akii E reran eames 98 Ring Groups Line Seting 2 2 42cckcei ceca peed seenaaes
196. eerie ere reer onerrer een erent eee rrerr 225 Te program speed dials in the DN re COrd cciccsscsssiccseessstssssecesceeseasensesssvassssnesnecssssenans 226 To program user speed dials at the telephone cccceeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneneeeeeeeees 226 To view the feature that is currently assigned to a button 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeee 227 TS configure memory buttons for TSATUNES isisvcisssensceivesarsaunassetnacectsuntsinninsedsuveineaansuners 227 Te alase a momor DURON ssi Gas nae Rein earoneh nome 227 To store more than one number or code on one Dutton eeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 227 Using telephones for special features 00 eee eee eee eee 229 Display prompts and messages 0ce cece ee ee eee eee eee 235 Market profile attributes 0 00 cee eee eee eee eee 251 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 287 Toadd SWCA Keys to your TELE DIONE ccs cots ocsrecocscexcsscesghice nnne 288 To receive a call and assign it to a SWCA key cccceecceeeeneeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeaeeees 288 TO retrieve a call ror A SWCGA KEY ascetic eaciciedsesinecatiinrie lee 290 To conference a call parked on a SWCA Key escccecsccesecceeteneeeeeeeeeteneeetenaeeseaeeessaeees 291 Configuring the music Source 00 cece eee eee eee 293 WS SIS CY he musie SOU Eein eE S 294 To open the Music Manager Administration application eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeerennnen 297 TO load musie onto
197. elease an internal line NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 245 Display prompt Release calls Restricted call Restricted call CAHCL RETR Ring Again VES HO EXIT Select a line Select line out QUIT Select linets 3 QUIT ALL Select linets 3 ALL OF Send message VES HO Set locked SetHamz SetHans HEWCALL TRAHSFF Start of list HEST Still in transfer CAHCL RETR Surervisor Observe Description of error or action You tried to use a feature while you were on a call or had calls on hold Release the call or calls before using the feature Silent monitor You entered the silent monitor feature code on a telephone that already has an active call To continue you must place that call on hold or release it The destination you selected for line redirection is restricted System programming has a restriction configured for the call you are trying to make such as time of day restrictions for some calls Transfer You cannot transfer the call because of telephone or line restrictions Press YES to use Ring Again Press NO to send a message Either you have no prime line or the prime line is in use or the line programmed for an auto dial number speed dial number or Hotline is in use Select a line and dial again Speed dial There is no line related with the speed dial number you are trying to use Select a free external line or line pool and enter the speed d
198. en a room is empty for example 911 Basic filter lt two digit filter gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed for a basic room telephone for example 911 and internal calls only Mid filter lt two digit code gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed for a telephone with mid service for example 911 internal calls and 1 800 numbers only Full filter lt two digit code gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed for a telephone with full service i e no restrictions Wake Up Call Settings Attempts 1 2 3 4 5 Select the number of times the Alarm time feature attempts to alert the occupant before cancelling Default 3 Retry interval 2 4 6 8 Select the interval between each attempt to send the alarm Default 4 minutes Alarm duration sec 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Select the period that a telephone rings for each alarm attempt Default 15 seconds Expired Wake Up Call Settings Notify DN None DN lt telephone DN gt Enter a telephone DN if you want to notify a specific telephone when an alarm expires Use tone lt check box gt Select the check box if you want the user to hear a tone when the alarm expires Hospitality Rooms The Hospitality Rooms panel allows you to assign telephones to a room You can assign a maximum of five telephone DNs to a room Device Configuration Guide 11
199. ephones 16 for the 7316E digital telephone and 24 for the model 7324 digital telephones e In addition to lines buttons have other uses for example intercom or handsfree operation Line programming does not overwrite assigned Intercom Answer DN Handsfree or Hunt group buttons Refer to Figure 39 However intercom buttons overwrite anything Figure 40 Note You need at least two intercom buttons to use the conference feature e Answer DNs also overwrite line programming but not Intercom buttons Answer DN buttons appear above Intercom buttons if an Intercom button is added after Answer DN buttons are assigned the Intercom button pushes the Answer DNs up The top Answer DN overwrites whatever is above it Figure 41 NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 127 Figure 39 7316E digital telephone display button assignment protocol Lines and hunt group appearances assign to first available button from top left Different models of telephones may start at other buttons Line UREE Answer DN l Answer DN Intercom Line A linisresta adl key Answer DNs assign starting above the assigned intercom buttons maximum of 8 Answer DNs overwrite line programming ciate Intercom buttons assign starting from the bottom right maximum of 8 Intercom buttons overwrite line programming a
200. ephony features Programming distinctive ringing You can program a line or a telephone to use a distinctive ring when alerting at a telephone Ring types are ordered in a hierarchy Hence an incoming call on a line with a higher priority ring than that assigned to the telephone uses the line distinctive ring If the telephone has the higher ring priority the call uses the ring defined by the telephone Distinctive ring can also be defined for hunt group calls e Using the system For lines Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt All Lines gt Distinct Ring For DN records Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Top panel Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Bottom panel Preferences tab gt Ring type For hunt groups Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt groups e Using the telset interface Lines gt Trunk Line data gt Distinct ring Terminals and Sets gt User Prefernces gt Ring type System progrming gt Hunt groups gt Dstnct rng e At the telephone for set distinct ring only 1 Press FEATURE 6 Enter the ring type number 1 to 4 3 Press HOLD Note There are only four distinct ring patterns in the system Ring volume Adjust the volume of your telephone any time it rings Press FEATURE 80 until the ring is at the volume you want Auxiliary ringer This optional device can be connected through the RJ21 connection to your system The auxiliary ringer is suite
201. er the call If there are no line buttons on your telephone or the call rings but no line buttons light up choose one of three ways to answer a call at your telephone e lift the receiver e press the Handsfree button and speak through the external speaker Note This feature is not available on all telephones Refer to Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback on page 197 e answer through a headset Note This feature is not available on all telephones Calls can also have special ring tones depending on distinctive ring values for the lines and the telephone Refer to Programming distinctive ringing on page 194 Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback Enable Handsfree HF to use the telephone speakers or a headset Enable HF answerback to allow users to answer a call without lifting the handset or to use a headset Device Configuration Guide 198 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls This feature is set on a per telephone basis through Element Manager Note The handsfree and handsfree answerback feature is not available on telephones with no speakerphone capability 2001 7000 7100 To configure handsfree and handsfree answerback 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to enable or disable handsfree 2 Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab 3 Inthe bottom frame cl
202. erence calls six Silent Monitor The six conference resources on the system are already occupied This is a transient display that reverts to HG Member DN busy You are trying to use a feature but do not have access to it under administration Last Number redial The Last Number is not allowed Voice call Dial the internal number or press the internal auto dial button of the person to whom you want to speak Prime telephone The person at telephone NNN has forwarded a call to you using Do Not Disturb Prime telephone The system has transferred a call to you from a telephone with Do Not Disturb activated Silent monitor The current call on the telephone you are monitoring is either not a Hunt Group call or the call came in on a line key on that telephone Note Lines that are assigned to the hunt group must not be assigned to individual hunt group members Prime telephone No person answered this call so the system transferred it to you The telephone you are calling has Do Not Disturb turned on Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Messages features or press PRIORITY to make a priority call Priority Call The telephone to which you want to transfer the call has Do Not Disturb active Transfer The person to whom you tried to transfer a call has Do Not Disturb active on their telephone e Press JOIN to transfer the call e Press RETRY to transfer the call to another person e Press CANCL or the flashing line button to reconn
203. erences tab In the bottom panel select the Preferences tab In the Hotline type drop down list select External Set the Facility field to Use prime line oa fF WN Click P from the drop down keypad in the External number field This feature code inserts a 1 5 second pause before the device dials out 7 Click OK Next step e Test telephones NN40020 300 123 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Digital telephones support the most comprehensive use of the DN records panels For detailed panel descriptions refer to DN records parameters on page 41 The following paths indicate where to configure digital telephones in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs e Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets The list of procedures below are the common DN record configuration procedures Task Setting up digital telephones wired to system station ports Determine the programming for individual telephones and devices attached directly to digital media bay modules or the fixed digital ports on the main chassis Digital telephone DN record overview on page 124 System DNs Line Access tab on page 125 Line Assignment and Line Pools on page 128 Configuring Capabilities and Preferences on page 130 Configuring telephone capabilities on page 131 Configuring Prefere
204. ernal 61 35 programming 53 speaker 62 37 speaker and zone 63 37 timeout timer 79 tone 75 zone hunt groups 234 initiating 61 37 page zone assigning 53 park mode retrieval code setting 77 park timeout delay 79 parked call park mode setting 77 partial set lock 65 password hot desking 999 149 Pause external call feature 228 in a sequence of numbers See Wait for Dial Tone 228 insert into dialing sequence 78 35 38 pickup directed allow 77 pickup group assigning 53 group pickup 76 199 playing music through telephone 86 39 pre dial 56 192 PRI line types 284 primary language 501 34 prime line external autodial 63 hotline 57 overview 232 telephone programming 51 user speed dial 63 prime telephone delayed ring transfer 76 priority call 69 35 37 allow disallow 53 hunt groups 234 overview 218 Privacy 83 35 39 overview 202 program buttons default assignment 153 Programmable line feature keys 174 programming system features System Speed Dial 226 programming telephones Call Pickup 198 Protect level intrusion controls 53 PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring 141 Q queue hunt groups 103 request 909 33 time out 103 Device Configuration Guide 312 Index queuing calls initiating 801 38 R reallocating log space 214 receiver volume 77 user programming 193 receiving calls SWCA overview 211 redial last number 5 37 saved number 67 35 37 r
205. erson that there is a call waiting and on which code it was parked Device Configuration Guide 290 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys Retrieving a call from a SWCA key If the indicator beside a SWCA key is blinking you can retrieve the call by picking up aa the handset and pressing the SWCA key associated with the indicator or by dialing in the SWCA code that associates with that key In this example the call parked on SWCA1 was retrieved by this user who pressed the SWCA1 key The flashing indicator beside SWCA1 becomes solid As well a solid indicator appears beside one of the intercom buttons On all other telephones in the group the indicator displays solid beside SWCA1 indicating that the call has been retrieved and is active Intercom Intercom e Cm C pumy C l Grow lt a C lt 20000090p To retrieve a call from a SWCA key If you are not sure which call to retrieve you can use one of the following codes to find the longest parked call or the most recently parked call e FEATURE 537 retrieves the oldest SWCA call The indicator on all telephones in the group becomes solid indicating an active call Note These codes only work for telephones that have SWCA keys gt defined and the system only searches across the range of codes that are assigned for that telephone e FEATURE 538 retrieves the most recent SWCA call
206. esignators in the following features when you are entering the dial strings from the Element Manager Device Configuration Guide 228 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls e hotline external number e call forward to external numbers e system and user speed dial numbers e telephone and CAP button external number auto dial e lines Redirect to e routing dial string e ONN block for Tone and BRI e voice message center number Table 62 External call codes and definitions Link Generate a Link signal to access a PBX or other host exchange FEATURE 71 If you connect the system to a private branch exchange PBX you can use a Link LN signal to access special features On some telephones Link is called FLASH You can include the Link signal as part of a longer stored sequence on an external autodial button or in a speed dial code The Link symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in a dialing sequence FEATURE 71 Note This feature must be enabled under the restrictions for the telephone Pause Program within an external auto dial sequence to insert a 1 5 second delay FEATURE 78 This feature enters a 1 5 second delay in a dialing sequence on an external line The P use of this feature is required often for signaling remote devices such as answering machines or when accessing PBX features or host systems You can program more than one pause in an external auto dial or speed dial sequence FEATURE 78 Note Thi
207. estriction 00 1 13 N A N A N A N A N A N A filter 05 11 1800 Restriction i N A N A N A N A N A N A filter 06 Routing Off Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Routing No No No No No No No service overflow Public DN Public DN Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 8 lengths 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 17 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 00 12 1 3 16 5 01 17 01 17 01 17 01 17 01 17 17 4 18 4 011 18 011 18 011 18 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 411 3 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 911 3 NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 263 Table 73 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 3 of 3 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Unknown N A Variable Variable Variable N A N A Variable number Public OLI length Local 8 Variable Variable Variable 7 7 Variable number length National 9 Variable Variable Variable 10 10 Variable number length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Set capabilities Pickup group 1 None None None None None None Allow Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled redirect Cal
208. et Lock drop down list select None Partial or Full None allows access to all features Partial prevents programming autodial buttons and user speed dial Full no feature programming is allowed Protecting outgoing call privacy Outgoing calls contain name and number information that displays on the target telephone if this information is supported on the line at the switch and by the telephone You can block this information for outgoing calls using the ONN outgoing name and number blocking code For details about setting up ONN blocking on the system and for telephones refer to Programming outgoing CLID in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Activate feature FEATURE 819 Cancel feature FEATURE 819 Device Configuration Guide 218 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls Deal with a busy signal on an internal call The following features can be used when the internal number you dialed is busy e Priority Call e Ring Again e Leaving a message on page 219 Priority Call If your call is urgent use this code to override a busy signal or Do Not Disturb This feature must be enabled in programming on the initiating set This feature is set to off by default Note Your telephone intrusion level must be equal to or greater than the telephone you are calling Intrusion controls on page 203 Allowing a telephone to make priority calls Configuration
209. ettings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description ATA answer 3 5 7 10 Select the length of delay between the time you dial the last digit and when timer the analog device is ready to receive DTMF tone ATA tones lt check box gt Not selected No tones occur when a message is received use for data equipment Selected Tones occur when a message is received use for analog telephones ATA use On site Select the location of the ATA2 Off site Note Set the field to On site for all installations except devices on a long loop Set the field to Off site to increase the audio level to devices that are remote to the ATA2 This field has no effect for ASM and ASM8 devices Note OPX connections are not supported Msg indicate None Select Tone to send a Message Tone through the telephone receiver when Tone you receive a message Lamp Select Lamp to turn on the Message Lamp when you receive a message ATA device Modem Default Modem Telephone Devices connected to the system through an ATA can have connectivity issues over BRI PRI lines To alleviate this you can specify the type of device attached to the analog line Modem supports 3 1 kHz audio which requires a higher quality of service on the ISDN trunks that modems and FAX machines require for reliable information transfer If the trunks cannot provide the higher level of service the call fails Telephone supports speech paths which require less qual
210. ferences table panel 355 356 357 358 360 361 362 363 Active Application DNs Model 7316 M7310 355 356 357 358 360 ation 361 362 363 Application Application Application Application Application Appli Application Application S Line Access Capabilities and Preferences Restrictions Prime Line Control Set Auto Called ID Intercom Keys First Display iC 221 Name Oo A pe e a e o iC 221 Name oO 221 Name 221 Name 221 Name 221 Name 221 Name 221 Name 221 Name ie m C C C C C C C OHooooogo Table 13 describes the fields shown on the main Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel Table 13 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel Sheet 1 of 2 I C intercom Line lt line number gt Attribute Values Description DN lt read only gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Model lt alphanumeric gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Name lt numeric gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Prime Line None Pool A to O Choose the first line that the telephone selects when a call is made PRI Bloc pools are not valid selections for a Prime line When you assign a line pool as a prime line the system searches automatically for an idle line in the pool Intercom Keys 0to8 Assign the number of intercom buttons to a telephone Intercom buttons pr
211. for each file you want to remove NN40020 300 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 299 Adding music to the Play List The play list is an ordered list of songs that are heard by users of the Background Music and Music On Hold features To add a sound file to the Play List 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the Play List link The current play list appears Click the Add drop list and click the sound file you want to add The sound files that appear on the Add list are the sound files loaded on the BCM Click the To drop list and click on the location on the list where you want to add the sound file for example Bottom of List Click the Go icon The sound file is added to the Play list Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each sound file you want to add to the Play List Removing music from the Play List To remove a sound file from the Play List 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the Play List link The current play list appears Click the Remove link beside the sound file you want to remove from the Play List The file is removed from the Play List Repeat step 3 for each file you want to remove Note Clicking the Remove link only removes the sound file from that location in the Play List If the same sound file appears in another location on the Play List the other entry is not removed Removing a sound file from the Play List does not delete
212. for voice calls and the set does not ring Ringing groups If you set up call scheduling on the system you can define groups of telephones into ring groups This allows you to specify schedules where Trunk Answer can be used within the ring group to answer incoming calls even on telephones that do not have that line specifically assigned You can also define a second direct dial set for a ringing group For details about setting up ringing groups refer to Creating ring groups on page 97 For information about using schedules refer to Using the control telephone on page 230 Setting up Contact Center Refer to the Contact Center documentation for information about setting up this feature NN40020 300 235 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Use the following information for an explanation of the prompts you see on your telephone The following tables show the prompt along with a description or required action as appropriate Prompts are listed alphabetically within the following categories e Common display prompts e Viewing active services on page 246 e Call log prompts on page 247 Common display prompts These prompts can appear during general call features Display prompt Key HHH DHs S55 second DHE Xss line numbers YYY second line number 01 9 CAHCL BESF OF 3 parties only 4 calls HHH B24 RAA SLIMEMANME gt SHO Ok HHH Bus HEST WIEW
213. from Service done to Service required enter the password that needs to be entered before hospitality features can be changed optional enter a password that the room service people need to enter to allow them to Security Note Change the desk and room condition passwords regularly Table 35 explains the possible settings for the hospitality record Table 35 Hospitality main settings Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Administration Service change time lt 24 hour digital time gt Identify when the occupied rooms change from service done to service required Format HHMM i e 1400 2 p m where HH 0 to 23 MM 0 to 59 Desk password lt up to six digits gt Enter the password required to access all the Hospitality administrative features Default password 4677 HOSP NN40020 300 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services Table 35 Hospitality main settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Room condition password lt up to six digits gt Set the password that allows access to the Room condition feature FEATURE 876 Default password None Nortel strongly recommends that you change the default password and frequently change the desk password to prevent unauthorized entry Call Restrictions Vacant filter lt two digit filter gt Enter a code that indicates which calls are allowed wh
214. ft display labels Refer to IP features list on page 143 User speed dials Use this tab to assign telephone numbers to speed dial codes These codes are available to all telephones in the system The number of available codes is determined under system feature programming Programming references e User Speed Dial tab on page 63 To program user speed dials Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the DN of the telephone to program Click the User Speed Dial tab in the bottom panel A OO N a Use the Add button to enter the external number to dial and the facility to use when the selected speed code is entered 5 Enter a unique name for each speed dial This name displays for incoming calls that match the external number 6 Program the speed dial code onto telephone buttons and label the buttons Next step Outgoing call restrictions on page 137 Outgoing call restrictions Restriction filters determine what dialing strings are allowed or blocked from the user You can specify restriction filters specific to the telephone as well as filters that are specific to a line assigned to the telephone Programming reference e Restrictions main tab on page 65 e restriction filters e line restrictions e CoS passwords Device Configuration Guide 138 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones To program outgoing call
215. g and call answering for other telephones in the system The DNs of the other telephones are referred to as Answer DNs Figure 10 Answer DNs tab Details for DN 354 Line Assignment Line Pool Access Answer DNs Answer DNs DN Appearance Type 234 Appr Ring Table 12 describes the access fields on this panel Table 12 Answer DNs Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description DN lt DN number gt From the main panel DN list Appearance Type Appr amp Ring Appr Define how calls to the Answer DN will present on this only Ring only telephone Appr amp Ring Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button and the telephone rings Appr only Call prompt appears beside the Answer DN button Ring only Telephone rings Notes Every answer DN you assign to a telephone automatically designates an appearance on the answer telephone beside a button with an indicator if one is available Answer DNs overwrite feature assignments to buttons with indicators They do not overwrite line Hunt group intercom or handsfree assignments If no buttons are available on the telephone ensure that you program the Answer DN as Ring only In that case when a call comes in to the other telephone the user receives a ring tone Actions Device Configuration Guide 50 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 12 Answer DNs Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Values Description Add Yo
216. g call Device Configuration Guide 222 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls Preventing voice announcements at a telephone Prevent your telephone from receiving voice announcements by using FEATURE 88 or FEATURE 835 Do not Disturb Create a conference call You can establish calls to two people at the same time and allow each caller to hear the other two callers You must have at least two intercom paths assigned to your telephone to initiate a conference call The person who establishes the conference call has several options available to provide control within a conference call e remove callers temporarily put on Hold or permanently e split the conference into two separate calls e leave the conference and allow the other two callers to remain connected Setting a conference tone If your profile allows it you can configure the system to sound a tone when a conference call is established Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To set up a 3 party conference call Place or answer the first call Put the first call on hold Place or answer the second call After the second call is connected press FEATURE 3 Press the line or intercom button of the first held call not required on the 7100 digital phones O a fF WN Press RLS to end the conference call To set up an Ad Hoc Multiparty conference call 1 Complete the procedure for the 3 party conference ca
217. ge 31 Ring Groups Line Settings on page 99 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management Each non auto answer line and target line can be assigned a ringing group for each schedule If no schedule is set for ringing services lines ring at any telephones with the lines assigned Note VoIP trunking lines and PRI lines are set automatically to auto answer and therefore require target lines BRI lines set to auto answer also ring at target lines Therefore by specifying target lines in a ring group all auto answer lines can be forwarded to the telephones indicated Device Configuration Guide 98 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups Ring Groups Members The Ring Groups table on the Group Membership tab in the top frame of this panel is a read only list of the 100 ring groups available to the system When you click a ring group in the table the Members table appears in the bottom panel The Group Membership panel allows you to define which telephones belong to each ring group A DN can be associated with multiple ring groups Figure 33 Adding members to ring groups Ring Groups Group Membership Line Settings Ring Groups Ring Group 002 003 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 Details for Ring Group 004 2 Add Member Members DN z Table 31 describes the fields on this panel Table 31 Ring gr
218. grammed to route the unanswered call correctly 2 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone to which you want to reroute second calls Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab In the bottom panel click the Capabilities tab Select the DND on Busy check box Allowing Do Not Disturb on a telephone This feature is programmed on a per telephone basis Using the feature Press FEATURE 85 to activate the feature Use FEATURE 85 to cancel DND Do Not Disturb also prevents voice calls from alerting at your telephone Voice calls appear as normal intercom calls Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Turn Privacy on or off When you have lines assigned to more than one telephone anyone with the line appearance can answer a call or join a call in progress To provide exclusive access for a user you can program privacy on a line in which case only one person at a time can use the line This does not apply to target lines Programming privacy on a line The privacy setting only applies to lines that are assigned individually to telephones Lines in line pools do not have this feature To program privacy on a line 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Lines gt Active Physical
219. gs for page This procedure describes how to determine individual telephone access to the page feature and how the system handles page broadcasts To configure a telephone for the page feature in Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets To configure telephone settings for page Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the DN for the telephone where you want to define the page feature kh OO N On the bottom frame under the Capabilities tab e Select the Paging check box if you want the telephone to have access to the paging feature e Beside Page zone enter the number of the zone that the telephone is to be part of for pages Enter None if you do not want the set to receive a page Setting Auto hold on incoming pages If this Page feature is enabled telephones with active calls that receive internal pages have the active call placed on hold for the duration of the page When the page message is finished the active call is removed from hold Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Capabilities NN40020 300 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 221 Business Series Terminals note If the active call is on mute when the page comes in the call is not returned to mute when the call comes off hold Making a page announcement Internal page Ma
220. gt On two line display telephones only you can choose whether the telephone can be used to allow the Silent Monitor feature Select the check box to allow this feature on this telephone Refer to Silent Monitor on page 84 for information about setting up the system settings for the Silent Monitor feature including determining how many telephones can be allowed to use this feature Refer to Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 109 for instructions about using FEATURE 550 SWCA Call Group tab Although System wide Call Appearance SWCA assignments are meant to be assigned to buttons with indicators you can assign SWCA assignments to a telephone without assigning them to buttons using the fields on this panel This is useful if you want to use the full range of SWCA assignments Use the SWCA Call Group tabbed panel to enable or disable Call 1 to Call 16 assignments for each sets The administrator can configure the 16 SWCA feature codes on all the sets through administration NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 55 Users can park or retrieve calls on any SWCA assignment even if the call is not directly assigned to their telephone However the SWCA support codes FEATURE 520 FEATURE 537 and FEATURE 538 only search for SWCA assignments that are assigned to the telephone where the feature is invoked These codes are required for users who do not have buttons with indicators Figure 12 S
221. gt Busy PBX gt Busy Prime Prime Prime PBX gt Busy setting DID gt Prime DID gt Prime DID gt Prime BRI ISDN Answer Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Auto Mode Companding law_ A law A law A law A law mu law A law DTI carrier type E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 E1 System settings Number of rings in 2 2 1 1 a 2 a cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes supported Mode Sequential Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Sequential Funt groups Default delay 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles 4 ring cycles Queue timeout 60 60 60 60 60 60 sec If busy Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Busy tone Night Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 Start 23 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 End 07 00 Service times Evening Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start 17 00 Start17 00 Start17 00 Start 17 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 End 23 00 Lunch Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 Start 12 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 End 13 00 NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 265 Table 74 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 3 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong l
222. gt MCID Call log If your system has the appropriate equipment and you subscribe to the call information feature supplied by your service provider you can record information about calls received on an external line The line does not need to be assigned to the telephone that receives the call in order for the information to be logged nor does an assigned line need to be a ringing line to log a call ISDN service packages that come with calling line identification CLID can supply the same feature Refer to Setting call log space for the system on page 214 and Using the Call Log feature on page 215 Setting call log space for the system The call log space heading allows you to reallocate the Call log space equally to all telephones in your system Warning Use this heading only if you want to allocate an equal amount of log space A to all the telephones in your system Reallocating Call log space can destroy Call log data at telephones that lose space There are 600 Call log spaces available in the system There are no spaces allocated by default Changing the space allocation using Log defaults defines the log space available to all telephones in the system To reset call log space 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Advanced Feature Settings 2 Click the Reset Logs button The Reset Call Log Space dialog box appears 3 Enter the Space per log and the of sets with logs 4 Click OK A
223. gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab gt Capabilities tab bottom panel To allow a telephone to make priority calls While the DN is ringing enter FEATURE 69 or the priority softkey on a two line display set You are connected directly to the other person unless they are on another call That person has the option of pressing FEATURE 85 Do Not Disturb to block the call On two line display telephones the user also has the option of pressing the BLOCK SoftKey Ring Again Use this code to have the system to notify you when a telephone you want to call is no longer busy or becomes available There is no system programming to allow disallow this feature Activate feature While on the call enter FEATURE 2 Cancel feature Enter FEATURE 2 Other ways of communicating with internal users If you cannot reach a person or if you want to reach more than one person there are other methods of communication including e Leaving a message on page 219 e Paging on page 219 NN40020 300 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 219 e Making announcements to individuals Voice Call on page 221 e Create a conference call on page 222 Leaving a message The message feature is a standard system feature and has no specific programming However some telephones and remote voice mail systems can require programming to ensure that message waiting indicators MW
224. gured on a per device basis System wide telephony feature configuration The system telephony settings must be set correctly to ensure that telephones can be programmed correctly e Global telephony settings on page 73 Telephone record configuration When the system features are determined the telephone DN records allow you to refine how each telephone interacts with the system DN record configuration can depend on what features you want to allow users to access or what features the type of telephone can support e DN records parameters on page 41 e Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs on page 69 e Configuring telephones Digital telephones on page 123 e Configuring analog telephones and devices on page 117 e DN records ISDN devices in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 e Configuring telephones IP telephones on page 139 e Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone on page 151 Optional system features There are also several optional telephony system features that you can use to enhance the telephone system Configuring system speed dial numbers on page 87 Creating ring groups on page 97 Device Configuration Guide 72 Chapter 8 Telephony system and device programming System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 Configuring Hunt Groups on page 101 Configuring Hospitality services
225. h this feature you can program your top salesperson to be the first member of the Hunt group to receive incoming calls Rotary the call starts at the member telephone that appears on the list after the telephone that answered the last call If that telephone is busy the system proceeds down the priority list until a non busy telephone is reached As many incoming calls can be processed as there are available telephones to accept the call each call being presented in the described round robin fashion Hunt Delay lt 1 10 gt If Mode is either Sequential or Rotary Hunt Delay specifies how much time to delay offering a Queued call to a member telephone when that telephone becomes available This is to provide a break period for the users between calls Default 4 seconds If Busy Busy tone Queue Select how you want the system to respond if all lines appear as busy Busy tone If all lines are busy the user receives a busy tone Queue If all lines are busy the user hears ring back until an agent is available Default Busy tone Queue timeout 15 30 45 60 120 or 180 seconds Select the time for a call to remain in the Hunt Group This value defines the maximum time a call remains queued and the maximum time to offer a call before sending it to overflow if it is not answered If the queue times out before the call connects to a member telephone the call is terminated If the call h
226. handset designed to be used in connection with Nortel wireless communication solutions in potentially explosive environments The DECT transmitter frequencies of the apparatus are harmonized for these services in the European Community X represents the frequency variant of the models 2 1900 1920 MHz frequency band 3 1880 1885 MHz frequency band Device Configuration Guide 180 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 5 1880 1900 MHz frequency band Refer to the DECT 413X 414X Handset User Guide N0028550 and the DECT 4145Ex 4146Ex Handset User Guide NN40110 103 for more information Figure 62 413X 414X handset Table 4 413X 414X handset Sheet 1 of 3 Message indicator light Q Flashes when you have a message waiting Volume control Adjusts the handset and ringer volume Display features and option menus Shows call information handset status icons and guides you through Headset connector NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 181 Table 4 413X 414X handset Sheet 2 of 3 Keys F to L activate different functions when your handset is on hook or off hook On hook Handset is idle not in use Off hook Handset is active call or feature in progress Menu key On hook idle Enters the Handset Options menu Off hook active Activates a feature option lt
227. hange an existing password and press OK NN40020 300 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 149 4 Confirm the password and press OK 5 Press CHANGE to toggle between allowing or disallowing Hot desking 6 Press QUIT to exit Resetting the Hot desking password Reset the Hot desking password through system programming This enables users who forget their passwords to re enter Hot desking and to reset their password Note This process also cancels Hot desking for the telephone if the application is currently active Also refer to Notes about Hot desking on page 147 To reset the Hot desking password field for a specific IP telephone 1 You can access the reset button from two locations e Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt IP amp Application Sets gt IP Terminal Details tab e Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt IP Terminal Details tab Select an IP telephone from the list Click Reset Hot Desking Password Click OK on the dialog box to reset the password The password resets to Null The user can enter Hot desking again to enter a new password Using the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration You perform this procedure on the target telephone at which the diverted calls are to be answered To use the Hot desking feature to divert an IP telephone configuration 1 Ensure both telephones are on hook bef
228. hapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 287 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys The System Wide Call Appearance SWCA feature enables you to park incoming and outgoing calls on your BCM and at the same time provides call appearance to a group of telephones Using this feature frees the line used by the call and enables another user to pick up the call at any telephone that has been assigned the same SWCA keys Note Your telephone must have a free intercom key to pick up SWCA calls Labelling your telephone keys provides identification about which code is applied to which key See diagram below Assigning SWCA keys Indicate the label for your SWCA keys can jy _ lt Telephone key SWCA code T cp Lj FEATURE 521 ep a L FEATURE 523 swea2 f Jf swoas FEATURE 524 FEATURE 525 ED a Ey p FEATURE 520 o ED FEATURE 827 FEATURE 528 Int p ra C g Ta a FEATURE 531 If possible assign the same set of buttons to FEATURE 532 the same SWCA user codes for all FEATURE 533 telephones in the call group You can use any name for the keys but a FEATURE 534 reference to the SWCA code saved on the FEATURE 535 key is useful FEATURE 536 If you must find out which code has been assigned to a button use Button Inquiry FEATURE 0
229. hat you want to delete Click Delete Click OK to save changes NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 65 Restrictions main tab The Restrictions settings allow you to control callouts of certain number combinations These restriction filters then are assigned to lines and DN records as required to prevent callers from making certain kinds of calls from a specific telephone or from lines available at the telephone Figure 19 Restrictions table panel All DNs Line Access Capabilities and Preferences Restrictions Allow Last Number Allow Saved Number allow Link 77208 M 7208 77208 M 7208 77208 M 7208 T7316E T7208 M 7208 T7208 M 7208 T7208 M7208 T7208 M7208 T7208 M7208 KS KS KS KS KS KS KS CS JHE SHH KS KS KS SS SSS lt s a Table 19 describes the fields on this panel Table 19 Restrictions table fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description DN lt read only gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Model Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Name lt read only gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Set Lock None Choose the option that sets the amount of programming and Partial customizing the user can do with this telephone Full None allows access to all features Partial prevents Full restricts all the Partial e programming autodial buttons Settings plus e programmi
230. hones Handsfree HF Answerback Do not select Configuring telephone capabilities on page 131 Page settings Select check box Can send pages but cannot receive pages Receive short tones Select check box analog telephones only Hotline Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices on page 122 NN40020 300 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices 121 Table 37 Analog telephone customization Sheet 2 of 2 Affected field Setting Panel name and link to common procedures The following settings are not valid N V or are limited on analog devices Keep DN Alive N V Configuring telephone capabilities on page 131 Silent monitor supervision Do not select DND on Busy Do not select Priority call Do not select Auto hold Do not select Allow Link Select check box telephones Outgoing call restrictions on page 137 only All other settings are variable based on your system requirements Device Configuration Guide 122 Chapter 17 Configuring analog telephones and devices Assigning a pause for external dialing for data devices The external Hotline feature provides automatic access to a line when an analog device goes off hook To assign a pause for external dialing Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets Select the Capabilities and Pref
231. hree digit park code The first digit of the code is a system access code The last two digits range from 01 to 25 FEATURE 74 You can also set a delay period for when the call returns to the telephone from which it was parked under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings You can also determine the order used to assign the codes Park mode Setting up the call park access code This park prefix must be unique from any other access code Default 1 Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt General Access Codes subpanel Setting up park timeout Determine how many minutes the system waits between parking a call and returning the call to the original answering telephone Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Timers subpanel Determining the order in which call park codes are assigned to calls Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings gt Park mode To park a call 1 Enter FEATURE 74 2 The display shows a three digit retrieval code X01 X24 3 Note the code and inform other users about the parked call X is the assigned access code NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 211 To retrieve a parked call On any system telephone press an intercom button 2 Dial the retrieval code X01 X024 On the model 7000 and 7100 digital telephones and 2001 IP telephones lift the handset and
232. hrough a GATM not all markets When enabled the telephone displays call information when it is available for a call before answer When disabled no call information is displayed for this line Choose this setting if the telephone does not have a display or if you do not want call information displayed to the user Disabling this function can reduce system resource requirements Limitation Only 30 telephones can have this field enabled for any given line Vmsg Set lt check box gt Select whether an indicator shows on the telephone for a voice message waiting on an external voice message system The line must appear on the receiving telephone Note The Message Waiting Indicator MWI is currently supported exclusively by Meridian Mail and CallPilot and SL 100 and DMS 100 MCDN note If your system is part of an MCDN network connected to a Meridian 1 system and you are using the voice mail system off the Meridian 1 you must enable this field Analog lines connected to legacy analog ASM station modules and analog telephones attached to an ATA device do not provide visible message waiting indication Analog telephones connected to a GASMB8 support message indicators if the telephone is set up to receive them Note Contact your voice message service provider to find out if your voice message service works with BCM50 2 0 or if you have any problems with your service Priv Received Target lines
233. ial feature code again Line redirection Select the line used to redirect calls out of the system Line redirection Press the lines to redirect To release a line selection press the line to redirect again Press ALL to redirect all your lines Cancel redirection Press the lines that no longer need redirection The lines light up when pressed After you cancel redirection for a line you cannot restore it by pressing the line again Press ALL to cancel redirection for all your lines When finished press HOLD or OK Line redirection Continue to press the lines to redirect Press HOLD or OK when finished Cancel redirection Continue to press the lines that no longer need redirection Press HOLD or OK when finished Press YES to send a message See Messages You cannot use the feature you selected because your telephone is locked The active call display for a three party conference master Message You are at the beginning of your list of messages Press NEXT to move through your messages Transfer Complete the transfer in progress before you access a new feature answer another call or select an outgoing line Silent monitor The DN you entered belongs to another Supervisor You cannot monitor SM supervisor telephones Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Device Configuration Guide 246 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Their list full Transfer denied CAHCL RETR T
234. ial set attribute allows you to assign an additional telephone to receive calls for each schedule Note The extra dial set is activated during a schedule by entering the Ringing service feature code from the assigned direct dial telephone This does not activate the Ringing service unless the direct dial telephone is also a control set Restriction Sve Off Manual Auto Off prevents the service from being activated Manual allows you to turn the service on and off at any time from a control telephone This setting overrides any automatically running schedules Auto allows you to program a stop and start time for a service under the Common Settings heading These times are then executed automatically when the service is active Default Off NN40020 300 33 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes e BCM feature codes on page 33 provides a complete list of the feature codes that can be accessed from digital and IP telephones e Button programming features on page 36 provides a list of the features that are programmable under the DN record Button Programming heading BCM feature codes The following provides a quick reference for BCM features available by pressing the FEATURE button on M series telephones Business Series Terminals BST series and IP telephones Table 6 provides feature names sorted alphabetically and numerically by feature code Refer to the user documentation f
235. ial string of the telephone to which you want your calls transferred Cancel feature FEATURE 4 To block user access You can block the user from using the call forward feature by setting the Set Lock for the telephone to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Camp on Use this feature to reroute an answered call to another telephone and to park the call at the other telephone if all lines to the telephone are busy The target telephone displays a message indicating a camped call and a tone occurs When a line becomes available the call is uncamped and transferred to the available line Centralized voice mail Meridian If your system is part of a private network that uses the Meridian call attendant as part of a centralized voice mail system the attendant can use camp on to camp a call on any telephone in any system on the network Device Configuration Guide 210 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Setting the timer The system camps a call for a specified length of time before it returns the call to the original answering telephone Set the timer under Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To use Camp on 1 Press FEATURE 82 2 Dial the extension of the receiving telephone Call Park You can park a call on the system that can be accessed from any telephone on the system Calls are parked on a t
236. ication Use the Music Manager Administration application to load music files and compile play lists To open the Music Manager Administration application 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Music The Music panel appears Select Music Manager from the Music Source drop down list Click Launch Music Manager The Connect to IP Address dialog box appears In the User Name box enter the user name you use to log on to Element Manager In the Password box enter the password you use to log on to Element Manager Click OK The Music Manager Administration panel appears Loading music onto the BCM Before you can add music to the play list you must the load the music track onto the BCM To load music onto the BCM 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the File Manager heading A list of audio files already on the BCM appears along with a form for uploading new files Click Upload The Upload file dialog box appears Navigate to the folder that contains the sound file you want to load Device Configuration Guide 298 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source Click on the sound file and then click Open The sound file must be a wav or au file format The path for the sound file appears in the Upload box If you want to assign a name to this sound file enter the name in the As box This name appears on the File List to help identify the sound file Click the Go link The Up
237. ice message access F981 06 Blank 07 Blank 08 Blank These buttons only support Answer DNs or SWCA controls e There are only two directional buttons Up and Down on this telephone Use these buttons to scroll through the Features list which is accessed through the Services button or by entering FEATURE 900 IP telephone 2007 button defaults The Nortel IP Phone 2007 brings voice and data to the desktop by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection The IP Phone 2007 provides all the functionality of the IP Phone 2004 using a graphical user interface GUD In addition advanced text and graphic based web centric applications are supported Not all features are available on all telephones Consult your system administrator to verify which features are available for your use Device Configuration Guide 164 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones The IP Phone 2007 supports the following features 12 programmable feature soft keys Shared LAN access with a PC Four soft keys self labeled providing access to a maximum of ten features Headset jack with On Off key Your IP Phone 2007 might not be configured to support soft key functionality Consult your system administrator Automatic network configuration Speaker for on hook dialing or on hook listening Hearing aid compatibility Volume control bar for adjusting ringer sp
238. ices Press RLS or EXIT to quit The name of the current Routing service schedule appears on the display Press or NEXT to view the other Routing service schedules Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule Press HOLD or OK to select this schedule or NEXT to view the next available schedule or RLS or QUIT to exit If you select this schedule it remains active until the next automatic schedule begins You have entered the Show services feature code and there is no active service There is a service active in your system Press or LIST to view the active services These are the prompts you can receive when you are viewing your call logs Table 65 Call log prompts Sheet 1 of 2 Display prompt 1iUnkniown rare 1LiUnknown number 12 KATE SMITH HEST ERASE MORE 12 KATE SMITH HEST ERASE MORE 12 KATE SMITH HEST ERASE MORE 49 123456 7898123 HEST ERASE MORE Callis bumped Hold or release In use SETHAHE Description of error or action The caller s name is not available The callers number is not available The colon indicates a new item The symbol indicates that the call was answered The symbol indicates a long distance call indicates the stored number was trimmed to its final 11 digits Press the volume bar or MORE to show additional information about the call One or more log entries are deleted by the Autobumping feature while you are viewing at the Call Log Hold or release your
239. ick the Capabilities tab 4 Set the Handsfree and HF answerback fields Handsfree speaker volume The handsfree speaker volume returns to the telephone volume default setting after a call is released Listen to a call as a group This feature FEATURE 802 allows more than one person to listen to a telephone without the caller hearing everyone in the group the handset is off hook For general information about how handsfree and mute works refer to the overview information Through the CONFIG telset interface Terminals and Sets gt Capabilities gt Handsfree and HF Answerback Answering calls not directed to your telephone There are a number of features you can use to answer incoming calls that do not come directly to your line or intercom buttons Refer to the following features e Call Queuing e Directed Pickup on page 198 e Pickup Group on page 199 e Answer DNs on page 200 Call Queuing This feature allows you to answer the next incoming call on your telephone based on call priority Call priority is based on waiting time The caller that has waited the longest is answered first To use call queuing Press FEATURE 801 Directed Pickup This feature allows a user to answer any ringing telephone in the system NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 199 Enter FEATURE 76 and the DN of a ringing telephone to answer any telephone in the system Enabling the fe
240. ify settings to customize the telephone operations For a detailed description of the fields on each panel refer to DN records parameters on page 41 NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 125 System DNs Line Access tab References Job aid Notes about assigning lines to telephones on page 125 To assign a line to a telephone O a F WN 10 11 12 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access Select the line listing the appropriate DN for the telephone Select the field that you want to modify Name Enter a name that identifies the user or the location maximum of seven digits Port Enter the port number for the device Pub OLI Enter or confirm the number that displays at the far end for calls going out over the public network only on digital and VoIP trunks Priv OLI Enter or confirm the number that displays at the far end for calls going over the private network This number is usually the same as the DN only on digital and VoIP trunks Fwd No Answer Enter the number of the device that receives calls when this telephone does not answer The device can be another telephone or a voice mail service Fwd Delay Confirm or change the number of rings you want to occur at the telephone before a call is forwarded Default 4 Fwd Busy Enter the number of the device you want to receive calls when this telephone is busy This can be
241. ile you want to play To play a sound file click the Play button To stop a sound file click the Stop button To pause a sound file click the Pause button Configuring a Network Device to be the IP Music Source To configure a Network Device to be the IP Music source 1 The Music panel appears Click Configuration gt Applications gt Music Note A third party application that supports streaming G 711 is required 2 Select the Streaming Server from the Music Source list 3 Configure the Streaming Server section of the Music panel Table 5 lists the fields and the associated parameters Table 5 Network Device parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Server lt IP address gt Enter the IP address of the music source Server RTP Port Default port 2216 Enter the number of the source port used for the music source This is the port the BCM uses to receive music from the music source Device Configuration Guide 302 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source Table 5 Network Device parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Stream Type G 711 U Law Enter the codec that is used for the incoming music source audio G 711 A Law stream The codec you enter here must match the codec used by G 729 the IP Music source G 723 Default G 711 U Law Frames per packets 1 2 or3 Number of audio frames per RTP packet The number of frames you enter must match th
242. ime telephone A person camped parked or transferred a call on line XXX but no one has answered the call Press CALLBCK or the line button to connect to the call Transfer The external caller you were transferring hung up before the transfer was complete Camp on A call you camped has returned to you but the caller hung up before you can reconnect Message You are viewing your message list The display shows the number and name of the line used for your message Prime telephone The call coming in on line XXX for target line YYY has come to you because Line YYY is busy Prime telephone There is no telephone that can receive a call on line XXX so the system has transferred it to you Another user in the system is transferring a call to you on line XXX A camped call is waiting Press the line button or use Call Queuing to answer the call Press HOLD if you have 7000 and 7100 digital phones NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 241 Display prompt Line denied Line in use Line Redirection QUIT ACD REMOWE Messages amp Calls MSG CALLS Make calls first Message denied Message list SHOW ABD EsIT Message toi Microrhone muted Move line from QUIT Mowe line tor QUIT Heed Handsfree Ho avail SWCA Ho button free Ho call to Fark Ho call on 181 Description of error or action You selected a line that is private to another telephone Trunk Answer You have trie
243. ine displays When an alarm message appears an Alarm number and a Time are displayed 1 Record the alarm number and time 2 Call your customer service representative and report the alarm code Device Configuration Guide 250 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages NN40020 300 251 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes This section describes some of the differences in the market profile attributes These attributes are derived from the market profile selected when you configure the system Each market profile uses a set of system attributes that provide specific functionality for the geographical area in which you deploy the system This section covers the following main topics e Interface availability on page 251 e Tones and cadences on page 253 e Core parameters for market profiles on page 260 e Analog Trunk parameters on page 272 e GASM8 parameters on page 276 e GASI parameters on page 278 e ATA2 parameters on page 280 e ISDN line services on page 283 e Analog and digital trunk types on page 284 Interface availability Some of the BCM interfaces are customized for a specific region and are not available to all market profiles Refer to the following tables for a list of interfaces available within each market profile e Analog interface availability by market profile on page 252 e Digital interface availability by market profile on p
244. ing These assignments are the same for all users in the system The following paths indicate where to access system speed dial programming in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt System Speed Dial e Telset interface CONFIG gt Sys speed dial Panels Subpanels Configuring features and tasks System Speed Dial panel on page 87 Using alpha tagging for name display incoming in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Button Programming tab on page 60 Programming memory buttons on page 226 Speed dialing on page 225 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Hospitality services System Speed Dial panel This panel allows you to determine the number of speed dial codes on the system and what each code dials Device Configuration Guide 88 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers Figure 29 System Speed Dial table System Speed Dial o en Speed Dials Number of speed dials 70 v CLID match length 8 v Speed Dial Number External Number Facity Display Name Bypass Restrictions at a Table 30 describes each field on this panel Table 30 System Speed Dial Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description Number of speed 70 Choose the number of speed dial codes you want available to your dials 255 system users If you are
245. ing has expired No one answered the call you parked The call returns to you Call park You have tried to park a conference call Split the conference and park the calls separately The person who retrieves the calls can reconnect the conference Call park All available retrieval codes are in use Transfer the call or take a message instead SWCA No park resources out of the 27 that are available on the BCM are free Wait for one to become free and then try again Call park Record the code shown n01 n25 Use Page FEATURE 60 or press PAGE to announce the call and its retrieval code Pickup group Enter the internal number of the telephone that is ringing You can use an internal auto dial button to do this If you decide not to answer a ringing call after you have activated Directed Pickup press FEATURE Pickup groupers is no call to pick up or the call has been answered or you have tried to pick up a call on a person s private line Trunk Answer The call that is ringing is on a line that is not in a Ringing Service Device Configuration Guide 244 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Pick uF receiver Please wait Pool code _ QUIT Press a button QUIT Press a line Press held line Program and HOLD Program and OF QUIT OF Programmed Priorita HHH BLOCK Priority denied Redir by HHH OVERRIDE Redirect denied Release acall Description of error or
246. inger on page 194 Device Configuration Guide 42 Chapter6 DN records parameters Panel tabs Tasks Features IP Terminal Details tab on Configuring telephones IP Global VoIP features on page 59 telephones on page 139 page 143 Button Programming table on page 60 Button Programming tab on Default memory button page 60 includes CAP KIM programming for telephones on button programming page 153 Creating an enhanced CAP station on page 233 User Speed Dial tab on System features and feature page 63 codes on page 33 Restrictions main tab on page 65 Set Restrictions tab on page 66 Line Set Restrictions tab on Restrictions Line and Remote page 67 in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about DN records Main panel tabs common fields All main panel tabs display the same first three columns listed in Table 8 Table 8 Common columns for the main tabs Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description DN lt numeric gt This number is unique to each telephone record The number identifies the telephone to the system DN start digits and DN length are configured during system setup Digital and analog telephone DNs map one to one with ports on module connections IP telephone DNs do not map to specific ports however a keycode is required to activate the feature
247. irected to your telephone 0 0 00 cece ee eee 198 EM MUMS a sce hc ate dase Sn ce de Alay et cepa lec ey ob ewan 198 Directed PICkUp cci cheese kk ns vde it eekes dee cd oe oeGRe Seed ERE RE KOS 198 Pic GUDD oers Dra ie dehy wari exs ted oak ES ae RA 199 TW ON akcd a chheageeeeROngdiaks Pope EEEREN Ons eh EPET as 199 Answer DNS 2220 ci5e et Gar dtaseeecediioneedouteeobecedutawned cade 200 CON UNEUIIEIS PIES yros ule hon eed ep lai hea th ee Ream MR WA 201 DONADO D s2c0sbene denies beee See eee ead eed Ee Deere aeeeR es 201 DND ONB f24 655 Shee ed et tee baer eh heed oe FEAA ETTER 201 Tom Pay on O aeae reaa MC emer ae eee Pe A Ure a 202 Mirusion cOntiolS ccc ssriinrsristrisdr kerut ke Eri nkr eden REK Ea 203 aoe L TTE TE EE T EEEE E wees 204 M aaa TAE nese BeAr SSRs EENT ALTEAST ETT 204 Hold automatically autohold 0 e dee5sderreweue ged enski cren nniS 204 Device Configuration Guide 12 Contents GK 2 Call exU WON scoped egy ee bh eee aw he bbe e eee Sagan a Ras 205 Parking or ransievind Calle is cne s tacked se beag t ehes aeew eGR c bee eke eA 205 Transfer answered calls 0 0000 eects 206 Transfer unanswered calls 5 c0e0keebee ban es eee need w ite ere ews 206 Lis SCHON nah pees ve E HERS ORES POSS CASSLE SEES RHE SESS 207 Call forward unanswered calls 0 000 c eee 208 COMPCOW acta nce tonbeni vege Bebade eta dee E EEE TETT 209 CALE aeea E Nc E amy cn Ge om ce sae ete ene 210 CAIDAC sol
248. is panel to specify operational attributes These attributes can also be set at the telephone Settings at the telephone override Element Manager settings To configure preferences for a telephone Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab 1 2 Click the Preferences tab in the bottom panel 3 Call log options Determine when calls are logged 4 Dialing options Determine how the user dials numbers Programming note Some telephones do not allow all dialing options 5 Contrast Adjust the contrast level of the display Ring type If you want incoming calls to produce a specific type of ring for example to differentiate between two telephones that are in close proximity select one of the four ring types If you select None the default ring is used 7 Next step Button Programming tab on page 60 NN40020 300 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones 135 Job aid Call log notes If your system has the appropriate equipment and you subscribe to the call information feature supplied by your service provider you can record information about calls received from an external line ISDN service packages that come with calling line identification CLID can supply the same feature Call Log creates a record of incoming external calls to a telephone even if the telephone does not have that line assigned For each call the log can contain e sequence numbe
249. is required for 7324 digital phones that have one or more CAP modules attached Programming CAP KIM buttons Designating features or autodial numbers to the eKIM buttons can be performed using the CAP KIM Button Programming panel To program module buttons 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets 2 Click the Capabilities and Preferences tab 3 Select the DN for the CAP you want to configure Device Configuration Guide 96 Chapter 12 Setting up central answering positions In the lower panel click the CAP KIM Button Programming tab Select the line for the button number that you want to program Configure the feature or autodial on the button For a detailed description of each field refer to Button Programming tab on page 60 Note You cannot assign lines target lines or Hunt group indicators using button fed programming These must be performed through assigning lines to the telephone Line Assignment tab on page 46 and for hunt groups configuring the telephone as a Hunt group member Hunt Group members and lines on page 105 These lines are either moved to the modules or overflow to the module if the telephone buttons cannot accommodate the new settings You cannot assign Hunt group DNs as an autodial button on the KIM modules Managing lines on a KIM If the 7316E KIM is configured as an eCAP you can move lines onto the module using FEATURE 81 on the telephone You
250. ission and Loop Interface parameters on page 282 e ATA2 DR7 Call Supervision Dial Pulse and DTMF parameters on page 283 ATA2 DR6 Table 85 ATA2 DR6 Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Call Supervision and Dial Pulse parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Call Supervision Dial Pulse Market Loop Support Transmission Interface Duration ms Duration ms Dial Ringing Min Pulse Min Min Terminal Input Frequency Max Min Coding Max Max Market profile Localized Impedance Hz Recall Clear Scheme Break Make Australia Yes 220 Q 820 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 Q1120 nF Bahrain No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law Canada Yes 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 Caribbean Yes 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 Global No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law Hong Kong No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based mu Law lreland No UK 300Q 1000 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 based Q 220 nF Mexico No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 N 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law New Zealand No UK 300 Q 25 10 150 310 N 20 125 10 230 Based 1000 QII 220 nF North America Yes 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 PRC No North 600 Q 20 290 1010 1500 20 130 15 130 American Based A Law NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attri
251. ithin an acceptable range A violation of the Unacceptable threshold indicates a severe degradation in voice quality If an alarm is generated to report a threshold violation additional information will be included in the alarm to tag the source of the alarm and provide other information that may be helpful in monitoring voice quality on the system and across the network For an explanation of the Metrics tab and the default PVQM threshold settings refer to the Administration Guide NN40020 600 Figure 42 PVQM threshold settings Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring Threshold Settings Metrics Threshold settings Metric Warning desktop Unacceptable desktop Warning softclient Unacceptable softclient Inter Arrival Jitter ms 30 40 0 0 Listening A Factor 0 100 65 60 0 0 Packet Loss 2 7 0 0 Round Trip Delay ms 40 100 0 0 Changing the polling interval may lead to improper reporting of threshold violations Polling interval s 10 NN40020 300 143 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features The two global IP feature panels provide a quick access feature menu and customized display labels for IP telephone memory buttons Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Tasks Features TP features list on page 143 Assigning the list to a button on page 145 To use the Services button to access features
252. ituations where troubleshooting suggests that a particular telephone has corrupted firmware Refer to IP telephone set details in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 for details To force a firmware download to a Nortel IP telephone 1 You can access the reset button from two locations e Configuration gt Resources gt Telephony Resources gt Terminal Details tab Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences gt IP Terminal Details 2 Select an IP telephone from the list 3 Click Force firmware download The system drops any active call on that telephone and downloads a new firmware load into the selected telephones The telephone is unusable until the download is complete and the telephone has reset Note In order not to saturate the IP network with download packets the system only downloads to a maximum of five IP telephones at any given time Telephones requiring download show an Element Manager status of Download Pending The UNISTIM Terminal Proxy Server UTPS initiates download as resources become available Device Configuration Guide 152 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features NN40020 300 153 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Button programming allows you to program the buttons on a telephone with internal and external autodialers and with programmed feature keys Assigned line Hunt group designator a
253. ity on the trunk if used for FAX and or modem information transfer is unreliable NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 59 Table 16 ATA settings Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Values Description Disconnect lt check box gt Default not selected supervision If you have a modem or fax machine that does not disconnect automatically when the caller disconnects you can select this feature the system then disconnects the line from the device when it receives the disconnect signal from the far end This feature is supported only by ASM8 modules Note The line must be configured as supervised guarded Refer to Properties in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 IP Terminal Details tab This is a single terminal display of the terminal information that is also shown in the Telephony Resources IP Terminal panel At start up the BCM acquires and retains a list of all IP terminals that have a registered DN This allows DN specific features such as Call Forward Hotdesking and voicemail to continue to function even if the telephone is disconnected If the number of IP Set DNs registered with the BCM exceeds the number of IP Client key codes applied selecting this check box prioritizes a set For example if the BCM is rebooted and the number of IP phones exceeds the number of IP client key codes the BCM retains the DN record of the sets with this field selected before retaining the
254. ivate speed dial 0 225 Auto Hold 73 33 autodumping 815 215 button programming 36 call log feature codes 215 Call Pickup 198 Call Transfer 206 change user speed dial 4 225 Conference Calls 222 current call 811 38 Display Voice Mail DN 985 34 Do Not Disturb DND 85 202 Do Not Disturb on Busy 85 201 Exclusive Hold 79 34 205 Group Listening 802 198 hunt groups 234 interrupt voice mail 987 40 line redirection 133 MCID 897 35 214 paging 60 63 219 privacy 83 202 programming memory buttons 226 SM password 550 84 sorted by name and activation code 33 start conference 3 222 trunk answer 800 199 Hold See also parked calls SWCA firmware downloading to IP telephones 151 first display 52 Force auto spd dial over ic conf 76 force download 151 Forward on busy DND on Busy 201 forwarding Device Configuration Guide 308 Index calls Do Not Disturb on Busy 201 Line Redirection 133 full set lock 65 Fwd no answer delay 45 Fwd no answer to 45 Fwd on busy to 45 G general settings answer keys 77 associate SWCA key to call 81 background music 75 conference tone 75 delayed ring transfer 76 directed pickup allow 77 Force auto spd dial over ic conf 76 Held reminder 76 Hold 76 identify alarm telephone 77 include I C calls when auto associating 81 include I C calls when invoked by Hold 82 maximum CLI per line 77 network callback timer 79 page tone allow 75 receiver volume 77
255. iwan Kingdom Access codes Direct dial digit 0 9 0 9 0 0 Dest code for 9 0 0 0 9 0 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ITU T ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog GATv1 N A N A N A GATv1 GATv1 trunk versions GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 Device Configuration Guide 270 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 76 Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan and United Kingdom parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Telephony feature settings United Functionality Attribute PRC Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Kingdom Conference tone No No No No No Yes supported Held line Off Off Off Off Off Immediate reminder Delay ring After 4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings transfer Transfer callback timeout After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings Network callback
256. ke a page announcement to all or to a specific group of telephones through the telephone speakers Zone 0 pages all zones To make a page announcement 1 Enter FEATURE 61 2 Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone External page Make a page announcement through an external loudspeaker system 1 Enter FEATURE 62 Internal and external page Make a page announcement through both your telephone speaker and an external loudspeaker system Zone 0 pages all zones 1 Enter FEATURE 63 2 Press 0 to 6 to page a specific zone Making announcements to individuals Voice Call Use the Voice Call feature if you want to make an announcement through a specific telephone speaker Voice Call is a standard system feature and does not require any programming to activate or deactivate the feature Feature constraints e Enable HF answerback if you want to respond to a voice call without lifting the handset e Telephones that do not have handsfree capability receive voice calls as ringing calls 7000 and 7100 digital phones 2001 IP phones and analog telephones Making a voice announcement Make a voice announcement or begin a conversation through the speaker of another telephone without first making the other telephone ring To make a voice announcement 1 Enter FEATURE 66 2 Speak through your handset using handsfree or a headset Note Voice calls made to portable handsets as well as the BST cordless handset occur as a ringin
257. l forward Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled Disabled 4 Disabled 4 delay 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled When you enter a value for call forward delay the field for number of rings becomes visible with the given default value Dial tone detection Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Set preferences Language UK English English Portuguese Spanish English English Danish first is VICAP French English English French French English default Spanish Spanish French Spanish Spanish Norwegian Turquish Swedish Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None None tone ONN blocking Analog VSC 1831 None None None None None None pulse BRI VSC None None None None None None None BRI per loop SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit SuprsBit Release reason Release text Simple Simple Simple None None None Simple Release On On On Off Off Off On code Tone 80 120 120 120 120 120 120 DTMF duration ms parameters Pause time 3 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 ms Interdigit 100 80 80 80 80 80 80 time ms Table 74 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 1 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong Ireland Access codes Direct dial digit 9 9 0 0 0 9 Dest code for 0 0 9 9 9 0 default route Device Configuration Guide 264 Cha
258. led before you enter the Hot desking feature If the target telephone does not have a headset the headset feature from the first telephone does not transfer during Hot desking Adding a headset to the target telephone after Hot desking is enabled does not correct the situation To enable headset function in this situation you must cancel Hot desking plug a headset into the target telephone and then re establish Hot desking Device Configuration Guide 148 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features e Ifthe target telephone has a headset but the originating telephone does not when Hot desking is activated the headset on the target telephone no longer works To correct this situation you must cancel Hot desking plug a headset into the originating telephone then re establish Hot desking at the target telephone Originating telephone Target telephone Head set feature active on target set after Hot desking Yes No No Using the Hot desking feature Hot desking requires that you set up a password and permission on the originating telephone and activate Hot desking from a target telephone Setting up a password and allowing Hot desking Set up the password on the originating telephone This process also allows you to determine if you want the telephone to be able to be diverted To set up a password and allow Hot desking 1 Enter FEATURE 999 2 Press ADMIN 3 Enter a new password or c
259. led has no internal lines available Press LATER to use the Ring Again or Message features Press PRIORITY to make a priority call Priority call The telephone to which you want to transfer a call is busy You are receiving a call from extension 221 Continue entering digits Press BKSP to delete incorrect digits Press or OK when you have finished Auto dial Continue to enter digits until the number is complete Press the volume bar or BKSP to erase an incorrect digit Press HOLD or OK when you finish Silent monitor While a call is being monitored you can choose to move to another Hunt group member OTHER join the current conversation JOIN exit the silent monitoring EXIT NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 237 Display prompt OTHERLEAWEES IT Access denied Already joined Already Parked Autodial full Button erased Call HHH YES HO Callina HHH PRIORITY LATER Call blocked Cameed HHH CALLBCE Came denied Came to CAHCL Cancel denied Can t rina again ClearedLIHEHAM HEST CLI COPY IHCOMF Description of error or action Silent monitor When you join a monitored call you can choose to move to another Hunt group member OTHER mute your telephone out of the current conversation this does not disconnect silent monitoring JOIN exit the silent monitoring EXIT Programming is busy or the feature
260. ling ms Differences between GATI G4x16 G8x16 New GATM4 8 Break Make__ Interdigit Market profile Localized and Legacy GATM4 8 time time time Bahrain Yes Legacy GATM4 8 NOT supported 25 17 700 will not function Brazil Yes DTMF CLID NOT supported on 66 34 800 GATI or Legacy GATM4 8 CALA No None 60 40 700 North American based A law Canada Yes None 60 40 700 Caribbean Yes None 60 40 700 Global No North None 60 40 700 American based A Law Hong Kong Yes Line Reversal NOT supported on 66 33 600 Legacy GATM4 8 Ireland Yes Legacy GATM4 8 NOT supported 66 34 1000 will not function Mexico Yes None 60 40 700 New Zealand No None 66 34 740 UK based telephony with Australian tones North America Yes None 60 40 700 Poland Yes None 66 33 700 PRC Yes DTMF CLID NOT supported on 34 66 700 GATI or Legacy GATM4 8 Taiwan Yes None 66 33 800 United Kingdom Yes None 66 34 740 Table 78 Transmission parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Transmission Loop length Tx CO gain Rx CO gain PCM coding adjustment short medium short medium Market profile scheme AC impedance capability long long Australia A law 220 Q 820 QII No N A 0 N A N A 6 dB N A 120 nF Bahrain A law 900 Q 2 16 uF Yes 0 3 dB 3 dB 3 3 dB 6 dB Brazil A law 600 900 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB CALA A law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Canada mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB Caribbean mu law 600 Q Yes 3 dB 0 0 0 0 3 dB
261. ll 2 The conference master enters FEATURE 807 or presses the NEWCALL softkey The conference is placed on hold 3 Dial the fourth party number The fourth party answers the call NN40020 300 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 223 4 The conference master enters FEATURE 3 to create a second 3 party conference Note A conference participant can also add parties to the conference by placing the conference on hold and calling a fourth party on a free intercom key The fourth caller is placed into conference when the participant enters FEATURE 3 The participant placing that call is then a conference master for a new 3 party conference Note This procedure can be repeated to include up to 18 conferencees Other conference features e Remove yourself from the conference permanently FEATURE 70 Note The other two callers remain connected Some external lines may not support this feature Ask your System Administrator Note For FEATURE 70 to work at least one of the calls must be incoming e Put the conference on hold at one telephone Press HOLD Note The other two callers can continue to talk to each other e Split a conference Press the line or intercom button of one caller to consult privately while the other caller is on hold Re establish the conference Press FEATURE 3 and select the held line e Disconnect one party a Press the line or intercom button of the
262. load Completed dialog box appears Click Close to close the dialog box The file is added to the File List Repeat steps 3 to 7 for each sound file you want to add to the BCM Restrictions on uploading files The audio files loaded onto BCM are loaded into the same disk space that is used for CallPilot messages Therefore every minute of audio file loaded onto the BCM reduces the amount of message storage space available to CallPilot by one minute To ensure the proper operation of both Music Manager and CallPilot the following restrictions are applied to uploading audio files The maximum size of any single sound file you load onto BCM is 5 MB The maximum amount of disk space allowed for Music Manager audio files is 300 MB To ensure there is sufficient disk space for CallPilot Music Manager Administration prevents you from uploading audio files if there is less than 1 GB of free disk space on BCM Note To minimize the time required to upload audio files record the audio files as a single channel mono using 8 bit samples at a rate of 8 kHz Deleting music from BCM To delete an audio file from BCM 1 2 Start the Music Manager Administration application Click the File Manager heading A list of audio files already on the BCM appears Click the Remove link beside the sound file you want to delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click OK The file is permanently removed from the BCM Repeat steps 3 and 4
263. local line regardless of whether you select the Invoke SWCA parking by Hold If the intercom call is assigned to a SWCA key automatically you can press the SWCA key to repark the call and make it available to other telephones in the group If you manually assign the intercom call to a SWCA key the call is parked automatically and it becomes available to the rest of the group Also refer to e Common dialing plan settings in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Call Park codes e Timers on page 78 Park timeout NN40020 300 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings 83 e Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 211 e System Wide Call Appearance SWCA Features Card ONN Blocking North American systems The outgoing name and number blocking codes for Analog and BRI lines can vary between service providers This panel allows you to enter the code provided so this feature works correctly over the network Figure 26 ONN Blocking codes for Tone Pulse and BRI trunks ONN Blocking Tone 141 ee Pulse h A v BRI ha o a Table 27 describes these trunks Table 27 ONN Blocking values Attribute Values Description Tone lt feature digits gt Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number display over an analog tone line Pulse lt feature digits gt Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number display over an analog p
264. m or user speed dial code oar WO N To program user speed dials at the telephone 1 Enter FEATURE 4 Enter a two digit code from 71 to 94 Specify the external line by pressing a line button a line pool button or the intercom button If you do not specify the external line the system uses the prime line for the DN Dial the telephone number you want to program up to 24 digits Press HOLD Record the code and number you programmed Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature by setting the telephone set lock to Partial or Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt Set Lock drop down list Programming memory buttons The telephones with programmable memory buttons are given a default set of button assignments when the system is set up The system administrator can change these defaults in system programming The user can also program memory buttons for autodial and feature codes as well as move button assignments to suit their working style If you want to remove a feature from a key either replace it with another feature or program it with a Blank external autodial The feature codes in this section allow you to program a memory key and to view the information currently on a key NN40020 300 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 227 Blocking user access You can block the user from using this feature by setting the telephone
265. me 193 ring volume 194 user speed dials programming 63 using features 216 call duration 213 logit 216 V view call log 812 38 viewing active services 870 36 viewing active service prompts 246 Viking 7406 telephone defaults 159 voice call activate 66 36 deny 88 36 deny at telephone 88 39 deny cancel 88 36 hunt groups 234 initiating call 66 37 voice mail call forward 209 call forward to 984 40 display DN 985 34 40 interrupt 987 36 40 intrusion controls 203 login 981 36 40 operator settings 982 36 set up operator 981 40 transfer to mailbox 986 40 voice message programming telephones 47 volume handset volume 77 Device Configuration Guide 316 Index Volume control 174 Volume control bar 165 174 Volume control buttons 169 volume of calls calllog 135 W Wait for dial tone 804 36 38 wait for dial tone external call feature 228 Welcome 23 NN40020 300
266. n 100 ms off 75 ms on 400 ms off Brazil 425 11 5 250 ms on 250 ms off CALA 480 620 21 250 ms on 250 ms off Canada 480 620 21 250 ms on 250 ms off Caribbean 480 620 21 250 ms on 250 ms off Denmark Silence France Silence Germany 425 11 5 240 ms on 240 ms off Global 480 620 11 5 250 ms on 250 ms off Holland 425 11 5 250 ms on 250 ms off Hong Kong 480 620 14 5 250 ms on 250 ms off Ireland 200 11 5 400 ms on Silence 350 ms off 17 5 225 ms on Silence 525 ms off Device Configuration Guide 260 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 72 Reorder Sheet 2 of 2 Reorder Level Tones per Tone Market profile Hz dBm0 Cadence Italy 425 8 200 ms on 200 ms off Mexico 480 620 21 250 ms on 250 ms off New Zealand 400 11 5 400 ms on Silence 350 ms off 17 5 225 ms on Silence 525 ms off North America 480 620 21 250 ms on 250 ms off Norway 425 11 5 200 ms on 200 ms off Poland 425 17 5 200 ms on 200 ms off PRC 450 11 5 700 ms on 700 ms off Spain 425 11 5 200 ms on 200 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms off 200 ms on 600 ms off Sweden 425 11 5 250 ms on 750 ms off Switzerland Continuous 11 5 200 ms on 200 ms off Taiwan 480 620 21 300 ms on 300 ms off United Kingdom 400 11 5 400 ms on Silence 350 ms off 17 5 225 ms on Silence 525 ms off Core parameters for market profiles The core parameters for the available
267. n as eKIMs The system supports a maximum of 12 eCAPs eCAPs can e monitor system telephone status e answer external calls on line buttons e monitor Hunt group appearances e support multiple appearances of a target line e answer external calls on up to 112 lines on a KIM 120 lines on a legacy CAP and extend calls to other BCM telephones e provide extra memory buttons for the 7316E digital phones Telephones with KIMs that are not configured in system programming allow only memory button programming on the modules In this case the KIM is known as an OKIM ordinary KIM There is no specific limit for the number of CAPs using OKIMs for the system except from a call processing point of view Legacy CAP A 7324 N plus one or two CAP N s Central Answer Position modules Hunt groups Use this feature to group your Contact Center operators so you can target specific types of calls to specific groups As well you can define how calls enter the group so you can control workload based on operator requirements Programming Besides the general line and telephone programming required for individual group members Hunt Group members and lines on page 105 provides details about setting up hunt groups and hunt group features Device Configuration Guide 234 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features The operation of some features varies if the BCM telephone is part of a Hunt group Table 63 shows the affected
268. n handsfree is active Use the Navigation keys to scroll through menus and lists appearing on the LCD display screen The outer part of this key cluster rocks for up down left and right movements Use the Send Enter key at the center of the Navigation key cluster to select a field to edit and to confirm menu selections In most menus you can use the Send Enter key instead of the Select soft key Hold Press the Hold key to put an active call on hold Tap the flashing line DN soft key to return to the caller on hold F Use the Expand to PC key to access external server applications Expand Press the Headset key to answer a call using the headset or to aac switch a call from the handset or handsfree to the headset The Headset LED indicator located on the Handsfree key lights Headset to indicate that the headset is in use Goodbye Use the Goodbye key to terminate an active call NORTEL i When a message is waiting the red Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator flashes Also when the ringer sounds this indicator flashes P a NORTEL When your IP Phone 1140E firmware is being updated the blue Feature Status Lamp indicator flashes To find out if additional features are supported contact your administrator Device Configuration Guide 176 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones Table 57 IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E
269. n outgoing dial string 4 Intercom Keys Confirm or change how many intercom keys you want the telephone to have The default is 2 Programming note At least one intercom key must be defined to allow internal calls Two intercom keys are recommended for conference calling Model 7000 and 7100 telephones are automatically assigned two intercom keys so users can alternate between two active calls 5 Control Set If the telephone uses any schedules other than the Normal schedule ensure that a DN for a control set is entered 6 First Display Choose Name if you want the caller s name to be the first information displayed Set this field to Number to display the caller s telephone number first or to Line to display the calling line number first 7 Auto Called ID Select the check box if you want the user to see the name and number display of the telephone they call 8 Next Step Capabilities tab on page 52 Job aid Assigning intercom I C buttons keys The Intercom keys attribute assigns the number of intercom buttons on a telephone Intercom buttons provide access to a maximum of eight internal or external lines and line pools The user presses the intercom key to answer internal calls or to select a line or line pool to place a call Lines configured for Ring only also appear on intercom buttons e Ifyou assign a prime line to an intercom key you are immediately connected to a line when you press the button or lift the han
270. nces on page 134 Telephone memory button programming on page 136 User speed dials on page 137 Outgoing call restrictions on page 137 There are a number of different models of digital telephones The Norstar legacy telephones are supported by the BCM The current models of digital telephones include the 7000 7100 7208 7316 7316E and 7316E KIMs digital phones and the 74XX cordless digital phones Device Configuration Guide 124 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Digital telephone DN record overview Prerequisites Ensure the following has occurred before you start this procedure Modules are installed and you understand which ports and DNs can be assigned to your telephones Lines and routes programming are created for dialing the local PSTN Target lines are created where required by the type of trunks you are using Note The line must be configured as supervised guarded Refer to Properties in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Appropriate restriction filters are created to allow or disallow out dialed calls Call security Restriction filters in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Telephony system features have been programmed and you understand which features are not available to all users Global telephony settings on page 73 Using the DN panels On each panel on the DNs list add or mod
271. nd 1 35 send message code 1 37 view 65 35 messages key 170 messaging express 980 34 model user preferences 62 modem ATA Dve 58 monitoring answer DNs 200 transferred calls 211 monitoring mode silent monitor 84 monitoring other telephones answer DNS 49 moving Hunt group members 106 IP telephones keep DN alive 59 line buttons 81 34 lines 193 telephones See also automatic telephone relocation TI music cancel 86 33 on hold 76 playing 86 39 turn on 86 33 mute button 169 key 166 Mute key 175 MWI voice message set on telephone 47 MWI message waiting indicator 166 171 N name first display 52 hunt groups 102 name and number blocking cancel 819 35 initiating 819 35 Navigation keys 175 navigation keys 165 170 network callback timer 79 night schedule 31 NN40020 300 Index 311 no answer autologging 56 no autologging 56 number first display 52 O OLI number private 45 OLI number public 44 On hold See also hold 76 one button dialing see Autodial 225 ONN blocking initiate at telephone 819 39 canceling 819 35 initiating 819 35 operator voice mail 981 40 overflow answer key settings 78 hunt groups 103 overflow routing call routing 32 routing service 32 overrides restrictions at telephone 68 37 P page auto hold for incoming page 53 combined 63 35 equipment 219 external 62 35 external equipment 219 initiate 60 35 int
272. nd push up Answer DNs Other types of telephones may have a Handsfree ke assigned to the lowest key In that case intercom buttons start above at Figure 40 Adding an intercom button Line Line Line Line OOO00000 If you add an intercom button the Answer DNs move up ED In this case giving you one less line button T Ine F e j g Answer DN J E a o e z Intercom f FABRE RE SISSI Line ntercom f a Line FIEIE z Line Line Line Line Sisisislsieisis Line Line Line Answer DN Answer DN om ERR Intercom f Intercom ermal oatata U aL Q o A pry Adding an Answer DN Line Line Line Line Line BIGIGIEIETETEIE oo00g00000 Line If you add an Answer DN the system overwrites the button above the last assigned Answer DN In this case giving you one less line button Line Line a 5 mimis eiee Line J kl a i 2 Answer DN Fi Intercom i ntercom LE Line Line Line Line Line Line Line Line GOO JHE Line Answer DN k Answer DN f er DN 5 p a Intercom GRRR Intercom If
273. nd telephony management capability to small and medium sized businesses The BCM system e integrates voice and data capabilities VoIP gateway functions and QoS data routing features into a single telephony system e enables you to create and provide telephony applications for use in a business environment NN40020 300 Chapter 1 Getting started withBCM 17 BCM features BCM50 R2 supports the complete range of IP telephony features offered by existing BCM products Note You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes no additional hardware is required e VoIP Gateway H 323 and SIP Up to 12 VoIP trunks e VoIP Telephony Clients Up to 32 VoIP Telephony clients supporting the range of Nortel IP Phones BCM applications BCM50 R2 supports many applications provided on the existing BCM platforms Note You enable the following features by entering the appropriate keycodes no additional hardware is required e Voice Messaging for standard voice mail and auto attendant features e Unified Messaging providing integrated voice mail management between voice mail and common e mail applications e Fax Suite providing support for attached analog fax devices e Voice Networking features e LAN computer telephony engine CTE e IP Music e Intelligent Contact Center Device Configuration Guide 18 Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM Symbols and conventions used in this guide
274. ne capabilities 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab 1 In the bottom frame on the Capabilities tab confirm or change how the telephone functions with system features 2 Handsfree settings e Handsfree Select the setting that is appropriate for the type of telephone e HF answerback Select the check box only if the telephone allows handsfree and is in an environment where speakers do not cause disruption 3 Page settings e Page zone If you have various areas that receive different page announcements place the telephone in the appropriate zone e Paging Select the check box if the telephone can send or receive page messages Device Configuration Guide 132 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Programming note Telephones without speakers such as models 7000 and 7100 allow page messages to be sent but not to be received 4 Interrupting calls DND on Busy Select the check box if you want the caller to receive a Do Not Disturb message when the telephone is busy Ensure this feature is selected when the Fwd Busy field has a value Priority call Select the check box if you want the user to be able to forward calls that alert at the telephone where the call was forwarded even when that telephone is busy Intrusion protection level Select an intrusion level if you want the user to be able to break into calls on other telephones The
275. ng user speed dial changing background music numbers e changing Privacy e programming feature buttons e changing Do Not Disturb e moving line buttons e using Ring Again e changing the display language using Call Forward all calls e changing dialing modes e using Send Message Automatic Pre and Standard e using Trunk Answer Dial e activating Services e using Voice Call Deny e saving a number with Saved Number Redial Allow Last lt check box gt Allow or disallow access to the Last Number Redial feature Number Allow Saved lt check box gt Allow or disallow access to the Saved Number Redial feature Number Device Configuration Guide 66 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 19 Restrictions table fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description Allow Link lt check box gt Allow or disallow access to the Link feature which is a host signaling option Set Restrictions tab You can assign restrictions that apply to a specific telephone record You also can assign a different restriction filter for Normal service and for one or more of six other schedules that allows the user to have different access at different times of the day See System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 for more information about schedules Figure 20 Set Restrictions tab panel Details for DN 230 Set Restrictions Line Set Restrictions Restrictions
276. nswer DNs buttons intercom buttons and handsfree buttons cannot be changed through button programming These latter features appear in read only format on the Button Programming table During startup the installer chooses one of the available telephony template PBX or DID Each profile has a default features set that assigns automatically to the programmable buttons on telephones plugged into the system unless you configure different settings in the DN record The default features are listed by telephone model in the following sections e Rules of default button assignment on page 153 e 7316E digital phone button defaults on page 154 e 7316 digital phone button defaults on page 156 e 7406 digital phone button defaults on page 159 e 7208 digital phone button defaults on page 157 e 7100 digital phone button defaults on page 158 e 7000 digital phone button defaults on page 158 e IP telephone 2004 and 2050 Software Phone button defaults on page 159 e IP telephone 2002 button defaults on page 161 e TP telephone 2001 button defaults on page 162 e IP telephone 2007 button defaults on page 163 e IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults on page 167 e IP Phone 1120E and IP Phone 1140E on page 171 e WLAN handset 2210 2211 2212 button defaults on page 176 e DMC Portables 413X 414X Europe only on page 179 Rules of default button assignment e
277. nt Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Scheduled Services e Telset interface CONFIG gt Services The Scheduled Services Settings and Schedules panel has three distinct areas for configuration e The table in the top frame allows you to determine which schedules are active for the system for routing restriction and ringing schedules e The table in the top frame to the right sets the time periods within each schedule for each day of the week e The table in the bottom frame allows you to rename schedules Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panels Related panels or tasks Feature Configuring scheduled service Alternate routes for routing Control telephone on page 229 on page 31 schedules in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Configuring schedule names and Ring Groups Line Settings on timers on page 30 page 99 Restriction filters in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Restrictions Line and Remote in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Restrictions main tab on page 65 Class of Service table in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Click the navigation tree heading to access general information about Ring Group management Schedules are activated and deactivated through control telephones Refer to Control
278. ntrast e high quality speaker phone e volume control keys for adjusting ringer speaker handset and headset volume Device Configuration Guide 172 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones e six specialized feature keys Quit Directory Message Inbox Shift Outbox Services Copy e six call processing fixed keys Mute Handsfree Goodbye Expand to PC Headset Hold e gigabit Ethernet ports e built in gigabit Ethernet switch for shared PC access e headset jack with an On Off key e USB port to support a keyboard or mouse e automatic network configuration e hearing aid compatibility NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 173 Figure 58 IP Phone 1120E User defined feature keys Feature Status Lamp Visual Alerter Message Waiting indicator Handset High resolution graphical display screen Speaker Soft keys Navigation keys Message Inbox key Shift Outbox key Directory key Copy key Services key Quit Stop key Goodbye key Expand to PC key Headset key Hold key Volume control Mute key Handsfreecke Dialpad Note If supported by your server the Feature Status Lamp provides a user defined alert Contact your system administrator to find out if this feature is available for you Note The IP Phone 1140E has wireless headset support using a Bluetooth 1 2
279. o the call Once the session is established a number of display key prompts allows the supervisor to silently monitor the call or to break into the call to provide support or instruction Refer to Common display prompts on page 235 4 The display commands under the prompts allow you to use the display keys to break into the call or exit and move to another DN Note Some countries require that all monitoring is preceded by a tone gt before monitoring begins Device Configuration Guide 110 Chapter 15 Monitoring Hunt Groups Note If an agent is on conference call you cannot monitor the hunt gt group call Monitoring with IP telephones On calls over a VoIP trunk where both the Hunt group call and the monitoring call are from IP telephones full IP domain calls the agent hears a click when the supervisor starts and ends a monitor session Note For information on reporting Hunt Group metrics refer to the BCM 4 0 Call Detail Recording Guide N0027926 Also refer to e Configuring Hunt Groups on page 101 e Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 109 e Hunt Group Metrics in the Administration Guide NN40020 600 NN40020 300 111 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services The following information describes how to set up the Hospitality services feature The following paths indicate where to configure hospitality services in Element Manager and through
280. o work that is there must be no active indicator showing beside the button The system still interprets the key as an Answer DN and any key press still interacts with other features Therefore even though you are making an internal call other autodial actions do not occur As well none of the autodial visual prompts occur The button only prompts if a call is alerting at the other telephone based on the answer key level assigned to the system Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 78 You can program both an Answer DN and an autodial key for the same DN on the same telephone Device Configuration Guide 130 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones Configuring Capabilities and Preferences The following paths indicate where to configure capabilities and preferences in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs e Telset interface CONFIG gt Terminals and Sets Programming reference e Capabilities and Preferences main tab on page 50 e Job aid Assigning intercom I C buttons keys on page 130 To configure capabilities and preferences 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the DN that you want to modify Prime Line Enter the facility that you want the telephone to use if no line line access code or routing code is dialed before a
281. occur by at least s before the system notifies you of a time difference from the NTP server if the system automatically checks with the NTP server NTP key ID lt 1 65 534 gt ID for accessing the NTP NTP key string lt 8 characters gt Control key corresponding to ID for accessing the NTP Current Date and Time Date and time lt country region specific date and time format gt The current date and time Year lt numeric gt The current year in yyyy format Time zone lt drop down list gt The appropriate time zone for the location of this system The Time zone must be set for software updates to be applied Daylight Savings Time lt read only gt The appropriate mode for the Time zone Selected The system automatically updates the time twice a year Cleared The system never updates the time for Daylight Savings Time Note North American Daylight Savings Time rules change in 2007 Four time zones have been added to support regions that do not want to switch to the new time zone rules The time zones are identified pre 2007 DST If the system is to synchronize with an NTP Server or trunk check the following 1 Set Date and Time Source to NTP or Trunk 2 Inthe NTP server address field enter the IP address of the NTP server 3 Set the number of seconds between synchronizations in normal operations Synch Every Device Configuration Guide
282. ogramming 49 restrictions 78 answer keys answer DNs 200 autodial feature 129 basic enhanced extended 77 Contact Center warning 77 answer keys See answer DNs 78 answering calls answer other telephones 200 Call Pickup 198 conference calls 222 trunk answer 199 appear and ring telephone line assignment 46 appear only telephone line assignment 46 appearance type line assignments 46 appearances line assignments 46 appearances telephone line assignment 46 ASM message indicator 58 ATA answer timer 58 GASM disconnect supervision 59 Device Configuration Guide 304 Index location setting 58 tones 58 ATA Dvc ATA 58 ATA2 ATA answer timer 58 ATA tones 58 ATA use 58 message indicator 58 Auto called ID 52 auto hold SWCA keys 291 auto hold for incoming page 53 auto hold allow disallow 54 autobumping call log 815 34 39 autodial answer DNs 129 button programming 62 external 1 33 force auto spd dial over ic conf 76 internal 2 33 memory buttons 226 overview 225 autodumping calllog 215 automatic calllog 135 dial 192 Hold See auto hold 204 automatic dial dialing options 56 automatic for life of call SWCA keys 81 auxiliary ringer Directed Pickup 198 hunt groups 104 overview 194 programming 100 telephone programming 56 auxiliary services ringer 194 background music at telephone 86 33 cancel 86 33 on hold 76 on telephone 86 39 programming 75 blocking calls 202
283. on page 258 e Reorder on page 259 Table 68 Localized Dial and Quiet Dial Dial Quiet Dial Level per Level per Tone Tones _ Tone Market profile Localized Tones Hz dBm0O Cadence Hz dBm0 Cadence Australia Yes 400 13 Continuous 400 21 Continuous Bahrain Yes 330 440 16 Continuous 330 440 20 Continuous Brazil Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 18 Continuous CALA No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America Canada Yes 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous Caribbean No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America Denmark Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 19 5 Continuous France Yes 440 11 5 Continuous 400 17 5 Continuous Germany Yes 425 11 5 200 ms on 425 17 5 200 ms on 275 ms off 275 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms on 275 ms off 275 ms off 200 ms on 200 ms on 875 ms off 875 ms off Global No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America Holland Yes 425 11 5 Continuous 425 19 5 Continuous Hong Kong Yes 440 350 11 5 Continuous 440 350 17 6 Continuous lreland Yes 425 14 5 Continuous 425 17 5 Continuous Italy Yes 350 425 8 5 Continuous 350 425 17 5 Continuous Mexico No North 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous America New Zealand Yes 400 13 Continuous 400 21 Continuous North America Yes 440 350 17 Continuous 440 350 25 Continuous
284. only Pub Received Target lines only These fields reflect the settings defined under target lines These are the digit strings that the system uses to identify a call for this telephone Refer to Trunk Line Data main panel in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Actions Add To add a line to a telephone 1 On the System DNs table Line Access tab choose the DN record where you want to add lines 2 Under the Assigned Lines table in the bottom panel click Add Enter a line number in the dialog box 4 Click OK to save the line to the list Device Configuration Guide 48 Chapter6 DN records parameters Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Values Description Delete To delete a line from a telephone 1 On the System DNs table Line access tab choose the DN record where you want to delete lines 2 On the Assigned Lines table in the bottom panel select a line you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK to confirm the selection Line Pool Access tab Use the Line Pool Access tab to add line pools to a telephone record Figure 9 Line Pool Access tab Details for DN 354 Line Assignment Line Pool Accessi Answer DNs Line Pools Line Pool These shared pools of lines allow many users to use fewer lines for connections where dedicated lines are not practical or not de
285. onnect to an external music source on the data network This external music source must be connected to your network and must be accessible to the BCM The external music source must also produce a streaming audio signal that is compatible with the BCM Note A third party application that supports streaming G 711 is required If you use an external music source connected to the BCM refer to the BCM50 2 0 Installation and Maintenance Guide NN40020 302 for information about how to connect the external music source If you use an external IP music source connected on the data network refer to the documentation that came with the music source for information about how to connect the music source to the data network Device Configuration Guide 294 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source Selecting the music source After you have connected the music source you must select the music source you want to use To select the music source 1 Click Configuration gt Applications gt Music The Music panel appears See Figure 64 2 Configure the Music parameters Refer to the information in Table 91 NN40020 300 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 295 Figure 64 Music panel Music Music Source Streaming Server Music Manager Music Manager control Launch Music Manager v Server 192 168 249 28 Server RTP port 9716 Steam Type 1G 711U Law v Frames per packet 3 w RTP port on BCM
286. or 0 9 0 9 0 9 default route Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 102 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 NI 2 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk protocol ETSI 102 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 NI 2 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG DMS100 ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN MCDN DMS250 MCDN MCDN 4ESS MCDN Global analog N A GATv1 N A GATv1 N A GATv1 trunk versions GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 NN 40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 267 Table 75 Mexico New Zealand North America Norway Poland and PRC parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile New North Functionality Attribute Italy Mexico Zealand America Norway Poland Conference tone Yes No Yes No No Yes supported Held line reminder Off Off Immediate Off Off After 30 seconds Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings After4 rings After 15 rings Telephony feature Transfer callback After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 15 rings settings timeout Network callback 30 30 30 N A 30 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000
287. or the specific product to find out how to use the codes on each type of telephone Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 1 of 4 Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name Alarm time room set 875 0 Speed Dial Activate Alarm time Cancel 875 0 Button inquiry Alarm time HS admin set 877 1 Messages Send Autodial External 1 Messages Cancel Send Autodial Internal 2 1 Autodial External Auto Hold 73 2 Ring Again Auto Hold Cancel 73 2 Ring Again Cancel Background Music 86 2 Autodial Internal Background Music Cancel 86 3 Conference Call Button inquiry 0 3 Memory buttons Program Contact Center agent login log out 904 4 Call Forward Contact Center agent make busy ready 908 4 Call Forward Cancel Contact Center queue status 909 4 Speed Dial Add change Call Charge Indication 818 5 Last Number Redial Call Duration Timer 77 501 Language Primary Call Forward 4 502 Language Alternate Call Forward Cancel 4 503 Language Alternate 2 Call Forward to Voice Mail 984 504 Language Alternate 3 Call Information 811 510 Time zone readjust IP telephones Device Configuration Guide 34 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 2 of 4
288. ore attempting to activate this feature 2 Enter FEATURE 999 3 Press DIVERT Device Configuration Guide 150 Chapter 20 Global VoIP features 4 Enter the DN of the telephone you want to divert to this telephone Note If the originating telephone does not allow Hot desking a Not allowed prompt displays This prompt also occurs if the originating telephone is on a call when the diversion command is issued 5 Enter the password of the diverted telephone The buttons on your telephone mimic the buttons configured on the diverted set The diverted telephone indicates that it is diverted and it cannot be used until Hot desking is cancelled Cancelling Hot desking You can cancel Hot desking from the originating or target telephone To cancel Hot desking 1 Ensure that both telephones are on hook before cancelling Hot desking Note There can be up to a ten second delay after the call ends before the system allows you to cancel Hot desking This period can vary depending on the call type 2 Cancel the feature Diverted telephone Press the display key under the CANCEL prompt Live telephone a Access FEATURE 999 b Enter the password c Press CANCEL Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone If the IP telephone connects to the system from a different time zone than the system you can reset the telephone to display the correct local time To configure a new time zone on a remote IP telephone
289. ortables 413X 414X Europe only 000 0c e eee eee 179 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 183 Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition 187 Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition main window 187 Menu pat commands Seek in cee atin erk Ee oie Bae ae ee eo lek ash 188 Buton DOCG 1nc6scedcnbeiaae nde krne aoe Gade Pees bene aww 190 Pun labe a4 teiee ache ean woes Hew AAE 190 Chapter 23 Telephony features oc ccecnreccned ceeds ean aed ieseeeaaserrenies 191 Features to set up telephone set features 0 cee eee eee eee 191 CONMASL ACIUEHIGNT seep cikds Gi eiy deeded ess deg re aeebdeeee dence ded 191 Select how you dial your Galle nnn esci ecwd se cae da cnenew deeded awa 192 Choosing the language for the telephone display 20000 192 MOVING NE BONONS 5 2605 cede beaS 24s oR RRS RER ESSERE ES ERED REESE 193 POCONO fr ctkeed ie den eieae ra aa etek aE 193 Programming distinctive ringing 2 0 2 20cccseeeewoe sees ooee eee Da ee 194 ig VON seater od AEAN ewes Sebi sande tooled Seam 194 PUY NGG oi cucatwaker gaged sane decks rw eSEE PATRE koes REE 194 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering CallS 00eeeeeeeeeee 197 Answering calls directed to your telephone 02 20 e eee eens 197 Configuring handsfree and handsfree answerback 00000 0 eee 197 Answering calls not d
290. ou also can use these panels to remove programming from a button making it blank NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 61 Figure 17 Button Programming and CAP KIM Button Programming tabbed panels Details for DN 325 Capabilities SWCA Call Group Proferencond IP Terina Datiked Button Programming Table iB tton Programming User Speed Dial U1 Call Forward I A U4 Page General U2 Conterence Lr U5 Intercom U3 Last Number H Ub Intercom 12 Blank 09 DEN 10 IP Ser f a a 08 Voice 11 Blank O7 Voice Model 1140E Assigned lines Hunt group designators Answer DNs buttons Intercom buttons and Handsfree buttons cannot be changed through these panels They appear in read only format Device Configuration Guide 62 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 17 describes the possible settings for telephone buttons Table 17 Button programming fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Model 7100 If you have not yet connected a telephone choose the 7208 model of the telephone This creates a number of 7310 7316 acu based on the telephone capabilities 7316E This setting reflects whatever you set on the main table 7324 This field is read only if the telephone is already attached or registered to the system 2004 2050 e 7310 also refers to the cordless 7406 cordless digital 2002 phones 2001 e 7316E indicates both a
291. oups panel Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description Ring Groups Ring Group lt read only gt This is a list of the available ring groups for the system Members DN lt DN digits gt These are the DNs for the telephones that are part of the ringing group selected in the table in the top frame NN40020 300 Chapter 13 Creating ring groups 99 Table 31 Ring groups panel Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Actions Add N A W In the top panel click the ring group where you want to add telephones In the bottom panel click Add The Add Member dialog box appears Enter a DN that you want to associate with the ring group Click OK to save the new members setting Delete R OCN In the top panel click the ring group where you want to delete telephones On the Members table click one or more DNs that you want to delete from the group Click Delete Click Yes Ring Groups Line Settings The Line Settings tab allows you to schedule where calls coming in on a specific line or target line ring during a scheduled period The following paths indicate where to configure line settings for ring groups in Element Manager and through Telset Administration Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Ring Groups Telset interface CONFIG gt Lines There are two frames on this panel The top panel displays all lines th
292. our telephone Conference calls FEATURE 3 A conference call cannot be parked on a SWCA key You cannot conference a call that is parked on a SWCA key until it is unparked To conference a call parked on a SWCA key 1 Press the SWCA key to unpark the call 2 Press HOLD 3 Press FEATURE 3 to create the conference If a conference call is created from two SWCA associated calls and then a transfer occurs by the conference master releasing the call the call is associated to only the currently associated SWCA keys if any on the slaves If aconference call is created from two SWCA associated external calls and then a transfer occurs by the conference master releasing the call the remaining call between the lines and trunks are not be associated with any SWCA key Device Configuration Guide 292 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys NN40020 300 293 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source The Music on Hold and Background Music features provide music to users For these features to function properly a music source must be connected to the BCM There are three ways you can connect the music source to the BCM e You can connect an external music source to the BCM e You can use the IP Music feature to connect to Music Manager Music Manager is an audio player application that resides on the BCM and provides a streaming audio signal to the BCM system e You can use the IP Music feature to c
293. ovide a telephone with access to internal and external lines and to line pools Control Set DN lt any telephone DN gt None DN 221 lt start DN gt The Control telephone attribute allows you to define a DN that acts as a control telephone A control telephone is used to enable disable Scheduled Services such as Restriction Services for the telephones to which it is assigned For more information about services see System schedule settings and services scheduling on page 29 You can assign several control sets for your system but you can only assign one control telephone per DN If you change the Start DN this number reflects that change Device Configuration Guide 52 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Table 13 Capabilities and Preferences tabbed panel Sheet 2 of 2 Description Attribute Values First display Name Number Line Determine what call display information appears first This feature depends on the services to which you subscribe Call Display information can contain the name of the caller the number of the caller the name of the line in your BCM50 2 0 where the call enters or all For each telephone you can determine what information displays first See also Programming incoming CLID in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Tips The Call Information feature displays and toggles between the name and line number for Call Display info
294. ow in the log The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone company and the local telephone company of the caller Auto bumping Ensure that you have auto bumping FEATURE 815 enabled on any telephones that have call logging active otherwise the logs fill up and subsequent calls are not logged Device Configuration Guide 216 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls Logit Store caller information for your current call in your Call Log Activate feature FEATURE 813 NN40020 300 217 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls The following topics describe the features the system user can configure or use to place outgoing calls Blocking user access to feature programming Protecting outgoing call privacy Deal with a busy signal on an internal call on page 218 Other ways of communicating with internal users on page 218 Dialing shortcuts on page 224 Blocking user access to feature programming You can block the user from using this feature key by setting the set lock for the telephone to Full Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions gt Set Lock drop down list To block user access to feature programming 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets select the DN record for the telephone for which you want to restrict Click the Restrictions tab In the S
295. owing you to control optional equipment with the DTMF Long Tones feature e You can have a maximum of 50 digital telephones or a maximum of 60 IP telephones in a page zone e Business Series Terminals note If the active call is on mute when the page comes in it does not return to mute when the call comes off hold after the page This is only applicable if the set has Auto Hold for incoming page enabled Sets cannot receive a page if the set is in use Device Configuration Guide 220 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls Configuring system settings for page Page is a standard system feature However there are two system settings that you must confirm or change depending on your requirements To configure the system settings for the page feature in Element Manager navigate to Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings To configure system settings for page 1 On the Feature Settings panel select the Page tone check box 2 Select the Page tone check box if you want a tone to sound before a page announcement or if you want the page announcement to just occur 3 On the Timers panel in the Page timeout drop down list select the amount of time before the page automatically disconnects Setting the page timeout Page announcements are programmed to time out after a preselected amount of time that is set by your System Administrator under the Timers heading Configuring telephone settin
296. ows the user to change the restriction service mode 873 Routing Service Allows the user to change the routing service mode 88 Voice call deny Allows the user to deny other users from Voice Calling their set 897 MCID Malicious Call Identification Allows the user to query the system for information about a call within 25 seconds after the user hangs up but before the caller hangs up 501 Language choice Provides a menu that allows you to choose the language for the display prompts on the telephone 7 Contrast Digital telephones only Sets the level of contrast for the telephone display 904 CC agent login log out Allows the user to log in or out of ACD 905 CC supervise Allows the CC supervisor to monitor CC agent calls 906 CC supervisor help Allows the CC agent to request help from a CC supervisor 907 CC activity code Allows the CC agent or supervisor to enter activity codes for reporting 908 CC agent make Not Allows the user to indicate ready or Not ready status on ACD ready ready 909 CC skillset status Allows the user to view the status of queued calls on ACD 980 Voice mail Leave Allows the user to log into voice mail box to leave a message Message Device Configuration Guide 40 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 4 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt 981 Voice mail login Opens your m
297. ox gt This variable indicates whether the auxiliary ringer if installed also rings when Ringing service is on Tips e The default ringing telephone is 221 Start DN This means that all lines ring at telephone 221 when Ringing service is on e If you have an auxiliary ringer programmed to ring for calls on an external line and you transfer a call on that line without announcing the transfer the auxiliary ringer rings for the call transfer Also refer to e Configuring scheduled service on page 31 NN40020 300 101 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups The Hunt Groups panel allows you to set up call groups that are assigned a common hunt group DN for incoming calls The calls then are distributed to the member telephones The following paths indicate where to configure hunt groups in Element Manager and through Telset Administration e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Hunt Groups e Telset interface CONFIG gt System prgrming gt Hunt Groups Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel tabs Tasks Hunt Groups system setup on page 102 Configuring the Hunt Group general settings on page 105 Hunt Group members and lines on page 105 Monitoring Hunt Groups on page 109 Also refer to Programming name display outgoing in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Silent Monitor on page 84
298. phone ssccicccaacsscicceys cavecpesissanereastacaiepeasicnedtessacauecsenaeeeet 209 TODO UST BCG S nae tissues ies cee a 209 Toue CaP Olosan cs Asaciemin a hededsamn hdadapmaies coma ettamea lo ets 210 Topak A Saline ciemamcnmmuciaaiei iene 210 TONTA C Apak CA Renee eee emer re rrr ere et cern eee terre otra en ee eee eer 211 Te comigure the SWCA system COnvals sssini iri a 211 TaD ASAD a ices tates aualeisgetict abate taal aeemaeiome 213 Fe reeet Call GG Bere ae EEEE E bimini 214 Feature configuration Making calls 0000 e eee eee eee 217 To block user access to feature programming siccccccesscccccessecceseiesscssacansecmsanareccenananee 217 To allow a telephone to make priority Calle cis coc cess iesce stead sce ceetieecicesssecce tees vases teens 218 To configure system setlings TOF DEG sincisceisicesdsespoussaiccs sntaaseeaisacaecesnsuncniecs eanalace netens 220 To configure telephone settings for page cccesseenceeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeneeeseeneeneeeess 220 To make a page AUG ITNT sacccd es ct ascads cozy ence ceceas Sacks posigank ieee inin iiaa an 221 To make a yoi ANOUN GOIN asieissttrsicnsdieareed imac tis andielieatonaeas nerenanienine 221 Te Set Up amp S party conference Call ciscisacessniaiausiiedacaunsigsatnavechassicanes piatusdersataamelioaaa mats 222 To set up an Ad Hoc Multiparty conference call ccessecceeeeeseeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 222 Gees oy lasi NUMB redd Perea perererret reer rice errr
299. pnastaudess cecneiennses bo ORteeeocaerenne Ebre 211 Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons 0 0000 c eee eee 211 CANO ON cds Besta eaa a ae hw carla Fe a a aasi wn Nace ae gh or ae hee 213 Call display Intorimaton eigo recer se oodee dase eae s bEees hee eewos 213 Call darom MING lt 1e85 ei 54 de dety eens FOE Ee eee eee tense the eeae hed 213 Time and date Spay acascae sede eh oe oe eae oae Oe RS TE ESERSE 213 Malicious Caller ID MCID 206 c5ccscce00sGeiton is been tsdedivesc cade 214 COND cei haat ceeded ah nace E a ee eee aaa Ba ae O aan ae wee 214 LOOM EE EEEE AAE E Che be eRe teehee eee nas 216 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls 0000s eee e eee eee 217 Blocking user access to feature programming 0020 cee eee eee 217 Protecting outgoing call privaty voc ccnees co ei cree ee wee eee eke ee er ireas 217 Deal with a busy signal on an internal call 1 2 2 2 0 0 ee 218 PROMO ccccds conn gies SHRStS ee ORR ELEREN ONO Trb wen cew ees 218 ANG AGAIN 6 022 d0c cc hetcom ss eee sade boner dante dome s cded emer Sean 218 Other ways of communicating with internal users 0000000 cea 218 Loango a MESOJE n6cestGrcnbeuetenicinete au den ea araa 219 Fogel eera Goats sees teehee iacrs AE ehe hl ol eat dames Pea ceed 219 Making announcements to individuals Voice Call 00005 221 Create a conference Call icsakee cuss sabes es sede nae eaves eaten ARK 222 LOTSA pc cns ey des
300. pport disconnect supervision for digital loop start trunks Ground start trunks work with T1 only By configuring lines as ground start the system recognizes when a call is released at the far end E amp M T1 and E amp M Use this type of trunk line to create simple network connections to other phone systems This trunk always operates in a disconnected supervised mode PRI ISDN interface with 23 B channels and 1 D channel at 1 544 Mbps in Europe 30 B channels and 1 D channels at 2 048 Mbps These lines give you incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network and are autoanswer trunks NN40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 285 Table 90 Analog and digital trunk types and descriptions Sheet 2 of 2 Trunk types Description Digital trunk types BRI ISDN loop that provides both T and S reference point loops These loops can support both network T and S loops and terminal equipment S loop connections This type of line provides incoming and outgoing access to an ISDN network ETSI ISDN BRI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute specification for BRI ISDN service BRI provides two bearer B channels operating at 64 kbits s and a data D channel that operates at 16 kbits s Use the D channel to carry call information Like loop start trunks you can configure BRI lines as manual answer or autoanswer DASS2 British Trunk provides multiline IDA interconne
301. profile attributes icsccsenscdcsscvses tee ee nano rede ross 251 interlace availabilty sr ccev veneer ee bere bi cide eegees babes ae kerais 251 Analog WI Sore oe wc Gah uth ee OE ow Ae death eengn Sete 251 Digital MCHACES 222000 cat Steet eer eOEE OSS ERR ESE Phe eB 252 Tones and CAUERESS 44sec 2asa odes e584 HE ORE RESTORES E ENE ON ST ES4 RHEE 253 Core parameters for market profiles 4 lt cacee ee ected aba wuss bananas aes 260 Analog Trunk parameters opi cavceueke seeleeeee ewer ceGeeoewhi sees een ee 272 GASMB parameteiS a 5 tts pat es eee hehe Sebi heed we beni Sees 276 GASI parame lelS cacatgucses hadGa REGGE LACSEA ROR ES ERODE SE PORE ERERED 278 ATA2 param S cares cade ves ares aresebee sass seeeseSonetenredaancned 280 ee OG sas edie etek aria i oh aan WR am ais weld ead E E E TE 280 AISA DA 23 deer cn teed aaeh ieee eee ee rR AE ERE SE e DESEES 282 SO ine SOMES orr rerni rin Sey ae AET ko Ran PATER ESLER HEA 283 Analog and digital trunk types cc ccsdcucaeas eokses bode eae ees RRR HORRRS ETS 284 Chapter 29 About System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys 5 287 Managing calls using SWCA keyS 000 ccc eee eee 288 Other features that affect how you use SWCA 0 000 290 Chapter 30 Configuring the music Source 0 cee e eee eee eee 293 selecting the MUSIC SOUIGS aio cecs sr ehoceeice chan eedsededieielscieiviad 294 Configuring Music Manager sce caceates cace Nek ea eee ea eRe
302. pter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio 189 Save Current Settings Save the settings from a current device in a designated file Click File gt Save Current Settings to open the Windows Save As dialog box From this dialog box you can select the filename under which the current device settings are saved The default file extension for this file is pcf Phone Configuration File Load Settings Load a previously saved configuration into the current device Click File gt Load Settings to open the Windows file open dialog box From the file open dialog box you can select the phone configuration file pcf to load into the currently selected phone device The device that you load is accepted only if the saved device type is the same as the current device Also note that Line appearances Answer Keys Hunt Group keys Handsfree keys and Intercom keys are not end user programmable features and therefore are skipped The Load Settings command is available for offline button labeling and online phone device programming Exit Exit the Desktop Assistant Pro AE Labels menu The labels menu offers the following commands Print Preview Previews the label before printing To open the Print Preview window click Labels gt Print Preview From this window you can preview the labels for the current device and print them from here or close the dialog box Print Prints the label from the current device to
303. pter 28 Market profile attributes Table 74 France Germany Global Holland Hong Kong and Italy parameters Sheet 2 of 4 Market profile Hong Functionality Attribute France Germany Global Holland Kong lreland Digital trunking ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN ISDN protocols DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DASS2 DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS DPNSS BRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HKTA2015 ETSI 403 Protocols variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG_ ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG BRI S loop ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 ETSI 102 protocol variant BTNR191 PRI trunk protocol ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 ETSI 403 HkTA2015 ETSI 403 variants ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG ETSI QSIG MCDN ETSI QSIG MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN MCDN Global analog N A N A GATv1 N A GATv1 GATv1 trunk versions GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 Conference tone No Yes No No No Yes supported Held line reminder Off Off Off Off Off Immediate Delay ring transfer After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings Transfer callback After 4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After4 rings After 4 rings Telephony feature timeout settings Network callback 30 30 30 30 N A 30 Host delay ms 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 Link time ms N A N A 600 600 600 N A Target line if busy PBX
304. r Obserye Hot in service Hot in service CAHCL RETRE Hot in service CALLBCE Hot in Service Observe Description of error or action You tried to use Call Queuing but no call was ringing at your telephone SWCA The FEATURE 537 or FEATURE 538 request was used but there are no calls parked on any of the assigned buttons on your telephone All the lines or line pools available to the telephone are in use This prompt also appears when you try to dial an external number or use a feature that conflicts with the lines line pools or prime line used by the telephone Your installer must correct this situation You have not dialed an external telephone number since the last power interruption or system reset Line redirection You have one external line on your telephone but you need a second line to perform line redirection Redirect your external line using a line pool as the outgoing line Auto dial or Speed dial The telephone is set up to dial an external number on a prime line but the telephone does not have a prime line Your installer must correct this situation There is no call ringing at your telephone If you have a flashing line button but your telephone is not ringing press the line button to answer the call on that line Saved number redial You have tried to save the number of an incoming call You can only save numbers that you have dialed Speed dial There is no number stored on the speed dial code
305. r Redial 5 82 Camp on Line buttons Move 81 82 Dialing Mode Line Pool 64 83 Privacy on off Line Redirection 84 84 Line Redirection Line Redirection Cancel 84 84 Line Redirection Cancel Link 71 84 Call Log options Long tones 808 85 Do not Disturb NN40020 300 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 35 Table 6 Features sorted by feature name and by activation code Sheet 3 of 4 Sorted by feature name Sorted by activation code FEATURE FEATURE Feature name lt code gt lt code gt Feature name Malicious call identification MCID 897 85 Do not Disturb Cancel Memory buttons Program 3 85 Call Log password Messages Send 1 86 Background Music Messages Cancel Send 1 86 Background Music Cancel Messages View 65 88 Voice Call Deny Name and number blocking 819 88 Cancel Voice Call Deny Name and number blocking Cancel 819 800 Trunk Answer Page 60 801 Call Queuing Page Combined internal and external 63 802 Group Listening Page External external speakers 62 802 Group Listening Cancel Page Internal telephone speakers 61 803 Time Pause 78 804 Wait for dial tone Priority Call 69 805 Test telephone display Privacy on off 83 806 Static Time Record call 989 806 Static Time Cancel Ring Again 2 807 Ringing Signal Call Ring Again Cancel 2 808 Long tones Ring Type 6 811 Call
306. r headset e Line numbering starts on button 09 Note The 7316E digital phone buttons are mapped differently than the 7316 digital phone buttons Therefore if you replace a 7316 digital phone with a 7316E digital phone the button programming reverts to the default settings for the 7316E losing any keys programmed by the user at the telephone Also settings copied from one telephone to the other can be in a different location on the 7316E This is consistent with how the system behaves if you switch any telephone model for a different model on the same connector Table 43 7316E digital phone upper button defaults 7316E digital phone upper button defaults Btn Btn Contrast 01 05 Blank Show time 02 06 DID only Sys Park Blank 03 07 Send Message Blank 04 08 Speed dial NN40020 300 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones 155 Figure 45 7316E digital phone lower button mapping 09 ea Gull 12 13 pr aeaaneaene El 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Table 44 7316E digital phone lower button defaults 7316E lower button defaults Btn PBX DID Btn PBX DID 09 Sys Park Target 17 Call Timer line 10 Saved No 18 Ring Again 11 Call Fwd 19 DND 12 Pick up 20 Transfer 13 Page 21 Last No 14 Transfer 22 Voice call 15 Time Date 23 Intercom 16 Receive Msg 24 Intercom Device Configuration
307. r in the Call Log e name and number of the caller e indication if the call is long distance e indication if the call was answered and by whom e time and date of the call e number of repeated calls from the same source e name of the line carrying the call Call Log can help to e keep track of discarded calls or calls not answered e track patterns for your callers for example volume of calls and geographic area of calls e record caller information quickly and accurately e build a personal telephone directory from log items Information such as long distance indicator and the caller name and number may not show in the log The appearance depends on the Call Display services provided by your local telephone company and the local telephone company at the caller end Call logging limitations e A total of 600 log spaces are shared by all telephones assigned with call log space To ensure that this list does not fill up and start rejecting logs ensure that autobumping is enabled FEATURE 815 e If you answer the call and then forward it the call logs only at the forwarding telephone e If call forward is set calls log at both the forwarding telephone and the target telephone providing the target telephone answered the call e Ifthe call is released by the telephone to which the call is forwarded only the forwarding telephone logs the call e Hunt group calls are logged only when a call is answered e Ifa call is redir
308. r telephone sets Download the Desktop Assistant family of applications including the LAN CTE Client from the BCM web page The application interface includes documentation for these applications The Desktop Assistant family of products consists of e Desktop Assistant e Desktop Assistant Pro e Desktop Assistant Pro AE Administrator Edition Note To run Desktop Assistant Pro AE the LAN CTE Client must be running Table 60 lists a comparison of the main features of each application The Desktop Assistant Pro AE is the administrator tool It requires the user to log onto the BCM using the BCM security system for authentication It provides features that the Element Manager does not currently have designing and printing labels saving a definition for a set and applying that definition to another set This application allows users to program the keys on a set and then print the corresponding labels The application also allows access to all the sets on the system Refer to the following topics for additional information e Introduction to Desktop Assistant Pro Administrator Edition on page 187 e Button programming on page 190 e Button labeling on page 190 e Menu bar commands on page 188 Device Configuration Guide 184 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio Table 60 Feature matrix Sheet 1 of 4 Features Functionality Desktop Assistant Desktop
309. r the internal telephone number you want to program Line redirection You selected the intercom button as the facility on which to place the call Enter a line pool code or a destination code You tried to program redirection while the feature is in use Only one person can program line redirection at a time SWCA The requested SWCA code is being used by telephone XXX Choose another key position Message You are trying to call from your message waiting list The line that you are trying to use is in use by the identified user in your system You entered an invalid feature code Speed dial You have entered a code outside the code range 01 70 for system 71 94 for user based speed dials Device Configuration Guide 240 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Invalid location Invalid number Invalid number CAHCL RETR Invalid number Obserwe Invalid zone Linesa 1i45 Linear Lines CAHCLRETRYJOTH Lines s HAH TRAHSFR Liner TRAHSFR Linese s callback CALLBCE Line sas hurd uF Lave L IHEHAMUMS 3 HEST CALL CLEAR Linesaeeline yy Linesan to prime Linesax transfer Lineas waiting Description of error or action Move button You tried to move a line to a button that cannot be a line button such as an intercom button Handsfree Mute button or an answer button You entered an invalid line pool code or an invalid destination code Auto dial You are programming an in
310. r the public network Also refer to Public network settings in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 North America If the OLI contains the public network code the information in the Public Network code field is ignored Therefore it is recommended that OLIs be programmed to the public received number length only This allows a global change if the Public Network Code is changed Also refer to Configuring CLID on your system in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 45 Table 9 Line Access System DNs table fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Priv OLI lt numeric gt Define the originating line identification number OLI that appears on the telephone being called from this telephone over a private network Note On systems running DID this field is populated automatically with the DN On PBX systems this field is populated automatically only if the DN length and the Received length are the same If the DN length or the Received length are changed to be different from each other this field is cleared Also refer to Configuring CLID on your system in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 If your system allows outgoing name and number blocking the telephone must have a valid OLI Fwd No up to 24 digits Enter the number to which you want to redirect unanswered Answer incoming calls
311. ransfer toi CAHCL RETRE Unesuirred line Unknown namber Use line Pool VES Ho Uoice call Your list full Your number Obserye Description of error or action Message You are trying to send a message to a user whose message waiting list is full Transfer Your transfer does not function for one of these reasons e All the resources needed to perform a transfer are in use Try again later e You have tried to transfer an external call to another external party Some restrictions apply e You cannot transfer your conference call Transfer Press RETRY if you entered the wrong internal number or if the person to whom you are transferring the call is not available On 7000 and 7100 digital phones use the FEATURE 70 feature code to cancel the call and then retry Line redirection The line you are trying to redirect cannot be redirected because the hardware does not support redirection Speed dial The system cannot dial the number stored Reprogram the number You received a Ring Again offer for a line pool Press the flashing internal line button Or YES to use the line pool On 7000 and 7100 digital phones lift the handset Otherwise press NO or wait 30 seconds for the Ring Again offer to expire Voice call The line is open for you to speak Message You tried to send a message but your list of sent messages is full Cancel one of the messages you sent if possible or wait until you have received a repl
312. ration Guide 10 Contents Job aid Assigning intercom I C buttons keyS 000 eee 130 Configuring telephone capabilities 00 0 00 ee 131 Job aid Line redirection notes 002 c eee ee 133 Configuring Preferentes cccccccageeeene bie etbiva db been cade tienes e oes 134 JOGA CAO INES rrr rrtt ose 4 dese ORE TO SERE HERE G SES SERS 135 Telephone memory button programming sssssasasaarrsa eee eee eee 136 Job aid Notes about button programming 0 0 ee eee eee 136 User speed dials acpi rhs wens ho ahs abe dm A ets eed ar eS eed 137 Outgoing Call restichonE ccce accaa tee ensek NORE oe PORK RRR S TETEA ESE R TEA 137 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones 000eeeeeeeeee 139 Configuring an IP telephone 2 cst sites ceo ee eke ee eb Add we eee oa 141 PVQM Proactive Voice Quality Monitoring 0 000 cece eee eee 141 Chapter 20 Global VoIP Teauires cisscencdsseedncdadcscicerctescrsuerscias 143 a e orcad ia dake eis Bal eed gh ee eon EE Giese igh ete 143 IP telephone feature display labels 000 00 cece eee 145 Hot desking IP telephone configurations eee eee ees 147 Moles aD POLOOSI 2iedci kei dewetsteeheew ie deeds QuenS bene saws 147 Using the Hot desking feature 0 00 eee eee 148 Configuring a new time zone on a remote IP telephone 0 150 Download firmware to a Nortel IP telephone 00 e
313. re code you want to assign to the button Check that the code is valid Feature button You have programmed a button with a feature programmed on another button The feature has moved to the button you just programmed The original button is now blank Button inquiry The name of the feature assigned to a button appears on the display when you press the button Press or SHOW for additional information You took more than 15 seconds to press a button in response to a display Call forward Your calls are being forwarded to telephone NNN Call forward There are several reasons why you can receive this message For example you cannot forward your calls to a telephone that has Call Forward programmed to your telephone The last number you dialed or the number you saved for Saved Number Redial was a speed dial number that displayed a name instead of the number You dialed the number correctly but it is not visible While on a call you must either release the call or place the call on hold before you can program a feature button SWCA The requested SWCA code already has a call parked on it Choose another key position You entered the feature code for an application that is disabled The line you are trying to use to redirect calls is for incoming calls only Select an outgoing line The active call display of the former conference master Silent monitor The hunt group member is being monitored already Auto dial Ente
314. read only gt These are the lines on which this telephone can receive calls If the line is a two way line DID the user can also use the line to make calls Also refer to Configuring Lines in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Appearance Type ___ Ring only Select how a call on this line appears on the telephone Appr amp Ring Appr If you choose Appr amp Ring or Appr only you can have as many only simultaneous DID calls as there are target line button appearances If you choose Ring only you can have as many simultaneous DID calls as you have intercom buttons Note The BCM50 2 0 does not support a mixture of Appr only and Ring only appearances for the same line 7000 or 7100 digital phones default to Ring only Model 7000 phones are supported in Europe only Appearances lt 1 10 gt Select the number of appearances of a target line for target lines Note The number of appearances that can be assigned to a only telephone depends on how many buttons with indicators are available Target line appearances cannot overwrite other line appearances Answer DNs Intercom buttons or assigned Handsfree button NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 47 Table 10 Telephone line assignment fields Sheet 2 of 3 Attribute Values Description Caller ID set lt check box gt This prompt only appears for target lines and for any analog lines that provide CLID t
315. reland Ringing service Manual Manual Off Off Off Manual mode Ringing service Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes trunk ans Restriction Off Off Off Off Off Off service mode Restriction global N A N A N A N A N A N A overrides Restriction filter N A N A 0 N A 00 170 0 0800 1 Service modes 01 1 1800 172 173 1877 1888 1747 1760 911 911 1761 1766 9411 976 1770 1771 1976 1772 1775 1 976 1778 1783 1900 1788 900 1 900 5551212 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 010 1 00 Restriction filter N A N A N A N A N A 7 Routing service Off Off Off Off Off Off mode Routing service No No No No No No overflow Public DN Public DN lengths Default 25 Default 25 Default 7 Default 7 Default 7 Default 8 0 11 0 11 0 11 00 17 00 12 00 12 1 3 9 3 01 17 01 17 011 18 011 18 1 11 1 11 411 3 411 3 911 3 911 3 Unknown number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Public OLI Local number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length National number Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable Variable length Handsfree Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto None Set capabilities Pickup group None None None None None None Allow redirect Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Call forward delay Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Disabled 4 Note The field for number of rings is hidden in default mode disabled
316. required for individual group members Configuring Hospitality services on page 111 explains the feature in detail Also refer to the Hospitality Features Card Setting up a central answering position For incoming calls you can have a central answering position or you can specify target lines to one or more telephones to receive directed calling If you are using the central answering position to answer all calls or to monitor incoming calls you may need the extended capabilities of a T24 Key Indicator Module KIM for digital phones or a Key Expansion Module KEM for IP Phone 2002 and 2004 These telephones allow you to expand the number of line assignments SWCA code assignments and Hunt group indicators If you do not filter incoming calls through an central answering position you can arrange your telephones in Hunt groups ringing groups or call groups that use system wide call appearance SWCA assignments to share calls You can set up a central answering position to enable you to e To filter all incoming calls through one point e To provide fallback for unanswered telephones Set up the prime telephone feature or use call forward e To provide one number for callers that can be distributed to an internal group Set up hunt groups for service groups or System Wide Call Appearance SWCA assignments for small groups Device Configuration Guide 232 Chapter 26 Using telephones for special features e To provi
317. res require timeout parameters to close the feature NN40020 300 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings 79 Figure 24 System Timers Timers Park timeout sec 45 FA Page timeout sec 180 v Table 25 describes the timers Table 25 Timer values Camp timeout sec 45 w Transfer callback timeout Alfter 4 rings Y s Host delay ms 1000 v Link time ms 600 v Attribute Values Description Camp timeout sec 30 45 60 90 120 150 or 180 Assign the number of seconds before an unanswered camped call returns to the telephone that camped the call Also refer to Camp on on page 209 Default 45 seconds Park timeout sec 30 45 60 90 120 150 180 300 or 600 Assign the number of seconds before a parked call on an external line returns to the telephone which parked the call This interval is used for SWCA lines as well Also refer to Call Park codes in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Default 45 seconds Page timeout sec 15 30 60 120 180 300 600 or 2700 Define the period of time after which the paging feature automatically disconnects Also refer to Paging on page 219 Default 180 seconds Transfer callback timeout After 3 rings After 4 rings After 5 rings After 6 rings After 12 rings Specify the number of rings before a callback occurs on a transferred call You can estimate the delay in s
318. rmation Alpha tagging If you are using the alpha tagging feature choose Name Refer to Using alpha tagging for name display incoming in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Auto Called ID lt check box gt Select whether you want to see on your display the extension number and name of the telephone you call The Auto Called ID set for target lines is the same telephone that has an appearance on that target line Capabilities tab Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones and how the telephones receive calls Note Not all the fields shown below necessarily appear for any one type of telephone Some fields relate to specific models of telephones Table 14 describes the fields on this panel Table 14 Capabilities panel fields Sheet 1 of 3 Attribute Values Description Handsfree None None The handsfree feature is not available on all telephone Standard models 7000 and 7100 digital phones 2001 IP phones Auto Standard The handsfree feature is activated by pressing a button on the telephone Auto The handsfree feature is activated when the telephone receives a call Note Handsfree must be enabled on any telephone that allows headsets For 7316E digital phones set Handsfree to Auto 7406 digital cordless phone Handsfree must be enabled for this handset to work Speaker volume Note that the speaker volume returns
319. rs subpanel in the lower frame click the DN row to be removed 3 Click Delete located under the Hunt Group Members subpanel 4 Click Yes Up Member order within a Hunt group is important The member order determines how a call routes Dawa through a Hunt group when the group is set to either linear or rotary mode 1 Click a member from the member list 2 Click either the Up or the Down button The system automatically reorders the list NN40020 300 Chapter 14 Configuring Hunt Groups 107 Table 34 Hunt Group tables Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Value Description Line Assignment Lines lt line gt These are the lines target lines that are assigned to the hunt group Ensure that they also are not assigned to any of the member telephones Action Add Multiple lines can be assigned to Hunt groups However a line can only exist in one Hunt group Programming note Lines assigned to line buttons on individual telephones take precedence over the lines assigned to Hunt group buttons Therefore Nortel recommends that you do not assign lines to individual telephone DN records for telephones that are part of a Hunt group 1 On the Hunt Groups Members subpanel select the hunt group where you want to add lines 2 Inthe Line Assignment subpanel in the lower frame click Add 3 Enter line numbers 4 Click OK Delete 1 On the Hunt Groups Members subpanel select the hunt group where you want to delete lines
320. rth American characteristics The GASI parameters are provided in the following tables Table 84 GASI parameters Sheet 1 of 2 Market Profile Aspect Parameter Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong North America Market Support Localized Yes Yes No North No North Yes American American Based Based A Law A Law Transmission Terminal Input 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q Impedance Nominal Network 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q 600 Q Input Impedance PCM Coding mu Law mu Law A Law mu Law mu Law Scheme NN 40020 300 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes 279 Table 84 GASI parameters Sheet 2 of 2 Market Profile Aspect Parameter Canada Caribbean Global Hong Kong North America Loop Interface Ringing Frequency 20 20 20 20 20 Hz Ringing Amplitude 63 63 63 63 63 Vrms Loop Current Detect 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 16 Threshold mA Loop Current Limit 26 26 26 26 26 mA Call Minimum Seize 200 200 200 200 200 Supervision Duration ms Minimum Answer 10 10 10 10 10 Duration ms Minimum Maximum 250 1100 250 1100 250 1100 250 1100 250 1100 Recall Duration ms Minimum Clear 1400 1400 1400 1400 1400 Duration ms Disconnect 800 800 800 800 800 Supervision OSI Time ms Dial Pulse Dial Pulse Coding N N N N N Scheme Minimum Maximum 25 120 25 120 25 120 25 120 25 120 Break Dura
321. ry button programming for telephones 167 In the Feature area within the Applications interface the soft keys can show either text or icons The text labels are displayed by default and are changed using the Tools menu Table 53 Feature Key text and icon displays Text display Icon display The Tools Navigation area has five main elements presented as touchable soft keys Table 54 Tools Navigation area buttons Tap this icon to determine which external applications are registered for example My Call Pilot and launch them by tapping on the appropriate icon Tap this icon to access the Telephone fa screen Tap this icon to go to the primary external application The icon of the application is displayed Tap this icon to access the tools used on the IP Phone 2007 Tap this icon to display a virtual keyboard pop up keyboard for text entry IP audio conference phone 2033 button defaults The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 brings voice and data to the tabletop audio conference environment by connecting directly to a Local Area Network LAN through an Ethernet connection Device Configuration Guide 168 Chapter 21 Default memory button programming for telephones The IP Audio Conference Phone 2033 has the following features three soft keys self labeled that when required map to four soft keys the gt gt soft key is used to navig
322. s feature is not supported on ISDN trunks Run Stop Insert a break point into a sequence of dialed numbers or characters used for FEATURE 9 automatic dialing This is necessary when you are connecting to a PBX or similar B host system For example if a company has an automated attendant that instructs you to dial an internal number you need you can program the company number a Run Stop then the internal number on one external autodial button The Run Stop symbol uses one of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial sequence You can include up to three Run Stop commands in a dialing string The system ignores a fourth Run Stop and any digits or commands that follow three Run Stop commands in a programmed dialing sequence Programming There is no system programming for this feature Wait for dial tone FEATURE 804 DT Program with an external auto dial number to cause the system to wait to receive a dial tone from another system before proceeding with the dialing sequence This feature FEATURE 804 causes a sequence of numbers to pause until dial tone is present on the line before continuing to dial You can use this feature if you must dial a remote system and then wait for dial tone from that system before dialing the remainder of your number The Wait for Dial Tone symbol uses two of the 24 spaces in an autodial or speed dial sequence Programming There is no system programming for this feature NN40020 300
323. s sequence depends on what you chose for the route in the Value field Option Feature lt feature options gt Includes settings such as page zone NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 63 Table 17 Button programming fields Sheet 2 of 2 Setting Values Description External autodial Use prime line Choose the route through which the telephone dials facility Pool Prime line the prime line assigned to the telephone Use routing table Pool X one of the pools assigned to the telephone Use line Routing table enter the routing code with the external phone number Use line X one of the lines assigned to the telephone User Speed Dial tab Speed dial numbers allow users to dial a number with fewer button presses than dialing the entire dial string Note User speed dials are only available from that users DN number Figure 18 User Speed Dial tab Details for DN 325 Capabilities SWCA Call Group Preferences IP Terminal Details Button Programming Table Button Programming User Speed Dial User Speed Dial Numbers Speed Dial Number External Number Facility i EE o Use routing ta Use prime line Table 18 describes the fields on this panel Table 18 User Speed Dial panel fields Sheet 1 of 2 Setting Values Description Speed Dial lt 71 94 gt The number the user dials to dials out the number entered in the Number External fiel
324. s setting determines if the system automatically places an active call on hold if you answer or initiate another call If you do not select this box the system drops the active call unless you press the HOLD button first when you answer a call or initiate another call Default Selected The user can change the Auto hold setting at their telephones by pressing FEATURE 73 SWCA note Ensure this setting is selected for any telephones with configured System Wide Call Appearance SWCA keys Refer to Sharing calls by parking on SWCA buttons on page 211 Allow redirect lt check box gt Define whether this telephone allows assigned lines to be redirected This must be selected to allow call forwarding outside the network external call forward including calls to a centralized voice mail system over a private network Redirect ring lt check box gt Define whether the telephone rings briefly when a call on one of its lines is redirected by the Line Redirection feature FEATURE 84 Also refer to Trunk Line Data main panel in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Receive short tones lt check box gt Analog equipment which is connected to the system with an internal or external analog terminal adapter ATA2 responds only to tone dialing signals Select this setting only if you have analog equipment connected to a station port Silent monitor supervisor lt check box
325. s support only the following PYVQM metrics packet loss inter arrival jitter and round trip delay To determine the phase of your IP Phone refer to IP Phone 2002 models on page 161 and IP Phone 2004 models on page 160 The following is a description of the metrics e Packet Loss Packet loss can be viewed as an extreme case of delay There are a number of reasons that a packet could be lost in transit If a network failure occurs packets may be lost during the time that traffic is rerouted through alternate facilities e Inter Arrival Jitter Packet jitter refers to a variable delay on a packet to packet basic as it traverses a network For data applications it has a minor impact but voice is quite different It is a synchronous service and an exact relationship must be maintained between source and recipient of the information Device Configuration Guide 142 Chapter 19 Configuring telephones IP telephones e RTCP Round Trip Delay Round trip delay is an important measurement of network performance e Listening R Factor A direct measure of the call quality or transmission quality and incorporates the effects of CODEC type packet loss discard burstiness delay etc This metric describes the segment of the call that is carried over this RTP session There are two thresholds for PVQM metrics Warning and Unacceptable A violation of the Warning threshold indicates that the voice quality is reduced but is still w
326. s to other DNs The Copy command allows you to duplicate programming for a telephone and apply it to another telephone a range of telephones or to all the telephones on the system If information is copied to a record with an assigned telephone the copy information replaces the existing settings Note Unique configurations such as the Name do not copy over To copy telephone configurations Select Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs Click the DN number for the record that has the settings you want to copy Click Copy A WO N Select the DN to which you want to apply the selected settings Note Select multiple DNs by holding down the control or shift key and clicking multiple records 5 Click Paste The panel in Figure 22 appears Select the check boxes for the properties that you want to copy to the new DN Click OK Device Configuration Guide 70 Chapter 7 Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs Figure 22 Paste Set Data dialog box Paste Set Data Data to be Copied Control set Line access Restrictions Capabilities Telco data User preferences Buttons Renumbering DNs Your system auto assigns DNs based on the hardware for digital telephones In the case of IP telephones you can choose to auto assign DNs when the telephones register to the system When you change a DN the DN record retains the same port number because the telephone is not being moved phy
327. s to your branch office and your branch office redirects its lines to you you can create a redirection loop If these calls are long distance significant toll charges can result Warning While programming Line Redirection there is no indication of calls to A that telephone except a call that rings the telephone You can redirect only lines that appear as line buttons on your telephone Since 7000 and 7100 telephones do not have line buttons they do not support line redirection Also line redirection is not supported on telephones connected to an ATA2 or ASM GASM analog station modules You can answer the telephone if it rings while you are programming line redirection However call handling features are not available until the programming wait period times out If you need to use a feature to process the call quit line redirection programming by pressing FEATURE If you press RELEASE the call is disconnected In some conditions callers can experience lower volume levels when you redirect calls to an external location DPNSS notes UK only DPNSS lines connected to an Embark switch perform call redirection using the Call Forward feature The feature creates a tandem link back to the switch Before you program Call Forwarding on lines on an Embark switch line ensure that e The DTM is configured to DPNSS and the Host Node switch connection is set to Embark e Both real channels and virtual channels are provisioned
328. set relocation 77 Goodbye key 165 175 Group Listening activating 802 34 at telephone 802 38 canceling 802 34 Group Pickup activating 75 34 199 answering from a telephone 75 38 hunt groups 234 H handling many calls Hold 204 handsfree programming 52 Handsfree Speaker key 175 handsfree answerback programming 53 Headset key 165 175 headset volume 193 Held reminder 76 Hold auto hold code 73 33 auto hold control 54 automatic 204 exclusive 205 exclusive hold 79 34 exclusive hold at telephone 79 38 handling calls 204 held reminder settings 76 invoke SWCA parking by hold 82 tones music or silence 76 Hold key 165 169 175 Hospitality programming overview 231 Host delay timer 80 host signaling link 66 host system signaling pause 228 Hot Desking change password 149 Feature 999 34 hotline facility 56 numbers 56 overview 229 hunt delay 103 Hunt groups auxiliary ringer 104 Broadcast mode 103 distinct rings 104 distribution modes 103 DN default value 102 feature operation 234 hunt delay timer 103 if busy 103 Linear mode 103 monitoring mode 84 monitoring with IP telephones 110 moving members 106 name 102 overflow constraints 78 programming overview 233 queue time out 103 Rotary mode 103 SM password 84 sets 84 hunt groups SM supervision 54 incoming calls tracking 214 NN40020 300 Index 309 information caller calllogs 135 current call 811 38 in
329. sically The original DN then assigns to the port vacated by the DN that you assign as the new DN If you fill the DN Port record in the Programming Records remember to change the entries Change telephone DNs using the Element Manager Two panels in Element Manager from which you can change the DN setting e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets e Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Dialing Plan gt DNs The procedure is the same in both panels To change telephone DNs 1 Double click the DN you want to change 2 Type the number of the DN you want to assign to the set NN40020 300 71 Chapter 8 Telephony system and device programming The following list provides links to the telephone and telephony system programming areas of the system Within the context of the network system telephones act as call end points or call initiation devices e To make or receive calls telephones must be set up with the correct line assignments e To make calls users must know the correct destination codes and dial strings to reach other internal or external devices Refer to the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 for connections to the sections that describe line setup and numbering plans How telephones handle incoming and outgoing call traffic is determined by telephone features Some telephone features are set up for the entire system while other parameters are confi
330. sirable If all lines in the pool are taken the user receives a busy signal Some trunks such as PRI and VoIP must be put into line pools For outgoing calls the line pools are assigned to the telephones that call out over these trunks All lines are configured in line pools A to O with the following exceptions e PRI BRI ETSI QSIG and VoIP lines can only be configured into line pools BLOC A to BLOC F Table 11 describes the access fields on this panel Table 11 Line Pool Access fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Values Description Line Pool lt read only gt This is a list of available line pools Choose the ones that provide the outgoing call access you want for the telephone Actions Add 1 On the Line access tab choose the DN record where you want to add line pools 2 On the Line Pools table in the bottom panel click Add 3 Enter a line pool in the dialog box 4 Click OK on the dialog box to save the line pool to the list NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 49 Table 11 Line Pool Access fields Sheet 2 of 2 Attribute Values Description Delete 1 On the System DNs table Line access tab choose the DN record where you want to delete line pools 2 On the Line Pools table in the bottom panel select a line pool you want to delete Click Delete 4 Click OK on the dialog box w Answer DNs tab Program a telephone to provide automatic call alertin
331. st assign a prime telephone for this feature to operate Refer to the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 for information on how to assign a prime telephone Default After 4 rings NN40020 300 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings 77 Table 23 Feature settings Sheet 3 of 3 Attribute Value Description Park mode Lowest Determine how the system assigns a retrieval code to parked calls Cycle Lowest the system chooses the lowest code that is available when the call is parked Cycle the system chooses the codes in a sequence from lowest to highest until all the codes have been used then starts at the lowest code again Also refer to Common dialing plan settings in the Networking Configuration Guide NN40020 603 Call Park access code and Timers on page 78 Park timeout Default Lowest Maximum CLI per line lt read only gt This setting indicates the maximum number of telephones that display CLID simultaneously for an incoming call Default 30 nae an The Answer keys setting allows you to determine what types of calls Enhanced alert at a telephone that has answer DNs assigned Answer key Extended changes do not apply to portables Warning Do not change the default setting Basic if you have Contact Center active on your system Refer to Answer DN answer key levels on page 78 for attributes of each setting Also refer to Answer DNs tab on page 49 Default B
332. support Handsfree operation SWCA The FEATURE 520 request was unsuccessful either because the telephone has no associated SWCA keys or all the SWCA keys for that telephone are associated with other calls Note If the call is an internal call and the destination set has a SWCA associated with the call and if the originating set requests that the call be associated with a different SWCA then the destination telephone transfers the call to the new SWCA position If the destination telephone does not have a button programmed for the new SWCA position the call disappears from all SWCA button appearances and can only be retrieved by entering the corresponding SWCA code You tried to make receive or pick up a call when no line button was available Some features require you to have a button free Releasing calls can free up line buttons Message You have no line button free with which to reply to a message Call park You have tried to use Call Park with no active call on your telephone If the call you want to park is on hold reconnect to the call before you park it Call park There was no call on the retrieval code 101 125 that you entered Device Configuration Guide 242 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages Display prompt Ho calls waiting Ho free lines Ho last number Ho line to use Ho line selected Ho line selected Ho number saved Ho number stored Ho woice call Hot available Hot HG membe
333. system that you will allow to be used as supervisory telephones Default 5 SM password XXXXXX Enter a six digit password that must be entered after the supervisor presses FEATURE 550 To maintain system security change this password frequently Default 745368 SILENT NN40020 300 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings 85 Reset logs You can reset the log cache on the system by using the button defined in the following information Figure 28 System log reset Call Log Space E Reset Call Log Space x Space per lo a of sets with logs l Table 29 describes the fields in this box Table 29 Silent Monitor system settings Field Values Description Reset Logs lt button gt Opens Reset Call Log Space dialog box Reset Call Log Space dialog box Space per log lt Space number of calls gt Enter amount of space each telephone that supports logs has of sets with logs lt digits gt Indicate the number of telephones that will create call logging Also refer to e Monitoring Hunt Groups on page 109 Device Configuration Guide 86 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings NN40020 300 87 Chapter 10 Configuring system speed dial numbers System speed dial codes are assigned to external numbers You can use then the two or three digit code to dial the number or assign the code to a memory button instead of dialing the entire str
334. t Sets gt Active Sets gt Restrictions tab gt gt Allow Saved Number To allow last number redial 1 While on the call enter FEATURE 67 2 When your telephone is idle enter FEATURE 67 Autodial You can program memory buttons for one touch dialing of internal or external telephone numbers When you program an external autodial you must specify a path out of the system You can also program autodial buttons with speed dial codes Programming DN records memory buttons for autodial Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Button programming tab For information about programming memory buttons on the telephone refer to Programming memory buttons on page 226 Speed dialing BCM provides two types of speed dialing Device Configuration Guide 226 Chapter 25 Feature configuration Making calls e System Speed Dial programming allows you to assign two or three digit speed dial codes to the external numbers called most often You can set the system to have 01 to 70 codes or 001 to 255 codes e User speed dial numbers can be programmed during telephone DN record configuration or at the telephones by the users 71 94 To program speed dials in the DN record DN record select the telephone you want to program Select the Capabilities and Preferences tab Select the User Speed Dial tab Select Add Enter in User Speed Dials 71 94 Enter FEATURE 0 and the syste
335. t the correct line pools are assigned to the telephone to properly route the call e External External number Enter the complete call number for the external telephone you want to access Pool A Enter the line you want the call to use This cannot be a Use prime line target line Use routing table Pool A Refer to the line pool assignment for this telephone Use prime line Refer to the General record for this telephone Use routing table Refer to the routing tables The routing code for that table must be part of the External number ATA Settings tab Analog telephones have some settings that are specific to the analog connection An analog telephone can be connected to the system directly through an analog station port either on the Main Unit in countries that support Main Unit Analog Stations or through Analog Station Media Bay Modules These settings apply only when the DN record Model field is set to Other Analog telephones can also be connected by using an Analog Terminal Adapter ATA2 The digital station port can be on the main unit or on a Digital Station Media Bay Module Device Configuration Guide 58 Chapter 6 DN records parameters Figure 14 ATA Settings panel fields Details for DN 223 ATA answer timer 7 y ATA tones o ATAUSe Onsite v Msg indicate None w ATA device Modem v Disconnect supervision GASM only o Use the information in Table 16 to configure ATA settings Table 16 ATA s
336. telephone on page 229 Device Configuration Guide 30 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling Restriction and Routing services require a service control password before users are allowed to change scheduling on a control telephone The Service Control Password field on this panel allows you to delete a current entry and add a new password Make a note of the password the panel displays only asterisks Configuring schedule names and timers The tables on this panel allow you to change the names of the schedules and to determine when the schedules which are set to automatically execute are deployed Any changes to these settings affect all services that use schedules Figure 5 Schedule names and timers Scheduled Services Schedules Schedule Evening Lunch Sched 4 Sched 5 Sched 6 Schedule Times i a Day Start Time Stop Time Mond 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 23 00 00 07 00 00 Table 3 describes the fields on the subpanel tables Table 3 Schedule common settings Attribute Value Description Schedules Schedule lt alphanumeric gt Double click the field and enter a descriptive name for the schedule Schedule Times For each schedule there are timers for the seven days of the week Day lt seven days gt Start Time 00 00 to 12 00 This is the time
337. tercom assign lines 51 Include I C calls when auto associating SWCA 81 Include I C calls when invoked by Hold SWCA 82 internal autodial button programming 62 hotline 56 internal autodial button programming 62 intrusion controls overview 203 programming 53 IP features list 143 IP Hot Desking 999 34 See also Hot Desking IP Services list 900 34 IP telephones feature labels 145 firmware downloading 151 hunt group note 110 keep DN alive 59 IP terminal status features list 143 ISDN line services by region 283 terminal feature support 52 K keep DN alive 59 KIM Key Indicator Module CAP station 93 configuring as eKIM 95 configuring buttons 95 moving aset 95 L labels telephones 136 lamp message indicator 58 language alternate first 502 34 alternate second 503 34 alternate third 504 34 primary 501 34 programming 55 user programming 192 Last Number Redial activating 5 34 37 line first display 52 pools activating 64 34 redirection 133 Line DN key 174 line buttons moving 81 34 Line key 169 line pool external autodial 63 user speed dial 63 line pools access code from telephone 64 37 line services ISDN support by region 283 linear mode 103 lines BRI and PRI line types 284 Caller ID set telephones 47 PRI line note 131 redirection activating 84 34 canceling 84 34 hunt groups 234 initiating 84 39 target line appearances 46 user programming 193 link e
338. ternal autodial button and have entered a number that is not an internal number on your system Enter a valid internal number If the number you are entering is a destination code use external autodial Call park You have entered an invalid retrieval code Transfer You entered an invalid internal number Press RETRY and enter the number again On 7000 or 7100 digital phones use the FEATURE 70 feature code to cancel the call and then retry Silent monitor The DN you entered is invalid for your system Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Page You have entered a page zone code that is not between 0 and 6 Call duration timer You parked your last call You cannot see the length of time a call was parked You are receiving an external call forwarded from extension YYY or you have an answer button for extension YYY and an external call is ringing on that telephone Transfer Press JOIN to transfer the call on line XXX to telephone YYY Press RETRY if after talking to the person at extension YYY you decide to transfer the call to another person Conference call You are on a conference with the two lines or telephones shown You can drop out of the conference and leave the other two parties connected Unsupervised Conference by pressing TRANSFR or entering the Transfer feature code You are connected to an external call Press TRANSFR to transfer the call Enter the digits of the number you want to dial Pr
339. the BOM csser E Ee 297 To delete an audio file fr mi BOM oo cscccccessceneccassatenededasrenasduananscuseaniadenstaevkeseusuaetabensenen 298 TO add a sound file to the Play LISD cccscssssscccwserasiacesomesieccecsresicerqemasecceserervacedymeestieeeenens 299 To remove a sound file from the Play List ccesscceeeeeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneneeeeeeees 299 To access the BomAmp PAVE sesisgeccccuresvceisccatieccatetevitbeaclarscceemtavceuauetesieeselarmcstemens 300 To configure a Network Device to be the IP Music SOUICE cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 301 Device Configuration Guide 6 Task List NN40020 300 Contents Chapter 1 Getting started with BCM 0 00 cece eee eee 15 ACUtH UME lt 5 sod cote b 45 54 4 Shs BSE Gad SEGA E4S EIERE RAS PRG 15 PUGS opinnar EER eE oe Meee wh ade NER 15 PUNCNOS 0c Soe C6 GREE SHE RETRE EGE OER ERE ERROR eRe Eee Ree eS 15 POM bs ter ee EEEE TT E Re EG oe leas anil ears oie hn aba BA 16 CMAN sie keadmeen dooe eer eeeke ee e toeew Pesre neues aaes 16 ADOBO sarre eebeu tees oes Cea peeee eng Cees de eet aw een eee eee 16 Symbols and conventions used in this guide 0 0c eee eee 18 Related publications 2 cccccc3ees obese Reed ERE E DSRS TERRE iE EE REE Oe H 19 HOW Gel AGG occa yee se petals RSET HEELERS SERN GEER REEDS E SERS 21 Getting Help from the Nortel Web site 00 0 cece ee 21 Getting Help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center
340. the feature code for a free key Once the call is retrieved it is unassigned from the SWCA key Manually life of call The user either presses a free SWCA key on the telephone or dials the feature code for a free key When the call is retrieved it remains assigned to the SWCA key The key is freed only after the call is terminated Automatically life of call When a call is answered it is automatically assigned to a free SWCA key starting with the lowest available number When the call is retrieved it remains assigned to the SWCA key The key is freed when the call is terminated Include I C calls when auto associating Select if you want intercom calls to automatically park on SWCA lt check box gt keys Device Configuration Guide 82 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings Table 26 SWCA controls Sheet 2 of 2 Atiribute Value Description If you select the check box Auto associate SWCA key to call must be set to Automatically Life of call for this feature to work When the user makes a call using the intercom button the call automatically associates with a free SWCA key and remains assigned for the duration of the call If you do not select the check box The user must assign manually an intercom call to a SWCA key The call will behave according to the rules of the choice made for Auto associate SWCA key to call Invoke SWCA parking by Hold Select whether calls that are placed on
341. the file from the BCM For information about how to delete a sound file from the BCM refer to Deleting music from BCM on page 298 Device Configuration Guide 300 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source Using the BcmAmp Player The BcmAmp Player is a web based interface Use the BcmAmp Player to select play stop or pause sound files that appear on the Play List To access the BcmAmp Player 1 Start the Music Manager Administration application 2 Click the BemAmp Player link The BcmAmp Player interface appears Figure 65 BcmAmp Player NORTEL Home Hep Music Manager Administration BemAmp Player ic m eg Play List i Play List Silence File Manager guitar 5 piano Copyright 2006 Nortel Note When a song is stopped the Stop button changes to the Play button The following explains the actions associated to the BemAmp buttons Table 92 BcmAmp Player button actions Button Explanation ci Next Move to Next sound file Previous Move to Previous sound file NES i Play Play selected sound file NN40020 300 Chapter 30 Configuring the music source 301 Table 92 BcmAmp Player button actions Button Explanation rr Pause Pause play for selected sound file Stop Stop play for the selected sound file To select and play a sound file e click Next e click Previous e click the sound f
342. the group indicating that the call is available to be picked up Using Hold with SWCA keys If a call does not automatically park on a SWCA key when you press HOLD it means the call is parked only on your telephone on the line on which the call entered To make the call available to the group you must unhold the call press HOLD then press a free SWCA key The call is parked on that SWCA key and the line on which the call entered becomes free Temporarily parked calls Your system can be configured so that calls parked on SWCA keys release the SWCA key once someone picks up the call In this case if the person who answered the call wants to repark the call they must use one of the manual methods described above to repark the call on a free SWCA key The system can be configured to retain the call on the same SWCA key for the duration of the call which is the period until someone hangs up regardless of how many times the call is answered and reparked No available SWCA keys If all your SWCA keys have assigned calls and you receive another call you can e Put the call on HOLD until a SWCA key becomes free Do this by picking up the call The first call automatically is placed on hold at your telephone e Dial ina SWCA code that is not assigned to a button on your telephone If you assign a call to a code that does not have an appearance on your telephone use Page Voice call or Message to notify the group or another p
343. the selected printer To open the Print window click Labels gt Print From this window you can select the printer and number of copies of the current label set to print Phone menu Use the phone menu to switch between the different phone types In offline mode the entire list of supported phones except for the IP Phone 2007 IP Phone 2004 IP Phone 2002 IP Phone 2001 1140e 1120e and 2033 are available for labeling In programming mode you can select only those phones in the same class as the current one The classes of phones are as follows M7100 M7100N T7100 M7208 T7208 M7310 M7310N T7316 T7406 M7324 M7324N Device Configuration Guide 190 Chapter 22 Labelling telephone sets Desktop Assistant portfolio e 2004 2007 1140e e 2002 1120e e 2001 2033 This menu also offers a set refresh command Select this command to reset all labels to blank in offline mode In programming mode all buttons are queried from the set and all labels are set to the programmed values Button programming With Desktop Assistant Pro AE you can program buttons on a set so there is no need to memorize feature codes You can program buttons on any valid device by right clicking the appropriate label At this point you see a list of all the features you can program Scan the list or sub lists and select the feature to program on that button Button labeling In addition to button programming Desktop Assistant Pro
344. tion ms Minimum Maximum 10 90 10 90 10 90 10 90 10 90 Make Duration ms Minimum Interdigit 250 250 250 250 250 Pause Duration ms DTMF DTMF Coding 16 16 16 16 16 Scheme digits Min DTMF Detect 27 27 27 27 27 Level A dBm MWI HIgh Voltage HV Supported Supported Supported Supported 95V Supported 95V 95V 95V 95V Line Reversal LR Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Tone Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Class MWI Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported On hook Caller FSK Support Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore Yes Bellcore ID Disconnect OSI Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supervision Busy Tone Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Line Reversal Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported Device Configuration Guide 280 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes ATA2 parameters This section contains information for the ATA2 device The ATA2 is either DR6 or DR7 mode The mode is determined by the region in which you are located and is not a modifiable user preference Refer to the following tables for a list of parameters in each mode e ATA2 DR6 Market Support Transmission Loop Interface Call Supervision and Dial Pulse parameters on page 280 e ATA2 DR7 Market Support Transm
345. tion 360 361 pplication 361 362 Application 362 363 pplicatior 363 Line Access Capabilities and Preferences Restrictions 355 356 357 358 360 361 362 363 Priv OLI Fwd No Answer Fwd Delay Fwd Busy Fwd All 355 356 N A 357 j 360 361 362 N A 363 N Table 9 describes these fields Table 9 Line Access System DNs table fields Sheet 1 of 2 Attribute Value Description DN lt read only gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Model lt alphanumeric gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Name lt alphanumeric gt Refer to Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Port lt port number gt This number indicates the port number to which this DN corresponds A group of port numbers relates to a specific station module installed in your BCM If you change the DN for a telephone the port number remains the same If you physically move a telephone with the relocation feature turned on the DN transfers to the new port and the DN for that port transfers to the vacated location Pub OLI lt up to 12 digits gt This setting defaults to the DN of the device The Public Network Code concatenates to the beginning of this number to create the entire public network number The length of this number is dependent on the country requirements This line identification number OLI appears on the telephone called from this telephone ove
346. to place a call on hold at the current telephone All appearances of the call on other telephones indicate the line is busy 800 Trunk answer Allows the user to answer a ringing line while in a ringing service If enabled 801 Call queuing Allows the user to answer calls in order when several calls arrive in rapid succession Calls are presented in this order incoming calls timed out forwarded calls then camped calls 802 Group listening Activates the speaker on the set to allow a group of people to hear a call But the user must talk to the caller through the handset 803 Time Briefly displays the current time 804 Wait for dialtone Places a pause in a dialing string that holds the following digits until a dialtone is perceived on the line 806 Static date and time First line displays the date and time 807 Ringing Signal call Directly rings another telephone inside the system when an extension is entered after the feature is selected This is the same process as pressing an intercom button and dialing an extension 808 Long tones Allows the user to send long DTMF tones 811 Call information Allows the user to view information about a current call 812 Call log view Allows the user to view call log information information 813 Call Loglt Allows the user to add the current call to the call log manually NN40020 300 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes 39 Table 7 Button Programming Feature settings Sheet 3 of
347. ttings Sheet 2 of 4 Set command FEATURE Feature Description lt code gt 71 Link Activates the Link command which allows the user to access special features on a remote PBX system 74 Call park Allows the user to park a call 520 Find available SWCA key System searches for a free SWCA key among the SWCA keys that are assigned to the current telephone 521 to 536 System Wide Call Appearance 1 to 16 Non intercom calls are associated with an available SWCA key when the call is answered originated or placed on Hold Features that interact with this feature Hold telephone keys outgoing and incoming calls 537 Find oldest SWCA call System searches among the SWCA keys assigned to the telephone and unparks the call that has been parked the longest 538 Find newest SWCA call System searches among the SWCA keys assigned to the telephone and unparks the most recently parked call 550 Silent monitor Allows the user to monitor hunt group calls Telephone must be assigned with SM supervisor 75 Group pickup Allows the user to answer a call ringing telephone within the Pickup group 76 Directed pickup Allows the user to answer any ringing telephone within the same system 77 Call timer Allows the user to see the call duration timer 78 Pause Allows the user to insert a pause during a dialing sequence 79 Exclusive hold Allows the user
348. ttom panel click the Answer DNs tab Use Add to enter a valid DN and indicate how the call alerts at the telephone Click OK to save the record Answering a call coming to an Answer DN The Answer DN button presents an incoming call as a flashing indicator To answer the call lift the handset use handsfree or headset and press the button beside the indicator The call is transferred to your telephone freeing up the line on the originating telephone Note The Answer DN also can be used as an autodial button to the assigned telephone The indicator beside the Answer DN button must be idle to enable this feature NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 201 Note If call logging is enabled for the telephone then calls received through Answer DN are logged at the receiving telephone that answers the call Configuring privacy To maintain your privacy or if you do not want to be disturbed you can choose not to answer a call or you can use one of the features described below If you choose not to answer the call the Delayed ring transfer setting determines how many rings occur before the call is transferred to the prime telephone Configuration gt Telephony gt Global Settings gt Feature Settings Refer to the following methods to configure privacy e Do Not Disturb e DND on Busy e Turn Privacy on or off on page 202 e Intrusion controls on page 203 Do
349. u can add a maximum of eight Answer DNs per telephone 1 aR wR On the System DNs table Line access tab choose the DN record where you want to add Answer DNs Under the Answer DNs table click Add Enter the appropriate DN in the dialog box Click OK to save the entry On the Answer DNs table select the Appearance type field beside the Answer DN you just entered and choose the appropriate appearance type Programming Note If the telephone has memory buttons with display designators the system automatically assigns Answer DNs to buttons starting at the bottom right row of buttons If the telephone has Handsfree assigned to a memory button the Answer DNs start above that button If the telephone has no memory buttons with display ensure that you choose Ring only as the Appearance type Delete 1 2 3 4 On the System DNs table Line access tab choose the DN record where you want to delete Answer DNs On the An swer DNs table select the Answer DN line you want to delete Click Delete Click OK to save the selection Capabilities and Preferences main tab Capabilities settings control how the system interacts with individual telephones and how the telephones receive calls Preferences control how the telephone itself works These settings also can be set by users at the telephones using feature codes NN40020 300 Chapter 6 DN records parameters 51 Figure 11 Capabilities and Pre
350. u configure the line and can be changed through the Lines menus Hot desking IP telephone configurations You can transfer your IP telephony configuration temporarily from one IP telephone to another using the Hot desking feature This feature is described in detail in the Telephone Features User Guide NN40020 100 You use FEATURE 999 to enter the feature To perform Hot desking you task are prompted for a password which is specified at the telephone before you can complete the Notes about Hot desking The Hot Desking feature allows a user to divert calls and signals from one IP telephone to another For example if a user is temporarily working in another office they can retain their telephone number by Hot desking their usual telephone to the IP telephone in their temporary office The Hot desking code defaults to the first item on the services list Once Hot desking occurs between two IP telephones no activity is allowed on the originating telephone except to cancel Hot desking The display on the originating telephone indicates where it has been diverted Call forwarding to voice mail continues as normal Voice mail can be accessed from the diverted IP telephone in the same way as from the originating telephone Using headsets with Hot desking If you use the headset feature on your IP telephone and you want to hot desk your telephone to another IP telephone ensure that the target telephone also has a headset instal
351. ulse line BRI lt feature digits gt Specify a code that allows users to block outgoing name and number display over a BRI trunk Also refer to e Protecting outgoing call privacy on page 217 Device Configuration Guide 84 Chapter 9 Global telephony settings Silent Monitor The features in this dialog box provide the parameters that determine how you can use supervisor terminals on your system to monitor Hunt group members Monitoring external hunt group calls on page 109 Figure 27 Silent Monitor settings Silent Monitor Monitoring mode Silent x Number of SM sets 5 SM password Table 28 describes the fields in this dialog box Table 28 Silent Monitor system settings Field Values Description Monitoring mode Non silent Select Non silent if you want the hunt group member and the caller Silent to hear a conference tone when a supervisor breaks into a hunt group conversation Select Silent if you want supervisors to be able to break into a hunt group conversation without giving an indicator of their presence Note Initial monitoring is muted at the supervisor set If the supervisor wants to speak within the conversation a display key on the two line display becomes available once the connection is established The default changes based on country profile Number of SM sets lt 1 to 30 gt Indicate the number of two line telephones in your
352. unk GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 GATv2 versions Conference Yes No Yes Yes No Yes No tone supported Held line After 30 Off Off Off Off Off Off reminder seconds Delay ring After 15 After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 After 4 rings After 4 rings Telephony transfer rings rings feature settings Transfer After 15 After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 rings After 4 After 4 rings After 4 rings callback rings rings timeout Network 30 30 30 30 N A 30 30 callback Host delay 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 ms Link time N A 600 300 600 600 600 600 ms Target line if Busy Prime Prime Prime Prime Prime Prime busy setting BRI ISDN Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Manual Answer Mode Companding A law A law A law A law mu law mu law A law law DTI carrier E1 E1 E1 E1 T1 T1 E1 System settings type Number of 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 rings ina cycle M7000 set Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes supported Device Configuration Guide 262 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 73 Australia Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean and Denmark parameters Sheet 2 of 3 Market profile Functionality Attribute Australia Bahrain Brazil CALA Canada Caribbean Denmark Mode Sequential Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Broadcast Hunt groups Default delay 4 ring 4 ring cycles
353. up call In the Wake Up Call Settings and Expired Wake Up Call Settings boxes determine the following 1 Inthe Attempts field select the number of times the alerter sounds without the telephone handset being lifted before the alarm service automatically cancels 2 In the Retry interval field select a time period in minutes that the system waits between repeating the wake up alerter 3 Inthe Alarm duration sec field select the length of time the alert sounds each time it repeats 4 In the Notify DN field enter the DN of an administration telephone such as the front desk telephone When a wake up call expires at any of the room telephones an indication appears on the display of the telephone 5 Ifyou also want a tone to sound when a wake up call expires select the Use tone check box To assign a room to a telephone The Rooms context panel displays all telephones currently connected or registered to the system 1 2 Select the telephone DN you want to assign to a room Click in the Room Number column and enter the room number Device Configuration Guide 116 Chapter 16 Configuring Hospitality services 3 Select or clear the Requires Desk Password check box as required Note If you select the Requires Desk Password check box ensure that a valid desk password exists To delete a room assignment from a telephone To delete a room assignment simply click the Room Number column and delete the number
354. upported by BCM50 The table ISDN services by Protocol on page 284 shows the network based ISDN supplementary services and the features available for each Table 88 ISDN line services e ISDN Call Connection Limit Call Offer e Network Call Transfer e Loop avoidance e Break in e Executive Intrusion e Trunk Route Optimization e Three Party TRO e Route Optimization e Trunk Anti Tromboning CCRD MCDN over PRI SL 1 DPNSS DASS2 ETSI QSIG e Basic Call e Basic Call Basic Call e Basic Call e DDI e DDI DDI e DDI e Name display e Diversion Originating line identity OLI e Name display e Number display e Redirection Terminating Line Identity TLI Number display e Centralized voice mail e Centralized voice Call Charge Indication CCl e Camp on mail Call Charge Rate Indication Device Configuration Guide 284 Chapter 28 Market profile attributes Table 89 ISDN services by Protocol Protocol Market profile Available ISDN services e Ni e Caribbean e North America Basic Call Number display DID ONN blocking Name display e ETSI e Australia e italy Basic Call AOC E specific changes Euro e CALA e Norway e DDI for Holland and Italy e Denmark e PRC e sub addressing on e MCID e Germany e Spain S loop e CLIP e Global e Sweden e ETSI Call Diversion e COLP e Holland e Switzerland partal rararmingy e CLIR e Hong Kong e United Kingdom Analog and digital trunk types The table
355. user to page internal to a specific zone which is identified within the Button programming For example F611 internal zone 1 F610 page internal all zones 62 Page External Allows the user to page through the speaker on a specific telephone 63 Page speaker and zone Allows the user to page through both the internal sets and externally connected paging equipment to a specific zone which is identified within Button programming 64 Line pool Allows the user to access a line pool The pool this button accesses is specified during Button Programming for this feature 65 Reply message Allows the user to access messages and send a reply to the message sender 65 Cancel message waiting Allows the user to cancel the message waiting indicator 66 Voice call Allows the user to make an announcement or begin a call through the speaker of another telephone 67 Saved number redial Allows the user to redial a number that was saved while on a call 68 Restriction override Allows the user to override any restrictions on the set or line with a CoS password 69 Priority call Allows the user to priority call an internal DN that is currently busy NE Contrast Allows the user to adjust the contrast of the display screen 70 Transfer Allows the user to transfer an existing call to another telephone or external number Device Configuration Guide 38 Chapter 5 System features and feature codes Table 7 Button Programming Feature se
356. w each telephone functions include e system settings Global telephony settings on page 73 e telephone model The DN records panel is a multilayered panel with multiple tabs Although all panels show up for all models not all models require configuration for all panels Refer to the task and feature programming links to determine specific configuration The panel tabs links provide a general description of each panel and definitions of each panel field Click one of the following links to connect with the type of information you want to view Panel tabs Main panel tabs common fields on page 42 Line Access tab on page 43 Line Assignment tab on page 46 Line Pool Access tab on page 48 Answer DNs tab on page 49 Capabilities and Preferences main tab on page 50 Capabilities tab on page 52 SWCA Call Group tab on page 54 Preferences tab on page 55 ATA Settings tab on page 57 Tasks Common procedures copying and renumbering DNs on page 69 Configuring telephones Digital telephones on page 123 Features Feature configuration Answering calls on page 197 Feature configuration Making calls on page 217 Hotline telephone on page 229 Control telephone on page 229 Supervisor telephone for silent monitoring on page 230 Features to set up telephone set features on page 191 Auxiliary r
357. when the schedule starts and any previously running schedules a m p m 24 00 stop Use a 12 hour or 24 hour format If the entry is less than 12 00 the system prompts for a day period setting 00 00 schedule is off start and stop are the same schedule runs for 24 hours start 22 00 stop 06 00 schedule starts at midnight runs until 6 a m then starts again at 10 p m 22 00 Stop Time 00 00 to 12 00 This is the time when the schedule stops a m p m 24 00 NN40020 300 Chapter 4 System schedule settings and services scheduling 31 Default time settings Table 4 provides a list of the default times for each schedule Table 4 Default schedule times Schedule Start Time Stop Time Schedule Start Time Stop Time Schedule 1 Night 23 00 07 00 Schedule 4 00 00 00 00 Schedule 2 Evening 17 00 23 00 Schedule 5 00 00 00 00 Schedule 3 Lunch 12 00 13 00 Schedule 6 00 00 00 00 Configuring scheduled service The table in the top frame lists all schedules available on the system Configure the settings for the schedules that you are using for your system Figure 6 Services table Schedule Nighi Services Service control password www Routing Sve Off ing Off Off ed 4 Off ed 5 Off ed 6 Off Restriction Sve Off Off Off Off Off Off Extra Dial Set 225 225 225 225 225 225 Overflow Ringing Sve Trunk Answer Off off off Off Off Off O0O ERARA
358. ws you to dial a number without selecting a line Your Prime line is selected when you start dialing a number Your Prime line must be free to make a call Pre dial allows you to enter a telephone number check it then change it before making the call The call does not dial until you select a line or line pool or lift the handset You can pre dial both external and internal numbers However you must select the correct type of line external or internal for the type of number you have entered Using the system Note that not all telephones allow all three types of dialing Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt top panel Capabilities and Preferences gt bottom panel Preferences Using the telset interface Telset Admin Terminals and Sets gt User prefernces gt dialing opt ns At the telephone 1 Press FEATURE 82 2 Press to select the mode 3 Press HOLD to store the mode Choosing the language for the telephone display Using the system Element Manager Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt top panel Capabilities and Preferences gt bottom panel Preferences Using the telset interface Telset Admin Terminals and Sets gt User prefernces gt Language NN40020 300 Chapter 23 Telephony features 193 e At the telephone FEATURE 501 to select Primary Language for the telephone display FEATURE 502 to select Alternate Language for the
359. x 986 904 Contact Center agent login log out Trunk Answer 800 905 Contact Center Supervise Turn Restriction service off 872 906 Contact Center Supervisor Help Turn Restriction service on 872 907 Contact Center Activity Code Turn Ringing service off 871 908 Contact Center agent make busy ready Turn Ringing service on 871 909 Contact Center queue status Turn Routing service off 873 980 Voice Mail Leave Message Turn Routing service ont 873 981 Voice Mail login View active services 870 982 Voice Mail Operator settings Voice Call 66 984 Call Forward to Voice Mail Voice Call Deny 88 985 Display Voice Mail DN skillset or Voice Call Deny Cancel 88 IVRSDN Voice Mail direct 988 986 Transfer to mailbox Voice Mail Interrupt 987 987 Voice Mail Interrupt Voice Mail login 981 988 Voice Mail direct Voice Mail Operator settings 982 989 Record call Wait for dial tone 804 999 IP Hot desking Note 1Contact your System Administrator for the service control password Button programming features The following describes the features available for Button Programming Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Button Programming Note that some of these features require other system settings in order to work e Some of the buttons are controlled by features under Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt All DNs gt Capabilities and Preferences gt Capabilities tab bottom panel Paging is an exampl
360. xternal call features 228 initiating code at telephone 71 38 insert into dial sequence 71 34 timer 80 listening group at telephone 802 38 Local Area Network LAN 171 log all calls 56 space reallocating 214 view call log 812 38 login to voice mail 981 40 logit 216 logit See also call log long distance callindicator 235 long tones entering in dialing sequence 808 34 external paging 219 Device Configuration Guide 310 Index specifying at telephone 808 38 loop avoiding redirection loops 133 lunch schedule 31 making a call common display prompts 235 manual activating call logit 813 38 for life of call SWCA keys 81 SWCA keys 81 maximum CLI per line 77 MCDN intrusion controls 53 MCID malicious call identification feature 897 35 initiating 897 39 overview 214 media bay modules availability by regions 251 members moving Hunt group 106 memory button activate programming 3 35 autodial 225 program defaults 153 programming at the telephone 226 message overview 218 reply message 65 37 message indicator analog 58 ATA 58 message reply enhancement allow disallow 76 analog telephones 76 message waiting cancel 65 37 Message waiting indicator 175 message waiting indicator message overview 219 messages cancel code 1 37 cancel send 1 35 direct dial telephones F1 76 express messaging into voice mail 980 39 message reply enhancement 76 overview 219 se
361. y internal or network extension or is not answered after a number of rings preset the call automatically rings you back A system timer determines how long the system waits for a transferred call to be answered before it returns the call to the original answering telephone System settings Transfer callback timeout To use the transfer feature Make or answer a call Press FEATURE 70 The call is placed on temporary hold Enter the number to which the call is to be transferred Stay on the line to speak to the person first a fF WO N Press RLS to complete the transfer Cancel feature FEATURE 70 or simply press held line Transfer unanswered calls Telephones which do not use call forward to a voice mail system can be programmed to forward unanswered external calls to a designated prime telephone To transfer unanswered calls 1 Click Configuration gt Telephony gt Sets gt Active Sets gt Line Access tab select the DN of the set to which you want to transfer the calls 2 Inthe Fwd No Answer field enter the number of the telephone to which incoming calls are to be redirected NN40020 300 Chapter 24 Feature configuration Answering calls 207 Line redirection When you answer a call you can redirect the line to an external number When redirected all incoming calls on that line are directed to the external number You can configure a tone to sound on your telephone when a redirection occurs Lines
362. y to one of those messages Silent monitor You entered your own DN Press Observe to enter another hunt group telephone Viewing active services These are the prompts you can receive if you are viewing or changing your service scheduling Table 64 Active services Display prompt sached Restren EXIT HEXT Sched Restr n QUIT Ok MEST lt Sched gt Ringing Es IT HEST Sched Ringing QUIT Ok MEST Description of error or action You are viewing the active services Press or NEXT to view the other active services Press RLS or EXIT to quit The name of the current Restriction service schedule appears on the display Press or NEXT to view the other Ringing service schedules Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule You are viewing the active services Press or NEXT to view the other active services Press RLS or EXIT to quit The name of the current ringing service schedule appears on the display Press or NEXT to view the other Ringing service schedules Press HOLD or OK to select the required schedule NN40020 300 Chapter 27 Display prompts and messages 247 Table 64 Active services Continued Display prompt Sched Routing EXIT HEST Sched Routing QUIT DE MEST lt Sched gt until QUIT DE MEST Ho services OH Services OH LIST Call log prompts Description of error or action You are viewing the active services Press or NEXT to view the other active serv
363. you are trying to use is not compatible with the configuration of the telephone or line Silent monitor You tried to start a monitoring session on a telephone that does not support the feature Your telephone is connected to the telephone you are trying to call Check your active line buttons and return to that call Pickup group You are connected to the telephone that made the call you are trying to answer This display appears if you are on a call to a colleague your colleague dials the number of a telephone in your pickup group and you try to answer that call Call park The person you were talking to has parked your call You cannot park the same call Auto dial The memory allocated to auto dial numbers in your system is full Auto dial While programming external auto dial you erase the button by pressing HOLD or OK before entering any digits You have received a Ring Again offer from a call to an internal telephone Press the flashing internal line button or YES to call the number again On 7000 and 7100 digital phones just lift the handset Otherwise press NO or wait 30 seconds for Ring Again to expire Wait for the telephone to be answered If no one answers press LATER to use the Ring Again feature or Message feature or press PRIORITY to make a priority call Priority Call You initiate the Priority call transfer to this local Priority call You tried to place a priority call to another telephone in your system The
364. you set a line to Ring only incoming calls appear on an intercom button The 7000 7100 digital telephones are exceptions they have no line buttons therefore you can assign any number of lines but only two lines can be answered at any one time Assign the Device Configuration Guide 128 Chapter 18 Configuring telephones Digital telephones lines on these telephones to ring otherwise you cannot detect incoming calls on the lines e An enhanced central answering position eCAP with one or more modules provides extra line button support if the number of lines to assign exceeds the number of available buttons with indicators The remaining lines assign to buttons on the module The eKIM also supports hunt group designators and multiple appearances of the same target line which flow to the module if there are no available buttons with indicators on the 7316E digital phone Warning eCAP programming issue on cold start reboot If you do a Backup Cold Start Restore sequence on your BCM button programming on an enhanced CAP eCAP module is lost and the lines assigned to those buttons are assigned to the buttons on the telephone These assignments displace any programming on the telephone buttons except Answer DN buttons intercom buttons handsfree buttons or Hunt group appearances In the case where there are more reassigned lines than buttons the system still assigns the lines to the telephone and the telephone rings when

Avaya BCM50 Configuration Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents